ML20134N356
| ML20134N356 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Issue date: | 06/30/1996 |
| From: | NRC OFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCH (RES) |
| To: | |
| References | |
| CON-FIN-L-1317 NUREG-0700, NUREG-0700-R01-V02, NUREG-700, NUREG-700-R1-V2, NUDOCS 9611260290 | |
| Download: ML20134N356 (500) | |
Text
NUREG-0700 O nev 1 Vol. 2 a.
Human-System Interface Design Review Guideline Reviewer's Checklist Final Report
( ,
{14anuscript Completed: March 1996 ate Published: June 1996 Division of Systems Technology Office of Nuclear Regulatory Research U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington, DC 20555-0001 i !
'..../
O
- eA2"n8818 "
0700 R PDR
1 AVAILABILITY NOTICE 1
Availability of Reference Materials Cited in NRC Publications l
Most documents cited in NRC publications will be available from one of the following sources: i
'l l 1. The NRC Public Document Roorn, 2120 L Street, NW., Lower Level Washington, DC l 20555-0001 1
- 2. The Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, P. O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328 1 The National Technical Information Service, Springfield, VA 22161-0002 l 3.
Although the listing that follows represents the majority of documents cited in NRC publica-tions, it is not intended to be exhaustive. I Referenced documents available for inspection and copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room include NRC correspondence and internal NRC memoranda; NRC bulletins, circulars, information notices, inspection find investigation notices; licensee event reports; vendor reports and correspondence; Commission papers; and applicant and licensee docu-ments and correspondence. l The following documents in the NUREG series are available for purchase from the Government Printing Office: formal NRC staff and contractor reports, NRC-sponsored conference pro-ceedings, international agreement reports, grantee reports, and NRC booklets and bro-chures. Also available are regulatory guides, NRC regulations in the Code of Federal Regula-
- tions, and Nuclear Regulatory Commission Issuances. ,
Documents ava,ilable from the National Technical Information Service include NUREG-series reports and technical reports prepared by other Federal agencies and reports prepared by the Atomic Energy Commission, forerunner agency to the Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
Documents available from public and special technical libraries include all open literature items, such as books, journal articles, and transactions. Federal Register notices, Federal and State legislation, and congressional reports can usually be obtained from these libraries.
Documents such as theses, dissertations, foreign reports and translations, and non-NRC con-ference proceedings are available for purchase from the organization sponsoring the publica-tion cited, Single copies of NRC draft reports are available free, to the extent of supply, upon written request to the Office of Administration, Distribution and Mail Services Section, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington DC 20555-0001.
Copies of industry codes and standards used in a substantive manner in the NRC regulatory process are maintained at the NRC Library, Two White Flint North,11545 Rockville Pike, Rock-ville, MD 20852-2738, for use by the public. Codes and standards are usually copyrighted and may be purchased from the originating organization or, if they are American National Standards, from the American National Standards Institute,1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018-3308.
O I
]
ABSTR ACT -
l NUREG-0700, Revision I, provides human factors engineering (HFE) guidance to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission staff for itsi (1) review of the human system interface (HSI) design submittals prepared by licensees or applicants for a license or design certification of commercial nuclear power plants, and (2) performance of HSI reviews that coun t be undertaken as part of an inspection or other type of regulatory review involving HSI design I or incidents invdving human performance. 'lhe guidance consists of a review process and HFE guidelines. The document describes those aspects of the HSI design review process that are important to the identification and resolution of human engmeering discrepancies that could adversely affect plant safety. Guidance is provided that coukt be used by the staff to review an applicant's HSI design review process or to guide the development of an HSI design review plan, e.g., as part of an inspection activity. The document also provides detailed HFE i guidehnes for the assessment of HSI design implementations. NUREG-0700, Revision 1, consists of three stand- l alone volumes. Volume 1. Human System Interface Design Review Guideline: Process and Guidelines, is the l principal technical document and provides a detailed discussion of both the review procedures and HFE i guidelines. Volume 2, Human System Interface Design Review Guideline: Reviewer's Checklist, provides the HFE guidelines in a checklist format. Volume 3, Human System Interface Design Review Guideline: Review Software and User's Guide, contains an interactive software application to support design reviews.
1 l
l I
4 iii NUREG-0700, Rev.1 Vol. 2
r o
I l
l
[
I CONTENTS l .
.Easc.
A B STR A CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LI ST OF FIG U RES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii l- LI ST OF TAB LES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x v PREFA CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x vii A CR O N YM S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi x .
1 INTR ODUCTI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I HFE G UIDELINE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I US E OF THE CHECKLI ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 INFORM ATION DISPL AY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 3
1.1 General Display Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.2 Display Form ats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 1.2.1 Continuous Text Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 1.2.2 Tables and Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17 1.2.3 Data Forms and Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -21 1.2.4 Bar Charts and Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -25 1.2.5 G raphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -27 1.2.6 Pie Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3 3
, d 1.2.7 Fl owcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -34 1.2.8 Mimics and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3 6 1.2.9 Maps........................................................1-38 1.2.10 Graphic Instrument Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 1.2.11 Speech Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -42 1.3 Dispuj Eleme nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -44 1.3.1 Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 1.3.2 Abbreviations and Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 1.3.3 Labe ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -4 8 1.3.4 leons and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -50 1.3.5 Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5 3 1.3.6 Scales. Axes, and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -5 5 1.3.7 Borders. Lines and Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60 1.3.8 Co lor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -6 1 1.3.9 Size. Shape, and Pattem Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64 1.3.10 Highlighting by Brightness and Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66 1.3.11 Auditory Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -69 1.4 Data Quality and Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -75
! v NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 I
l l
i
CONTENTS (Cont'd.)
1.5 Displ ay De vices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -7 8 1.5.1 Video Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -7 8 1.5.2 Large Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -80 1.5.3 Printers, Recorders, and Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82 1.5.4 Audio Display Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -87 1.5.5 M et ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 8 1.5.6 Light Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -91 1.5.7 Numeric Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .........................1-93 2 USER-SYSTEM INTER ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..........................21 2.1 General User input Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1 2.2 User Inp ut Fun n ats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15 2.2.1 Command Lan gu age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 2.2.2 Me nu S election . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18 2.2.3 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 2.2.4 Macros / Programmable Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 2.2.5 Form s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -3 3 2.2.6 Direct M anipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 2.2.7 Natural Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 2.2.8 Query Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 3 2.2.9 Question and Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 2.2.10 Speech . . . . . . . . . . . .......................................2-47 2.3 Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -5 0 2.3.1 A ppearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 0 2.3.2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................2-52 2.3.3 Movement ........ ................... ..................... 2-54 2.3.4 M ultiple Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 2.3.5 Pointing Cursors ...........................................2-59 2.3.6 Text Entry Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... ..... . .. 2-61 2.4 Sy ste m Respon se . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -63 2.4.1 General ...... ... .... ................................. .. 2-63 2.4.2 Prom p ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... ..... 2-65 2.4.3 Feed back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -67 2.4.4 Advisory Messages . . . . . .......... .. ...... .... ......... . 2-68 2.4.5 Error M essage s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -69 2.4.6 User Guidance / Help . .............. ....... ....... . .. . . . 2-72 2.4.7 System Response Time . . . . ..........................2-75 NUREG-0700. Rev.1. Vol. 2 vi
.. . -- - - - - . - - ~ . . - . . - . - . - - - - ~ . . -
4 4
4
.m CON"ENTS (Cont'd.)
1 x 2.5 Managing Displays . . .. .. ..... ... . ..... ... . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 8 4
j 2.5.1 Display Selection and Navigation . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -7 8 2.5.2 Display Control . . . . . . .... .. . . ............. . . . 2-79
- 2.5.3 Display Update /Frecie . . . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 i.
2.5.4 Display Suppression . . ... ,. ... ... .......... . 2-83 i 2.5.5 Scrolling and Paging . . . . .. ... .... ... ..... . .... ... . 2-84 4 2.5.6 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . ..... .... ..... ...... ...... 2-88 e
i 2.6 Managing Information . . . . .. ... .. ............. ......... .. .. 2-95 1-i 2.6.1 Editing Documents . . .... . ..........................2-95 2.6.2 S avin g Fil es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 103 l 2.6.3 Temporary Editing Buffer .......... ........... ............ 2-105 4
2.6.4 Excerpt File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... 2-106 l 2.7 Prevention / Detection / Correction of Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107 4
i 2.7.1 Validating User input . . . . . ................ .................... 2-107 l 2.7.2 Conecting Information/ Command Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
- 2.7.3 Confirming Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1 13
}O i
2.7.4 Protecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1 14
[' 5 2.8 System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1 17 I J
i 4
2.8.1 User Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1 17 2.8.2 Information Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 121 j 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 3-1 l
I 3.1 General Control Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1
1 3.1.1 Design Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1 j 3.12 Coding of Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -5 j 3.2 Inpu t Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -7 1
- 3.2.1 Alphanumeric Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
. 3.2.2 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12 3.2.3 Trackballs, Joysticks, and Mice .................................. 3-15 3.2.4 Touch Screens. Light Pens, and Graphic Tablets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 18 3.2.5 Speech Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 ,
I I
3.3 Conventional Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 l
3.3.1 Pushbutton Controls . ..... .................................323 vii NUREG-0700. Rev.1. Vol. 2
CONTENTS (Cont'd.)
l 3.3.2 Rotary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -2 8 3.3.3 Other Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -3 9 l 3.4 Control-Display Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -4 8 l
l l 3.4.1 Control-Display Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 1 3.4.2 Groups of Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 3.4.3 Dynamic Control-Display Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3-56 l
l 4 ALAR M S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... .. ... . ............ . .. 4-1 4.1 General G uidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 4-1 4.2 Al arm De fini tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4.3 Alarm Processing and Reduction . ................................ ..... 4-4
- 4.4 Alarm Prioritization and Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ . 4-7 l 4.5 Display . . .. ... ...... .... ................................. ... 4-8 4.5.1 General Alarm Display Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4.5.2 Display of High-Priority Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 10 4.5.3 Display of Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1 1 4.5.4 Display of Shared Alarms . ....... .... ........................ 4-13 4.5.5 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 14 l
4.5.6 Coding Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ..... ......... ... 4-17 4.5.7 Organization of Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 4.6 Control . . . . . . ..................................................4-28 l
i 4.6.1 General Alarm Control Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 4.6.2 Silence Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 4.6.3 Acknowledge Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -3 1 4.6.4 R eset Cmtrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -3 2 l 4.7 Automated, Dynamic, and Modifiable Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 4.8 Reliability, Test, Maintenance, and Failure Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 5 l
l 4.8.1 Reliability . . . . . . . ............ .... ................. ... . 4-35 l 4.8.2 Test . .................................................4-36 1 l
1 4.8.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . ... ........ . 4-37 ;
1 4.8.4 Failure Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 9 4 1
1 4.9 Alarm Response Procedures (ARPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 ;
l l :
4.10 Control-Display Integration and Layout . . . . . . . .. ......................4-42 l
)
NUREG-0700. Rev.1. Vol. 2 viii r
I I
i i
CONTENTS (Cont'd.) ;
\) 5 ANALYSIS AND DECISION AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 1 ,
J 5.1 Knowledge-Based Systems (KBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 I 6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 i i
l 6.1 General Communication Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 i 1
6.2 Speech-Based Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6.2.1 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6.2.2 Conventional Telephone Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 ,
6.2.3 Sound-Powered Telephone Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 j 6.2.4 Portable Radio Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 10 6.2.5 Announcing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 12 6.2.6 Other Communications Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6.2.7 Emergency Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.3 Computer-Based Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6.3.1 G en eral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 16 6.3.2 Preparing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 18 7
6.3.3 Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 19 6.3.4 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 7 WOR KPLACE DESIG N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 1 l
7.1 Workstation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 1 7.1.1 Stand-Up Console Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 1 7.1.2 - Sit-Down Console Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 7.1.3 Sit-Stand Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 15
'7.1.4 Vertical Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 16 7.1.5 Desk Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 17 7.1.6 Chairs ...................................................... 7-19 7.2 Control Room Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 21 7.2.1 Accessibility of Instrumentation / Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 1
7.2.2 Consistency of Staffing with Equipment Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 22 7.2.3 Fumiture and Equipment Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 '
7.2.4 Document Organhation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 7.2.5 Spare Parts. Operating Expendables, and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 27 7.2.6 Su pervisor Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 7.2.7 Multiunit Control Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 7.2.8 Emergency Equipment .........................................7-32 ix NUREG-0700. Rev, l. Vol. 2
CONTENTS (Cont'd.)
7.3 Environment .....................................................7-36 7.3.1 Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 7.3.2 Ventil ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 7.3.3 Ill umination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 8 7.3.4 Emergency Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 7.3.5 Auditory Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
. 7.3.6 Personal S torage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 7.3.7 Ambience and Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 7.4 Panel Layout ......................................................7-48 7.4.1 General Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 8 7.4.2 Layout Arrangement Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 7.4.3 Specific Panel Layout Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52 4
7.5 Panel Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 6 7.5.1 Labeling Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 6 7.5.2 Label location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 7.5.3 Label Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60 7.5.4 Use and Control of Temporary Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63 7.5.5 locati on Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 7.5.6 Label Letterin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66 8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 8.1 Label in g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 8.1.1 Placement of Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 8.1.2 Labe l Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -4 8.1.3 Labe l Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -5 8.2 Indic atio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -6 8.2.1 G aug es/M oters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -6 8.2.2 CRT Di sp l ays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -7 8.2.3 Valve Position Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 8.3 Con trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 8.3.1 G ener al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 10 8.3.2 M anu al Val v es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 1 8.4 Communic ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12 NUREG-0700. Rev.1. Vol. 2 x
t 1,
j CONTENTS (Cont'd.) s i
u 8.4.1 Loud speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
, 8.4.2 Public Address /Pager Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 8.4.3 High Noise Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 14 8.4.4 Two.Way Communication Systems Design Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 8.4.5 Administrative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 17 4
4 8.5 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 2
1 8.5.1 Temperature / Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 18 8.5.2 Noise .. ................................................... 8-19 8.5.3 Ligh ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -20 8.5.4 Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -21 G L OS S AR Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 1 xi NUREG-0700. Rev.1, Vol. 2
l LIST OF FIGURES No. Title P.asc.
1 Appearance of a guideline in Volume 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 Appearance of a guideline in Volume 2 (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.4 Recommended dimensions for unguarded and non-recessed pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 3.5 Recommended dimensions of legend pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 3.9 High-torque J-handle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 3.10 Key-operated control dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 3.11. Minimum dimensicns for rotary controls with finger stops and skirts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 3.12 Recommended dimensions for rotary selector switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 3.13 Recommended dimensions for discrete thumbwheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 40 3.14 Recommended dimensions for slide switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 3.15 Recommended dimensions for toggle switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 3.16 Recommended dimensions for rocker switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 7.1 Reach capabilities and control height for two stand-up consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7.2 Display height and orientation relative to standing operator line of sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
' 7.3 Reach capabilities for sit-down consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 7.4 Display height and orientation relative to seated operator line of sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7.5 Reach and visual range related to lateral and forward distance from center point . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
, 7.6 Leg- and foot-room dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
( 7.7 7.11 Recommended desk dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Measurement of minimum separation between controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54 i
a
\ -
xiii NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2
- . , , . , y e--s we'
_ - -, . ~ . . . . . . - . -. - . .. . . . - . . ~ . - . - - . . - . . - . - . . . . . .
1 4
i LIST OF TABLES 1
a
- No. Illic itsc.
! 2.4 Maximum and preferred system response times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 t
7.1 Anthropometric data used to set limits for equipment dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2 Illumination levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 7.3 Maximum task area luminance ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
- 7.4 RecoM4 workplace reflectance levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
! 7.6 Minimum separation distances for controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53 J
x 4
k i
d I
3 4
i 4
i i
i I
1 I
i
.i 4
1 i
i i
i
}
I 1
i, 1
i 4
1 xv NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 f
1 a
1
- i a
4 O PREFACE d NUREG-0700, Revision 1, consists of three volumes. The contents of each are briefly described below, i Volume 1 - Human System Interface Design Review Guideline: Process and Guidelines j Volume I consists of two major parts. Pan I describes those aspects of the review process of the human
]
system interface (HSI) design that are important to identifying and resolving human engineering ,
discrepancies (HEDs). Guidance is provided that could be used by the staff to review an applicant's or licensee's HSI design review process. Part I could also be used by the staff to assist with developing an HSI design review plan that might be used, for example, as part of an inspection activity. Part 2 of Volume I contains detailed guidelines for a human factors engineering (HFE) review which identify
) criteria for assessing the implementation of an applicant's or licensee's HSI design.
Volume 2 - Human System Interface Design Review Guideline: Reviewer's Checklist
< l j Volume 2 is a complete set of the guidelines contained in Volume 1. Part 2, but in a checklist format that
} can be used by reviewers to assemble sets of individual guideline:; for use in specific design reviews.
- The checklist provides space for reviewers to enter guidelines evaluations and comments.
Volume 3 - Human System Interface Design Revie w Guideline: Review Software and User's Guide
{ Volume 3 contains an interactive software application of the NUREG-0700, Revision I guidance and a user's guide for this software. The software supports reviewers during review preparation, evaluation design using the HFE guidelines, and in report preparation. The tser's guide provides system 9 requirements and installation instructions, detailed explanations of the software's functions and features, 1 and a tutorial on using the software.
4 j- r i !
j !
i i
?
i 0\
U xvii NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
ACRONYMS V
ACR advanced control room l i
AEOD Office for Analysis and Evaluation of Operational Data ARP alarm response procedure j
l CFR U.S. Code of Federal Regulations CIE Commission Intemationale de l'Eclairage
- COL combined operating license
.CR control room l DCRDR detailed control room design review DBA design basis accident
' DRG Design Review Guideline l EOF emergency operations facility FCC Federal Communications Commission
. HED human engineering discrepancy
) HFE human factors engineering
! HRA human reliability analysis
- HSI human system interface I&C instrumentation and control INSAG laternational Nuclear Safety Advisory Group J KBS knowledge-based system LCS local control station LED light-emitting diode LER licensee event report LOS line of sight 1
[x MFTA modulation transfer function area MPCD minimum perceptible color difference MUX multiplexer NPP nuclear power plant NRC U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission P&ID piping and instrumentation diagram PRA probabilistic risk assessment PWR pressurized water reactor RF radio frequency SAR safety analysis repon SDCV spatially-dedicated, continuously visible display SGTR steam generator tube rupture SPDS safety parameter display system SRP Standard Review Plan SSAR standard safety analysis report T&E test and evaluation TSC technical support center xix NUREG-0700, Rev.1 Vol. 2
l 1
l ACRONYMS (Cont'd.)
- UCS uniform color space I
4 UHF ultra high frequency V&V verification and validation VDU vileo display unit l
i
't 1 l i \
i l
l I I
t I
O 2
e 5
n 1
l NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 xx
( INTRODUCTION
/
}
The Human-System Interface Design Review Guideline (NUREG-0700, Rev.1) contains guidance to support ;
the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Conunission (NRC) staff's review of nuclear power plant (NPP) human-system l interfaces (HSis). The guidance consists of design review procedures (contained in Volume 1. Part 1) and human ,
l factors engineering (HFE) guidelines (contained in Volume 1, Part 2). This document, Volume 2, provides the HFE guidelines in a checklist format. Before using this checklist, the reviewer should be familiar with the HSI design review objectives, scope, and procedures described in Volume 1. As stated in the Preface, the guidelines are also available in electronic form in Volume 3.
1 HFE GUIDELINE DESCRIITION The HFE guidelines in Volume I, Part 2, consist of the following components:
. Guideline Number - Each guideline has a unique number which reflects its section/ subsection location, followed by a dash and then its unique number. For example, in Guideline 1.1-1, Display Screen Partitioning for HSI Functions, the "1.1" indicates that it is located in Section 1.1, General Display Principles, and the "-1" indicates that it is the first guideline in the section. Within sections or subsections, individual guidelines are numbered consecutively.
. Guideline Title - Each guideline has a unique, descriptive title.
. Review Criterion - Each guideline contains a statement of an HSI characteristic with which the reviewer g may judge the HSI's acceptability. The criterion is not a requirement, and discrepant characteristics may be judged acceptable as per the procedures in the review process (see Volume 1, Part 1).
(V )
. Additional Information - For many guidelines, additional information is given which may address clarifications, examples, exceptions, details regarding measurement, figures, or tables. This information is intended to assist the reviewer in interpreting or applying the guideline.
. Source - The source document (s) from which the guideline was developed is shown in superscript, according to the suffix number of the NUREG or NUREG/CR (e.g., a guideline from NUREG-0700, Rev. O, is referenced as 0700 in superscript following the AdditionalInformation).
In the interest of space, this checklist does not contain the Additionallnformation and Source components of the guidelines, nor the tables or figures that are referenced in the AdditionalInformation. The tables and figures referred to in the review criterion are included in this checklist. However, for consistency across the volumes, j these tables and figures have the same numbers as they have in Volume 1. Part 2; that is, they have not been renumbered for this checklist. Tables and figures occasionally contain reference notes. The full citations for these notes are contained on page 427 of Volume 1. l When a guideline in Volume 1 includes the Additionallnformation component, this checklist will show [ AI] after the guideline. The reviewer should consult Volume 1, if necessary, to obtain the additional information and source documents.
(O)
L' i NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
Figure 1 illustrates the appearance of a guideline in Volume 1, and Figure 2 illustrates the appearance of the same guideline as it is presented in this checklist.
As shown in Figure 2, each guideline in the checklist contains space for the reviewer to evaluate the guideline (see the Design Evaluation section kiow) and to comment on the evaluation. The way in which the checklist is to be used is described in the next section, 1.1 1 Display Screen Partitioning for HSI Functions A standard display screen organization should be evident for the location of various HSI functions (such as a data display zone, control zone, or message zone) from one display to another.
ADDTTIONAL INFORMATION: Consistent display screen organization will help establish and preserve user orientation. Reserved screen areas, for example, might be used for a display title, alarms, display control
- ogions, instructions, error messages, and rnenus, j Display formats should be consistent with accepted usage and existing user habits.'
l 1
Figure 1 Appearance of a guideline in Volume 1 1
1.1 1 Display Screen Partitioning for HSI Functions A standard display screen organization should be evident for the location of various HSI functions (such as a data display zone, control zone, or message zone) from one display to another.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
)
Figure 2 Appearance of a guideline in Volume 2 (checklist) i l
NUREG-0700. Rev,1. Vol. 2 2 !
1 1
USE OF THE CHECKLIST j Preparation i
j - De guide!ines in this checklist are mainly used in carrying out a HFE Design Verification,i.e., an assessment j that the characteristics of the HSI, including devices and the work environment, conform to HFE guidelines. The a
reviewer should follow the procedures described in Section 4.2, HFE Design Verification, of Volume 1 Part 1, l in preparation for using the guidelines.
As described in the design review methodology, it may not be necessary to review each HSI component or
$ charactenstic. A sampling strategy may be employed to identify a subset of HSI components and characteristics j to be reviewed. Once the appropriate aspects of the HSI are identified, the reviewer can select the appropriate guidelines to support the review.
! Guideline Selection
! De HFE guidelines address a broad range of technologies and HSI characteristics. Not all of the guidelines will
- be applicable to each design review. The guidelines selected should be based on the characteristics of the HSI l components that are to be addressed by the evaluation. Different HSI components have different characteristics and, therefore, require different guidelines for their review.
Selection of Guidelines should be accomplished by matching the HSI characteristics (as defined in Section 3.4, HSI inventory and Characterization, of Volume 1, Part 1) to the topics contained in the guidelines. For example, if the design implementation used bar charts, graphs, and mimic display formats, then the guidelines selected should include the specific sections of guidelines pertaining to these formats (Sections 1.2.4,1.2.5, and 1.2.8,
\
of this checklist, respectively); it would not be necessary to include guidance for table or data form display formats. Thus, for a specific review, only the subset of guidelines that are applicable to the design need be used.
De guidelines in this checklist have been provided in binder format so that the necessary subset of guidelines can be separated from those that are not needed.
Design Evaluation The general methodology is to compare the HSI component's characteristics and functions with the criteria provided in the HFE guidelines. HFE guidehnes are applicable to different aspects of the HSI design implementa-tion: task-independent aspects (e.g., font size), task-specific aspects (e.g., scale units), and task integration aspects (e.g., control-display proximity).
To enable the reviewer to enter the results of an evaluation, check boxes are provided with space for handwritten comments below and to the left of each guideline (see Figure 2). For each selected guideline, the reviewer should detemiine whether the aspect of the HSI being reviewed should be marked as follows:
. OK - This indicates that the aspect of the HSI is acceptable. His evaluation should be given only if there is total compliance, i.e., only if every instance of the item being reviewed is fully consistent with the provisions of the guideline, if there is any instance of full or partial noncompliance, then an evaluation of Discrepancy should be given (see below).
3 NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2
. Discrepancy- This indicates that the aspect of the HSI under review is discrepant from the guideline; i.e., there is less than total compliance with the guideline. (It should be noted that, as described in Volume 1, Part 1, Section 4.2, HFE Design Verification, discrepancies could be acceptable within the context of the fully integrated design.)
. N/A- This should be checked for individual guidelines that do not apply to the particular review. Since the guidelines are selected for inclusion in the review on a section-by-section basis, an individual guideline within an included section may not be relevant.
. Return - This should be indicated when a guideline is applicable but the information needed to make the evaluation is not available. In this case, the reviewer can check the Return box and indicate what is needed to complete the evaluation (e.g., a measurement, documentation, or consultation with an operator). Providing a reason to retum to the guideline will make it easier to group and find all guidelines requiring the same information, e.g., access to operators, when the information source becomes available. Once the information is available, the appropriate evaluation can be entered in the check box.
The Comment space under each guideline (see Figure 2) can be used to record the reviewer's notes, such as to identify the HSI component (e.g., a display number), or an explanation of the type of discrepancy.
1 i
i I
a l
NUREG-0700 Rev.1, Vol. 2 4 i
i t
i i INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 General Display Guidelines Page 1-1 ,
,Og 1.1-1 Display Screen Partitioning for HSI Functions V A standard display screen organization should be evident for the location of various HSI functions (such as a data display zone, control zone, or message zone) from one display to another.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.12 Display Conventions Consistent interface design conventions should be evident for all display features (such as labels).[AI]
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
1.1-3 Numeral and Letter Styles 1 N_umeral and le.ter styles should be simple and consistent.[AI]
OK Comment:
[ _
DLscrepancy
/ N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-4 Distinctive IISI Functional Organization and Display Elements l The HSI functional zones and display features should be visually distinctive from one another, especially for on-screen command and control elements (which should be visibly distinct from all other screen structures).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-5 Display Title Every display should begin with a title or header at the top, briefly describing the contents or purpose of the display.[AI]
OK Comment:
DLicrepancy N/A
^
Return > Reason:
i 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 Gen:rr.1 Display Guidelines Page 1-2 1.16 Display Identification Every display page should have a unique identification to provide a reference for use in requesting th_e display of that page.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
l
)
1.1-7 Ilierarchy of Titles Where displays have several levels of titles (and/or labels), the system should provide visual cues to_ aid users in distinguishing among the levels in the hierarchy.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-8 Display Simplicity Displays should present the simplest information consistent with their function; information irrelevant to the task should not be displayed, and extraneous text and graphics should not be present.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-9 Redundancy Redundancy in the presentation ofinformation items should be limited to cases where needed for backup or to avoid excessive operator movement.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1 10 Availability of Task-Related Information All information required by the user during a task should be available on the current display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 1
1
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 .
1.1 General Display Guidelines Page 1-3 l O 1.1-11 Uncluttered Displays h Displays should be as uncluttered as possible.[AI]
oK Comment:
4 D6screpancy l
MA l
Return > Reesco: j 1.1-12 Task Related Partitioning of Displays When displays are partitioned into multiple pages, function / task-related data items should be displayed together on one page.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1 13 Numbering Pages of Multipage Displays Users working with multipage displays should be provided with a page location reference within t_he display sequence.[AI]
oK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-14 Display Frame Location Cues Users viewing a portion of a larger display should be provided with an indication of the location cf the visible position of a display (frame) in the overall display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1 15 Grouping of Information in a Display Information on a display should be grouped according to principles obvious to the user, e.g., by task, system, function, or sequence, based upon the user's requirements in performance of the ongoing task.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
U 4
i
1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 Gen:re.1 Displ y Guidelin:s Page 1-4 1.1 16 Demarcation of Groups When information is grouped on a display, the groups should be made visually distinct by such means as color coding or separation using blanks or demarcation lines.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N'^
1 Return > Reason:
1.1-17 Appropriate Display 14ormat i The display presentation format, e.g., table, graph, or flowchart, should be consistent with tasks that the user will be performing with the displayed information.[AI]
OK Comment: l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-18 Display Information in Directly Usable Form ,
Information should be displayed to users in directly usable form consistent with the task I reSuirements.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-19 Indication of Transformations Needed If it is necessary to multiply or divide the displayed readings by powers of 10 to determine quantitative value, the operation required and result derived must be clearly indicated.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.120 Display Information Consistent with User Conventions Information should be displayed consistently according to standards and conventions familiar to u_sers.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
H I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 General Displ y Guid: lines Page 1-5 O 1.121 Display Information Consistent with Control Requirements
( Displays should be consistent in word choice, format, and basic style with requirements for data i and control entry.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.122 Sensitivity i Display dynamic sensitivity should be selected to minimize the display of nomial random
, v_ariations in equipment performance.
oK Comment:
! Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.123 Display Flexibility Users should be able to control the amount, format, and complexity of displayed data to meet task requirements.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l MA '
Return > Reason: I 4
1.1-24 Range of Conditions Displayed 4
The display system should correctly display information about the plant's safety status including l severe accident symptoms.
)
OK Comment:
, Discrepancy NA Return > Reasun:
I 1.125 Actual System / Equipment Status Indications of the actual status of plant systems and equipment, as opposed to demand status, should be provided when required by the task.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPL,AY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 Gener:1 Dispby Guidelines Page 1-6 1.1-26 Rapid Recognition of Safety Status Change User comprehension of a change in the safety status from critical safety function displays should b_e achieved in a matter of seconds.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-27 Display of Parameters and Variables Important to Safety Plant parameters and variables important to safety should be displayed in a way that is convenient and readily accessible to control room operators.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.128 Critical Safety Function Display Visibility Critical safety function displays should be readable from the workstations of users needing access to these displays.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-29 Normal Value Reference Index ,
D_isplays should contain reference (s) to the values of normal operating condition (s).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-30 Critical Value Reference Index A reference index should be included in a display when the user must compare displayed information with some critical value. Limit marks should be used for each critical plant parameter displayed.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Renwn:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l
4 1.1 General Display Guidelines Page 1-7
)
if 1.1-31 Critical Parameter Monitoring Support
( The system should assist the user in monitoring critical parameters, especially parameters that change very rapidly or very slowly, by alerting the user when values are out of range.[ AI]
l oK Comment:
4 Discrqancy WA Return > Reason:
1.1-32 Choice of Setpoints I I
Setpoints used to indicate a change in status should be chosen to provide users with sufficient
- t_ime to respond appropriately.
OK Comment:
) _
Discreaney MA Return > Reason:
1.133 Coding Display items Requiring Rapid Discrimination ,
Coding should be provided when a user must distinguish rapidly among different categories of I
displayed data.[AI]
g OK Comment:
Discrqancy wA 1 Return > Reason:
l.1-34 Meaningful Codes M_eaningful or familiar codes should be used, rather than arbitrary codes.
, OK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-35 Consistent Coding Across Displays C_onsistent meanings should be assigned to codes, from one display to another.[AI]
oK Cotoment:
Discrepancy WA Return > Reason:
N b
w - .a ..-
1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 Gen:ral Dispiry Guidelines Page 1-8 1.1-36 Readability of Coded Information C_oding should not interfere with the readability of displayed information.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-37 Coding and Transmission Time l Coding should not increase transmission time.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-38 Distinctive Coding of Critical Information Distinctive means of coding / highlighting should be used when a user's attention must be directed to_ changes in the state of the system, critical or off-normal date, and hazardous conditions.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-39 IlighlightingText Displays When critical text merits emphasis to set it apart from other text, that text should be highlighted by bolding / brightening or color coding or by some auxiliary annotation.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.140 Graphic Display Enhancement With Text When a graphic display contains some outstanding or discrepant feature that merits attention by a user, supplementary text should be displayed to emphasize that feature.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 General Dispiry Guidelines Page 1-9
, /^T 1.141 Graphic Display Enhancement With Numeric Values
() When precise reading of a graphic display is required, the display should be annotated with actual data values to supplement their graphic representation.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Disaepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-42 Display Enhancement With Time Data When task performance requires or implies the need to assess currency of information within a display, the information should be annotated with time information.
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A j Return > Reason:
1.1-43 Alert to Higher Level Displays While viewing secondary displays, a perceptual (audible or visual) cue should be provided by the system to alert the user to retum to the primary display format if significant information in that I d_i_ splay requires user attention. I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.144 Freezing Rapidly Changing Information When task requirements dictate that current information changes be continuously viewed and the display is changing so rapidly that the information is difficult to read, the user should have the i capability of simultaneously viewing the information in a supplemental " snapshot" display (i.e., a di_ splay frozen to enhance readability) along with the continuous display.[AI] i OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
V
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 General Displ y Guidelines Page 1-10 1.1-45 Freeze Feedback If a display has a freeze capability, the display should have an obvious reminder that it is in the fgeze mode.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return & Reason:
1.146 Indication of Display System Failure A display feature should be provided to indicate to the user that the system is operating properly (or that a system failure has occurred).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-47 On Line Dictionary of Display Element Definitions The user should have access to a dictionary that contains definitions for all display element conventions through the display or an on-line help system.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-48 Display Background Color A single nondistracting background color should be used that has a hue / contrast which allows the data (foreground) to be easily visible and which does not distort or interfere with the coding aspects of the display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.1-49 Readability Conditions Important display elements and codes should be identifiable and readable from the maximum viewing distance and under minimal ambient lighting conditions.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.1 General Dispiny Gridelines Page 1-11
'p 1.1-50 Labeling Scrollable sad Muff!page Displays
(
General labels and row / column labels should remain along the top (or bottom) and left (or right) ed ges of the display.[AI]
OK Communeet:
Discrwaaer -
N/A Return > Reasoe:
1 l 1.151 Data Overlays Displayed infonnation which temporarily overlays and obscures other display data should not crase the overlaid data.
OK Coussiest:
Discrysocy rn > Reason:
1.1-52 Physical Overlays j Overlays should not distract or interfere with the observation or interpretation of displayed j information.[AI]
i n OK Connasent:
/ Discrqancy
( _
N/A Return > Reasoa:
1.1-53 Hardcopy of VDU Displays Users should be able to obtain a hardcopy of any VDU display.[A!]
)
OK Chmaneet:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reasse:
i
\
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-12 1.2.1 Continuous Text Displays 1.2.1-1 Standard Text Format A_ standard text display format should be used from one display to another.
oK Commenti Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-2 Consistency Between VDU-Based Text and Printed Text VDU displays of textual data, messages, or instructions should generally follow design conventions for printed text.[AI]
UK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-3 Sentences Begin with Main Topic
'@e main topic of each sentence should be located near the beginning of the sentence.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-4 Clarity of Wording Text displays should empioy simplicity and clarity of wording.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-5 Distinct Wording Distinct words rather than contractions or combined forms should be used, especially in phrases involving negation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Dispiry Formats Page 1-13 m 1.2.1 Continuous Text Displays 1.2.16 Concise Wording Be text should be worded concisely to aid comprehension.[AI] ;
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-7 Abbreviations Defined in Text When words in text displays are abbreviated, each abbreviation (or acronym) should be defined in garentheses following its first appearance.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.18 Affirmative Sentences A_ffirmative statements rather than negative statements should be used.[AI]
OK Comment:
O Discrepancy N/A )
Return > Reason:
1.2.19 Active Voice i Sentences should be composed in the active rather than the passive voice.[AI] j OK Comment: l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-10 Temporal Sequence When a sentence describes a sequence of events, it should be phrased with a corresponding word order.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
V
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-14 1.2.1 Continuous Text Displays 1.2.1 11 Minimum Number of Displayed L;nes When a user must read continuous text on line, at least four lines of text should be displayed at one time.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepann MA Return > Reason:
1.2.1-12 Line Length Continuous text should be displayed in wide columns, containing at least 50 characters per line.[AI] ]
oK Comment: ,
l Discrepang MA Return > Raeson:
I 1.2.1-13 Minimal Hyphenation In display of textual material, words should be kept intact, with minimal breaking by hyphenation ,
between lines.[Al] l OK Comment:
Dhcrepang MA Return > Reason:
1.2.1-14 Conventional Punctuation C_onventional punctuation should be used in textual display.[Af]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.2.1-15 Inter-Word Spacing Consistent spacing between the words of displayed text should be maintained, with left justification of lines and ragged right margins. A minimum of one character width (capital N for proportional spacing) should be used between words.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Dispiry Formats Page 1-15 1.2.1 Continuous Text Displays 1.2.1-16 Inter-Line Spacing ;
A minimum of two stroke widths or 15 percent of character height, whichever is greater, should i be.used for spacing between lines of text.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
_ l N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-17 Inter Paragraph Spacing Displayed i paragraphs of text should be separated by at least one blank line.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-18 Combining Text with Other Data Text should be formatted in a few wide lines rather than in narrow columns of many short lines, when it is combined with graphics or other data in a single display, thus limiting the available space.
I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-19 Placing Figures Near Their Citations When tables and/or graphics are combined with text, each figure should be placed near its first citation in the text, preferably in the same display frame.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 1.2.120 Underlining for Emphasis When a line is placed under an item to mark or emphasize it, the line should not impair the lefibility of the item, e.g., by obscuring the descenders.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy g N/A J Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-16 1.2.1 Continuous Text Displays 1.2.121 Font Coding Within a text file or table, the use of a different font style should be preferred over the use of a di_fferent size for highlighting information.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-22 Attention Symbols in Alphanumeric Displays When a special symbol, such as an asterisk, is used to draw attention to a selected item in alphanumeric displays, the symbol should be separated from the beginning of the word by a space.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.1-23 liardcopy for Lengthy Text Displays When a user must read lengthy textual material, that text should be available in printed form.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dk.crepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-17 1.2.2 Tables and Lists
!\
Q 1.2.2-1 Logical Organization Information should be organized in some recognizable logical order to facilitate scanning and assimilation.!AI]
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-2 Table Layout by Row and Column A table should be constructed so that row and column labels represent the information a user has prior to consulting the table.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-3 Row and Column Labels Each row and column should be uniquely and informatively labeled and should be visually distinct c from data entries.
f OK Comment:
x Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
)
l.2.2-4 Labeling Units of Measurement Labels should include the unit of measure for the data in the table; units of measurement should be
- part of row or column labels.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-5 Consistent Spacing Within Tables Consistent column and row spacing should be maintained within a table, and from one table to another. Similarly, spacing between rows should be consistent within a table and between related t_ ables.[All OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
\.
Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ y Formats Page 1-18 1.2.2 Tables and Lists 1.2.2-6 Minimum Column Spacing The spacing between columns should be greater than any internal spaces that might be displayed wjthin a tabulated data item.[AI)
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-7 Row Separation In dense tables with many rows, a blank line, dots, or some other distinctive feature (to aid h_orizontal scanning) should be inserted after a group of rows at regular intervals.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-8 Consistent Character Appearance The font and size of alphanumeric characters should be consistent within a table and between related tables.[AI]
OK Comment:
D!screpancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-9 Justification of Alphabetic Data Columns of alphabetic data should be displayed with leftjustification to permit rapid s_ canning.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.210 Justification of Numeric Data Columns of numeric data should be justified with respect to a fixed decimal point; if there is no decimal point, then numbers should be right-justified.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-19 ;
l.2.2 Tables and Lists l 1.2.2-11 Arabic Numerals for Numbered List items Arabic rather than Roman numerals should be used when listed items are numbered.[AI]
OK Conuneet:
i Discrepang NA Return > Reason:
1 1.2.212 Numbered items Start with "1" Item numbers should begin with one rather than zero.
~
OK Comment:
Discrepang
{ _
NA Return > Reason:
j 1.2.2-13 Continuous Numbering in Multipage Lists
- When a list of numbered items exceeds one display page, the items should be numbered i continuously in relation to the first item on the first page.(All e
OK Comenent:
Discrqancy l s NA Return > Reason:
. 1.2.2-14 Repeated Elements in Hierarchic Numbering 4 Complete numbers should be displayed for hierarchic lists with compound numbers, i.e., repeated
, elements should not be omitted.[AI]
OK Comment:
j _
Discrepancy
- NA f Return > Reason
1.2.215 Single-Column List Format LJsts should be formatted so that each item starts on a new line.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrgency NA Return > Reason:
C
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.l. Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-20 1.2.2 Tables and Lists 1.2.216 Marking Multiline Items in a List When a single item in a list continues for more than one line, items should be marked in some way so.that the continuation of an item is obvious.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-17 Vertical List Extension lleyond One Page Where lists extend over more than one display page, the last line of one page should be the first line on the succeeding page.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-18 Ilierarchic Structure for Long Lists For a long list, extending more than one displayed page, a hierarchic structure should be used to germit its logical partitioning into related shorter lists.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.219 Vertical Ordering in Multiple Columns If a list is displayed in multiple columns, the items should be ordered vertically within each column l rather than horizontally within rows and across columns.
OK Comment:
~
l Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.2-20 Annotating Display of Continued Data When lists or tables are of variable length and may extend beyond the limits of one display page, i the user should be informed when data are continued on another page and when data are i concluded on the present page.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reawn:
i 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.l. Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-2:
1.2.3 Data Forms and Fields b
\g 1.2.3-1 Comparing Data Fields Data fields to be compared on a character-by-character basis should be positioned one above the other.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l.2.3-2 Consistent Format Across Displays i
The ordering and layout of corresponding data fields across displays should be consistent from j one display to another.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
- N/A
) Return > Reason:
i 1.2.3-3 Consistency of VDU and Hardcopy Formats The format of a VDU data form should be similar to that of commonly used hardcopy source documents.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.3-4 Form Compatible for Data Entry and Display When forms are used for data entry as well as for data display, the formats of these forms should b_e compatible. I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.3 5 Visually Distinct Labels and Data Entry Areas Clear visual definition of data fields should be provided so that the data are distinct from labels and other display features.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
t
1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Dispiry Formats Page 1-22 l.2.3 Data Forms and Fields 1.2.3-6 Separation of Field Label and Data Entry Area i The label and the data entry area should be separated by at least one character space.
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A l 1
Return > Reason: '
l.2.3-7 Data Field Separation )
, At least three spaces should appear between the longest data field in one column and the rightmost label in an adjacent column.[AI] j OK Comment:
Dberepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.3 8 Justification: Data Field Labels of Equal Length 1 When label sizes are relatively equal, both labels and data fields should be left justified. One space l should be left between the longest label and the data field column. l OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason: j 1.2.3-9 Justification: Data Field Labels of Unequal Length When label sizes vary greatly, labels should be right justified and the data fields should be left justified. One space should be left between each label and the data field. l OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 1.2.310 Protected Labels l I
Field labels should be protected from keyed entry by having the cursor skip over them automatically when a user is spacing or tabbing.[AI] _,.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I
- . .= .- - - -
1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-23 ,
1.2.3 Data Forms and Fields !
1.2.3-11 Highlight Active Data Entry Field i
'Dje current field to be entered should be highlighted.[AI]
OK Comment:
} Discrepaan N/A Return > Reseon:
{
l.2.3-12 Data Entry Cues If appropriate, labels should be used to help cue the user as to the expected data entry.[AI]
OK Comment:
Descrepancy
- N/A 4 Return > Reason
1.2.3-13 Label Punctuation as Entry Cue The label for each entry field should end with a special symbol, signifying that an entry may be made.[AI]
OK Comment:
1 Discrepancy l
\ / N/A Return > Reason: '
l.2.314 Data Form Entry Error ;
Data entered that does not match the predefined format of the data form should be highlighted I and signaled to the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.3-15 Distinguishing Blanks from Nulls Blanks (keyed spaces) should be distinguished from nulls (no entry at all) in the display of data fo_rms, where it can aid task performance.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy h/A Return > Reewn:
J
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Ve J 1.2 Displ:y Fermats Page i * ;
1.2.3 Data Forms and Fields 1.2.3-16 Labeling Groups of Data Fields l A_ field group heading should be centered above the labels to which it applies. <
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reasoo:
1.2.3-17 Data Field Group Separation At least five spaces should appear between groups of data fields.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.3-18 Headings and Label Indentation When headings are located on the line above related screen fields, the labels should be indented a minimum of five spaces from the start of the heading.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.319 Heading Proximity to Subordinate Labels When headings are placed adjacent to the related fields, they should be located to the left of the topmost row of related fields. The column oflabels should be separated from the longest heading by a minimum of three blank spaces.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ*y Formats Page 1-25 1.2.4 Bar Charts and Histograms
(' l.2.4-1 Labeting Single Bars Each bar on the display should have a unique identification label.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- 1.2.4 2 Labeling Paired Bars When bars are displayed in pairs, they should be labeled as a unit, with individual distinguishing labels for each bar.[AI]
UK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.4 3 Bar Spacing When data must be compared, bars should be adjacent to one another and spaced such that a direct visual comparison can be made without eye movement.[AI]
y oK Comment:
i, v ) -
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.4 4 Consistent Orientation of Bars in a related series of bar charts, a consistent orientation of the bars (vertical or horizontal) should be. adopted.[ AI]
oK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.4-5 Ilighlighting If one bar represents data of particular significance, then that bar should be highlighted.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 Ic2 Display Formats Page 1-26 1.2.4 Bar Charts and Histograms 1.2.4-6 Zero Reference on Deviation Bar Charts The zero reference should be the center of the deviation bar chart.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.4 7 Normal Range on Deviation Bar Charts On a deviation bar chart, the range of normal conditions for positive or negative deviations should represent no more than 10 percent of the total range.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.4-8 Indication of Magnitude on Deviation Bar Charts The magnitude of each variable should be displayed when a deviation bar display is used as a primary display format for safety function parameters.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.4 9 Coding Segmented Bar Charts Segmented bars, in which differently coded segments are shown cumulatively within a bar, should be used when both the total measures and the portions represented by the segments are of interest.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l l
N/A g Return > Reason: l 1.2.4-10 Ordering Data in Segmented Bars The data categories should be ordered within each bar in the same sequence, with the least v_ariable categories displayed at the bottom and the most variable at the top.[AI]
oK Comment:
! Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l
IINFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-27
[
1.2.5 Graphs l.2.51 Interpreting Graphs
, Graphs should convey enough information to allow the user to interpret the data without referring l to additional sources.
OK Comunet:
I J
Discrepancy N/A Retura > Reasoe:
f 1.2.5-2 Labeling Curves 4 When multiple curves are included in a single graph, each curve should be identified directly by an aidacent label, rather than by a separate legend.[AI]
OK Comuneet:
Discrepancy l _
N/A
{
Retura > Reasos:
- 1.2.5-3 Legend Ordering
, If a legend must be displayed, the codes in the legend should be ordered to match the spatial order
- of their corresponding curves in the graph itself.
f OK Cousanoot.
Discrepancy
) N/A 1
Return > Reasos:
1.2.5-4 Coding to Distinguish Curves C_oding should be used when multiple functions are displayed in a single graph.[AI]
OK Ceaument.
Descrepancy N/A Retura > Reasse:
.1.2.5-5 Consistent Line Coding LJne coding should be used consistently across graphs.
oK Conseneet:
Discfepeecy N/A Retura > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-28 1.2.5 Graphs 1.2.5-6 Highlighting Significant Curves In displays of multiple curves, if one curve represents data of particular significance, then that c_urve should be highlighted.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dtscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.5-7 Trending Time Intervals Trend displays should be capable of showing data collected during time intervals of different lengths.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.5-8 Multiple Trend Lines When the user must compare data represented by separate curves, the curves should be displayed i_n one combined graph.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.5 9 Stability of Trend Data Trend rates should not fluctuate as a result of minor fluctuations in data or oscillatory behavior which may be superimposed on a well-defined trend.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.510 Indication of Non Representative Trend Data When a simple quantitative rate-of-change value is used, an indication should be provided to inform the user when, as a result of minor fluctuations or oscillations, the rate value does not accurately represent the trend.
oK Comment-Discrepsocy N/A Return > Reason:
1INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Dispiry Formats Page 1-29 1.2.5 Graphs
( l.2.5-11 Display of Projected Values Curves representing planned, projected, or extrapolated data should be distinctive from curves representing actual data.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 1.2.5-12 Curve Averaging Combining several individual curves into a single average curve should only be done when users do not need to know the pattem of individual curves or when curves differ on the basis of minor irregularities.[AI]
oK Comment: )
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.5-13 Repeating Display of Cyclic Data Where curves represent cyclic data, the graph should be extended to repeat uncompleted portions
'g of the displayed cycle.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.514 Target Area Definition The target area, preferred combination of X- and Y-axis values, should be graphically defined.[AI]
OK Comment:
D6screpancy N/A Return > Reason. ,
i 1.2.5-15 Minimize Clutter l O_Id data points should be removed after some fixed period of time.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy p N/A Return >
( Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, R ev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-30 1.2.5 Graphs 1.2.5-16 Linear Profile Pattern Recognition T_he graph should form recognizable geometric patterns for specific abnormal conditions.[AI]
} OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.2.5-17 Coding Linear Pronle Charts The area below the profile lInc should be shaded to provide a more distinguishable profile.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.2.5-18 Labeling Linear Profile Charts Qbels should be provided along the bottom to identify each parameter.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.2.5-19 Circular Profile Chart The circular profile chart should form a recognizable geometric pattern for specific abnormal conditions.[AI]
OK Comment:
_ l Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.2.5-20 Labeling Circular Pronle Displays Labels should be provided to identify each radial line.
OK Comment: l Discrepancy MA Returo > Reason:
O
l I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-31 1.2.5 Graphs 1.2.5 21 Coding Circular Profile Displays The area within the profile should be shaded to enhance the operator's perception of plant status, i OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
4 i
1.2.5 22 Depicting Bands in Segmented Curve Graphs All segments in a segmented curve graph should be related to the total value.[AI]
l OK Comment:
D6screpancy NA Returo > Reason:
1.2.5-23 Ordering Data in Segmented Curve Graphs
! The data categories in a segmented curve graph should be ordered so that the least variable curves
- a_re displayed at the bottom and the most variable at the top.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
\ MA Return > Reason:
1.2.5 24 Coding Segmented Curve Graphs The different bands of segmented curve graphs should be made visually distinctive by coding, su_ch as by the texturing or shading of bands.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ y Formats Page 1-32 1.2.5 Graphs 1.2.5-25 Labeling Segmented Curve Graphs Where space permits, the different bands of segmented curve graphs should be labeled directly wjthin the textured or shaded bands.
I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A I l
Return > Reason:
1.2.5-26 liighlighting Scatterplots If some plotted points represent data of particular significance, they should be highlighted to make t_ hem visually distinctive from others.[AI]
OK Comment: l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 1.2.5-27 Grouping Scatterplots to Show Multiple Relations !
When relations among several variables must be examined, an ordered group (matrix) of ;
scatterplots should be displayed, each showing the relation between just two variables.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.5-28 Interactive Analysis of Grouped Scatterplots When scatterplots are grouped in a single display to show relations among several variables, an interactive aid should be provided for analysis so that if a user selects a set of data in one plot then the corresponding data points in other plots will be highlighted.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
- . .. . - - - - . .--- ..- . - - - .. . . . = .
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-33 1.2.6 Pie Charts t
V 1.2.61 Partitioning i P_artitioning should be limited to five segments or less.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.6-2 Labeling Pie Charts Pie chart segments should be labeled directly rather than by a separate legend. If a segment is too small to contain the label, the label should be placed outside the segment with a line from it to the 4
segment.[All i OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
~
1.2.6 3 Numeric Annotation of Labels If the task requires precise values, numbers should be added to pie chart segment labels to indicate the percentage and/or absolute values.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.6-4 liighlighting If a particular segment of a pie chart requires emphasis,it should be highlighted by special hatching or displaced slightly from the remainder of the pie.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
^ _.
Return > Reason:
1
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Dispt:y Formats Page 1-34 1.2.7 Flowcharts 1.2.71 Logical Ordering of Decision Options De available decision options should be displayed in logical order.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.7 2 Single Decision at Each Step O_nly a single decision should be required at each step.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.7-3 Consistent Ordering of Decision Options When a flowchart is designed so that a user must make decisions at various steps, the available options should be displayed in some consistent order from step to step.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.7-4 Availability of SupplementalInformation While flowcharts should display only the data immediately required by the user, more detailed data should be available with a single action.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 1.2.7-5 Conventional Path Orientation l Flowcharts should be designed so that the path of the logical sequence is consistent with familiar !
o_rientation conventions.[AI] ;
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG 0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-35 1.2.7 Flowcharts
- / 1.2.7 6 Flowchart Symbol Set
- 'Bere should be a standard set of flowchart symbols.
' OK Comisseet: i j .__ i D 88CF 1
, N/A Resura > Reesee:
i i
I i
b i
I 4
I,
I 1 INFORMATION DLSPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-36 1.2.8 Mimics and Diagrams ,
1.2.8-1 Level of Detail Mimics and diagrams should contain the minimum amount of detail required to yield a meaningful pictorial representation.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.8-2 Component Identification l Plant components represented on mimic lines should be identified.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.8-3 Line Points of Origin All flow path line origin points should be labeled or begin at labeled components.
oK Comment: 1 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.8-4 Line Termination Points l All flow path line destination or terminal points should be labeled or end at labeled components. l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.3-5 Directional Arrowheads Flow directions should be clearly indicated by distinctive arrowheads.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-37 l 1.2.8 Mimics and Diagrams l
1.2.8-6 Line Coding i
flow paths should be coded (e.g., by color and/or width) to indicate important information.[AI) oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason: l 1
1.2.8-7 Overlapping Lines O_verlapping of flow path lines should be avoided.[AI]
oK Comment:
, Discrepancy f NA Return > Reason:
1.2.8-8 Symbol Data Integration Where symbols are used to represent equipment components and process flow or signal paths, numerical data should be presented reflecting inputs and outputs associated with quipment.
oK Comment:
p ~ D6screpancy I
\ NA Return > Reawn:
1.2.8-9 Aids for Evaluation When users must evaluate information in detail, computer aids for calculation and visual analysis s_hould be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
L
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Dispiry Formats Page 1-38 1.2.9 Maps 1.2.91 Feature Identification Significant features of a map should be labeled directly on the display unless cluttering or obscuring of other information would result.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.9-2 Consistent Orientation When several different maps will be displayed, a consistent orientation should be used so that the
), toy of each map will always represent the same direction.[AI]
I oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.9-3 User Selectable Orientation The user should be able to select different orientations and reference points.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.9 4 Panning Map Displays When a map exceeds the capacity of a single display frame, users should be able to pan the display over the mapped data in order to examine different areas of current interest.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.9 5 Area Coding Codes, such as texture patterns, color, or tonal variations, should be used when different areas of a map must be defined, or when geographic distribution of a particular variable must be indicated.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i l 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Formats Page 1-39 1.2.9 Maps 1.2.9-6 Color Tonal Codes Tonal codes (different shades of one color) rather than spectral codes (different colors) should be u_ sed when users must rnake relative judgments for different colored areas of a display.[AI]
oK Comment:
l Discrepancy MA i
j Return > Reason:
i 1.2.9-7 Ordered Coding Where different areas of a map are coded by texture patterns or tonal s ariation, the darkest to l lightest shades correspond to the extreme values of the coded variable.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l l
MA Return > Reason:
l 1.2.9-8 Mapping Nongeographic Data l In applications where the geographic distribution of nongeographic data must be displayed, other l graphic elements should be added to a map for that purpose.[AI] ,
[ _
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.2.9-9 HighlighGng Data Change l When changes in mapped data are significant for a user's task, auxiliary graphic elements should b_e included to highlight those changes.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
( _
MA Return > Reason:
1.2.9-10 Aids for Analyzing Maps When the use of mapped data may be complex, computer aids should be provided for data a_nalysis.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA l Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700. Rev.l. Vol. 2 1.2 Displ:y Formats Page 1-40 1.2.10 Graphic Instrument Panels 1.2.10-1 Display Range Coding Zones indicating operating ranges should be color coded by edge lines or wedges for circular scales.(AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.10-2 Location of Zero When check-reading positive and negative values on rotary meters (circular displays), the zero or null position should be at 12 o' clock or 9 o' clock.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.10-3 Pointer Orientation The pointer on fixed scales should extend from the right of vertical scales and from the bottom of horizontal scales.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.10-4 Pointer Obscurement The pointer on fixed scales should extend to but not obscure the shortest graduation mans.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.10-5 Tick Mark Separation Tick marks should be separated by at least 0.07 inches (1.75 millimeters) for a viewing distance of 28 inches (71 centimeters) under low illumination.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Dlacrepancy
- N/A l Return > Reason
l
i i INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l.2 Display Formats _ Page 1-41 1.2.10 Graphic Instrument Panels i (^
l.2.10-6 Number of Tick Marks Scales should not be cluttered with more marks than necessary for precision.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
, Return > Reason:
]
i i
)
i l
l I
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1 1.2 Dispiry Formats Page 1-42 l 1.2.11 Speech Displays 1.2.11-1 Limits on Speech Messages Speech should be limited to provide only a few messages.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.11-2 Message Repeat Capability The user should be able to have speech messages repeated.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.113 Simple Spoken Messages M_essages should be short and simple.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.114 Type of Voice A_ distinctive and mature voice should be used.
OK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.2.115 Delivery Style Spoken messages should be presented in a formal, impersonal manner.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.2 Display Form:ts Page 1-43 1.2.11 Speech Displays l 1.2.11-6 Word Selection
] Words in a speech message should be concise, intelligible, and appropriate for the information
- presented.[AI]
l ou C.au et-i _
DWapmy
- NA i
- Return > Ranson
i
. 1.2.11-7 Speech Message Priority l A speech message priority system should be established such that more critical messages override t_he presentation of any message occurring below it on the priority list.[AI]
OK Comneneet.
~
i j Discrepancy
- ^
h i Retura > Rensse:
l 1.2.11-8 Distinctive Spoken Warnings If speech is used to provide warnings as well as other forms of user guidance, spoken warnings l
should be easily distinguishable from routine messages.[AI]
5 OK Comaneet:
Discrepancy MA Return > Ranson:
1.2.11-9 Intensity of Speech Presentation Speech signal intensity should be clearly audible for the expected ambient noise environment.[AI]
OK Comnaneet:
Dwepancy WA Reture > Reasse:
l 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispiry El;ments Page 1-44 13.1 Alphanumeric Characters 13.1-1 Conventional Use of Mixed Case Text to be read (except labels) should be presented using upper and lower case characters.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l
~
l N/A Return > Reason:
l 13.1-2 Font Style I A clearly legible font should be utilized. Fonts should have true ascenders and descenders, u_niform stroke width, and uniform aspect ratio.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.1-3 Distinguishability of Characters
, For a given font, it should be possible to clearly distinguish between the following characters: X and K, T and Y, I and L, I and 1, O and Q, S and 5, and U and V.
F-i oK Comment:
Discrepancy 1
N/A Return > Reason:
13.1-4 Character Size for Text Readability j The height of characters in displayed text or labels should be at least 16 minutes of arc (4.7 mrad) and the maximum character height should be 24 minutes of arc (7 mrad).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i l
N/A l
Return > Reason:
13.15 Character Ileight-to-Width Ratio For fixed (as opposed to proportionally spaced) presentations, the height-to-width ratio should be b_etween 1:0.7 to 1:0.9.[AI]
oK Comment: i Discrepancy 1 N/A Return > Reason:
t 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Displ y El:ments Page 1-45 13.1 Alphanumeric Characters d 13,1-6 VDU Character Format A 4x5 (width-to-height) character matrix should be the minimum matrix used for superscripts and for numerators and denominators of fractions that are to be displayed in a single character asition.[AI]
oK Comment:
, Discrepancy
, N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.17 Inter-Character Spacing Horizontal separation between characters or symbols should be between 10 and 65 percent of character or symbol height.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.1-8 lirightness Ratio
~ The characters should be at least twice as light (or dark) as the background.[AI]
( _
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason: j f
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Display Elements Page 1-46 13.2 Abbreviations and Acronyms 13.2-1 Avoiding Abbreviations Abbreviations should be avoided (except when terms are commonly referred to by their initialisms, e.g., SPDS).[AI]
OK Comnwat:
D6screpancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.2-2 Abbreviation Rule When defining abbreviations which are not common to the user population, a simple rule should b_e used that users understand and recognize.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.2-3 Distinctive Abbreviations A_bbreviations should be distinctive so that abbreviations for different words are distinguishable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.2-4 Punctuation of Abbreviations A_bbreviations and acronyms should not include punctuation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.2-5 Short Abbreviations for Arbitrary Codes When arbitrary codes must be remembered by the user, characters should be grouped in blocks of three to five characters, separated by a minimum of one blank space or other separating character such as a hyphen or slash.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Display El:ments Page 1-47 13.2 Abbreviations and Acronyms 13.2-6 Avoid O and Iin Arbitrary Codes The use of the letters O and I in a non-meaningful code should be avoided since they are easily confused with the numbers 0 (zero) and 1 (one), respectively.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.2-7 Combining Letters and Numbers in Arbitrary Codes When codes combine both letters and numbers, letters should be grouped together and numbers grouped together rather than interspersing letters with numbers.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
u)
O v
4
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.3 Displ y El:ments Page 1-48 1.3.3 Labels 13.31 Groao Labels Each individual spect of a display (e.g., data group, field, or message) should contain a distinct, unique, and descriptive label.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.3 2 Meaningfulness labels should be meaningful words or accepted technical terms.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
13.3 3 Label Formats Label formats should be consistent across and within displays.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.3-4 Consistent Wording of Labels Labels should be worded consistently, so that the same item is given the same label whenever it apnears.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.3 5 Distinctive Labels Labels should be uniquely and consistently highlighted, capitalized, or otherwise emphasized to differentiate them from other screen structures and data.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1J Dispiny Elements Page 1-49 133 Labels 1 13.3-6 Label Separation Labels should be separated from one another by at least two standard character spaces. I OK Comment:
_ j Discrepancy N/A
]
Return > Reason:
1.33-7 Normal Orientation for Labels The annotation of graphic displays, including labels for the axes of graphs, should be displayed in a_ normal orientation for reading text.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.3-8 Label Content for User Options When presenting a list of user options, labels should reflect the question or decision being posed to_the user.
OK Comment:
/ _
( DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1J.3-9 Graphic Objects The label for a specific graphic object (e.g., an icon) should be placed in close proximity to the graphical object.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
U
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.3 Displ:y El;ments ~ Page 1-50 1.3.4 Icons and Symbols 1.3.41 Appropriate Use ofIcons T_he primary use of icons in graphic displays should be to represent actual objects or actions.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepahey N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.4-2 Iconic Representation Icons should be designed to look like the objects, processes, or operations they represent, by use of literal, functional, or operational representations.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.4-3 Simple Design Icons should be simple, closed figures when possible.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
{
Return > Reason:
1.3.4-4 Use of Abstract Symbology Abstract symbols should conform to user conventions or to common electrical and mechanical l symbol conventions when user conventions do not exist.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.4-5 Distinguishability Each icon and symbol should represent a single object or action, and should be easily discriminable from all other icons and symbols.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dlscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispiry Elements Page 1-51 1.3.4 Icons and Symbols 13.4-6 Consistent Use of Special Symbols Special symbols to signal critical conditions should be used exclusively for that purpose.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA i
Return > Reason:
I 13.4-7 Upright Orientation '
Ic_ons and symbols should always be oriented " upright."
{ OK Comment:
D6screpancy NA
^
keturn > Reason:
13.4 8 No Alternating Words and Symbols Words and symbols should not be used altemately.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
13.4-9 Size Icons and symbols should be large enough for the user to perceive the representation and discriminate it from other icons and symbols.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reasoe:
1.3.410 Highlighting A_n icon or symbol should be highlighted when the user has selected it.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
O
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.3 Displ:y Elements Page 1-52 1.3.4 Icons and Symbols 1.3.411 Labeling Icons Icons should be accompanied by a text label.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 1.3.412 Labels for Control Option Icons l
If icons are used to represent control action options, a label indicating the action should be i associated with the icon.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 9l 9
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispt y Elements Page 1-53 1J.5 Numeric Qta n
13.5-1 Number System Numeric data should be displayed in the decimal, rather than binary, octal, hexadecimal, or other ;
number system.
OK Comment: l Dhcrepancy N/A
< Return > Reason:
13.5 2 Leading Zeros Leading zeros in numeric entries for whole numbers should be suppressed.[AI]
i OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A i Return > Reason:
l 1.3.5-3 Maintaining Significant Digits
. A number should be displayed at the number of significant digits required by users to perform their tasks.[AI]
m OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.5-4 Display Range Numeric displays should accommodate the variable's full range.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.5-5 Rate of Display Change Di gital displays should change slowly enough to be readable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispisy El ments Page 1-54 13.5 Numeric Data
! 13.5-6 Direction of Change in Digital Display If users must rapidly discern directional change, digital displays should be provided with arrows to indicate the direction of change.[AI] l l
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.5-7 Direct Display of Differences if users must evaluate the difference between two sets of data, the difference should be presented on the display.[Af]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason' l 13.5-8 Orientation of Numbers A_11 numbers should be oriented upright.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispizy Elements Page 1-55 1.3.6 Scales, Axes, and Grids 1.3.61 Numbering of Scales N_ umbers on a scale should increase clockwise, left to right, or bottom to top.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.3.6-2 Scale Intervals N_ine should be the maximum number of tick marks between numbers.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.3.6-3 Scaling in Standard Intervals
- Scales should have tick marks at a standard interval of 1,2,5, or 10 (or multiples of 10) for labeled divisions; intervening tick marks to aid visual interpolation should be consistent with the 4
labeled scale interval.[AI]
oK Comment:
4 Discrepancy a MA 4
, Return > Reason:
1.3.6-4 Circular Scales
- For one-revolution circular scales, zero should be at 7 o' clock and the maximum value should be at 5 o' clock, with a 10 degree break in the arc.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.3.6-5 Axis Labels
- Axes should be clearly labeled with a description of what parameter is represented by the axis.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispi:y Elements Page 1-56 13.6 Scales, Axes,and Grids 13.6-6 Identification of Units of Measurement De units of measurement represented by the scale should be included in the axis label.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.6-7 Scaling Conventions Conventional scaling practice should be followed, in which the horizontal X-axis is used to plot time or the postulated cause of an event, and the vertical Y-axis is used to plot a caused effect.[Af]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.6-8 Consistent Scaling if users must compare graphic data across a series of displays, the same scale should be used for each.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.6-9 Scales Consistent with Function De scales should be consistent with the intended functional use of the data.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1J.6-10 Linear Scaling A linear scale should be used for displayed data, in preference to logarithmic or other non-linear methods of scaling, unless it can be demonstrated that non-linear scaling will facilitate user interpretation of the information.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1 1J Dispiny El:ments Page 1-57 I 13.6 Scales, Axes, and Grids tn\
V I
1.3.6-11 Numeric Scales Start at Zero When users must compare aggregate quantities within a display, or within a series of displays, s_caling of numeric data should begin with zero.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.6-12 Display of Origin When graphed data represent positive numbers, the graph should be displayed with the origin at the lower left, such that values on an axis increase as they move away from the origin of the graph.[AI] I l
OK Comment: 1 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.613 Single Scale On Each Axis f'"' s Only a single scale should be shown on each axis, rather than including different scales for ,
( different curves in the graph.[AI] I oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.614 Scaling Against a Reference Index If different variables on a single graph require different scales, they should be scaled against a common baseline index, rather than showing multiple scales.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.6-15 Indication of Scale When a graphic display has been expanded from its normal coverage, some scale indicator of the eyansion factor should be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
( Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Display Elements Page 1-58 1J.6 Scales, Axes,and Grids 13.6-16 Manual Rescaling Users should be able to manually change the scale for the purpose of maintaining an undistorted d_isplay for different operating conditions.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.6-17 Indication of Automatic Rescaling If the system is designed to automatically change scale, an alert should be given to the user that the change is being made.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.6-18 Aids for Scale Interpolation If interpolation must be made or where accuracy of reading graphic data is required, computer aids should be provided for exact interpolation.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.6-19 Unobtrusive Grids When grid lines are displayed, they should be unobtrusive and not obscure data elements (e.g.,
curves and plotted points).[AI]
oK Comment:
_ l Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
13.6 20 Numbering Grids G_raphs should be constructed so that the numbered grids are bolder than unnumbered grids.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l j 13 Displiy Elements Page 1-59 j , 13.6 Scales, Axes,and Grids
! '\.
1 13.6-21 Discontinuous Axes 1
When data comparisons of interest fall within a limited range, the scaled axis should emphasize j that range, with a break in the displayed axis to indicate discontinuity with the scale origin.[AI]
oK Comewet:
Discrepancy N/A i
j Return > konson:
i 13.6 22 Duplicate Axes l When scaled data will contain extreme values, duplicate axes should be displayed, so that the X-axis appears at both the top and bottom, and the Y-axis at both the left and right sides of the j graph [AI]
3 oK Comunent:
- Discrepancy 4
j N/A Return > Reason:
l 13.6 23 Restricted Use of Three-Dimensional Scaling
., Unless required, use of three-dimensional scales (i.e., where a Z-axis is added to the display) j \ should be avoided.[AI]
l oK Comewat:
- Discrepancy N/A j Return > Reason
I i
?
)
l
! 1 1
4 j
I 4
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispiry Elements Page 1-60 13.7 Horders, Lines and Arrows 13.71 LineTypes Meaningful differences between lines appearing in graphic displays, such as flow paths, should be dricted by using various line types, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted, and widths.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reasor..
13.7 2 Conventional Use of Arrows In flow charts and other graphics displays, arrowheads should be used in a conventional fashion to i_ndicate directional relations in the sequential links between various elements.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.7-3 Restricted Use of Horders U_nnecessary borders should not be used in the display.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.7-4 Hordering Single Blocks A_ border should be used to improve the readability of a single block of numbers or letters.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 13.7-5 Distinctive Horders Around CriticalInformation If several labels or messages are clustered in the same area. distinctive borders should be placed a_round the critical ones only.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
. .. ._ _. - . . . . . - . - + , - ,
l 4
i INFORMAT. ION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 I 13 Display Elements - Page 1-61 l
- 1.3.8 Color s
13.8-1 Use of Color Where color is used for coding, it should be employed conservatively and consistently.[A!]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.8-2 Color Coding for Discrete Data Categories
.When a user must distinguish rapidly among several discrete categories of data, a unique color
]
sh_ould be used to display the data in each category.[AI] '
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.8-3 Color Coding for Relative Values When the relative rather than the absolute values of a variable are important, gradual color changes as a tonal code should be used to show the relative values of a single variable.[AI]
, oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
- Return > Reason
13.8-4 Color Coding to Draw Attention 1 Brighter and/or more saturated colors should be used when it is necessary to draw a user's attention to critical data.[AI] )
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l.
- 13.8-5 Color Selection C_olors for coding should be based on user conventions with particular colors.[ AI]
- oK Comment
Dhcrepancy N/A i
i Return > Reason:
J 1
1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 I 13 Displ:y Elements Page 1-62 ,
13.8 Color '
13.8-6 Pure Blue Pure blue on a dark background should be avoided for text, for thin lines, or for high-resolution in_ formation.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
_ l N/A Return > Reason:
1 13.8-7 Easily Discriminable Colors When selecting colors for coding discrete categories of data, those colors should be easily discriminable.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
_ l N/A Return > Reason:
13.8-8 Unique Assignment of Color Codes l
\_Vhen color coding is used, each color should represent only one category of displayed data.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.8-9 Minimum Color Differences When color coding is used for discriminability or conspiculty of displayed information, all colors in_the set should differ from one another by a minimum of 40AE (CIE L*u*v*) distances.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.8-10 Color Contrast For adequate legibility, colored symbols should differ from their color background by a minimum of 100 AE (CIE Yu'v') distances.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Displ:y El:ments Page 1-63 :
r' 13.8 Color '
l
=
13.8-11 Redundant Color Coding C_olor coding should be redundant with some other display feature.[AI]
f oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Retra > Reason:
13.8-11. Unplanned Patterns from Color Coding C_olor coding should not create unplanned or obvious new pattems on the screen.
oK Comment:
Dhcrepancy NA Return > Reason:
13.8-13 Red Green Combinations Whenever possible, red and green colors should not be used in combination.[ AI]
oK Comment:
s Discrepancy
( NA Return > Reason:
1.3.8-14 Chromostereopsis Simultaneous presentation of both pure red and pure blue on a dark background should be i avoided.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
]
1 MA l Return > Reason:
I 13.8-15 Pure Red '
Dominant wavelengths above 650 nanometers in displays should be avoided.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
(
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Displ y Elements Page 1-64 13.9 Size, Shape, and Pattern Coding 13.91 Limited Use of Size Coding ,
Size coding should be used only for applications where displays are not crowded.[AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > . Reason:
1.3.9-2 Size Variations A maximum of three size levels should tn used. The major dimensions of the larger symbol should b_e at least 150 percent of the major dimension of the smaller symbol.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
13.9-3 Size Coding Proportional to Data Value When the symbol size is to be proportional to the data value, the scaled parameter should be the sy_mbol area rather than a linear dimension such as diameter.[All oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
13.9-4 Geometric Area Coding For area coding, the maximum number of levels should be six (preferably no more than three).
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
13.9 5 Length Coding For length coding, the maximum number of levels should be six (preferably no more than three).
oK Comment:
DL$crepancy NA Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
-1.3 Display Elements Page 1-65 q 13.9 Size, Shape,and Pattern Coding 4V) 13.9 6 Establishing Standards for Shape Coding When shape coding is used, codes should be based on established stardards or conventional 1 m_eanings.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A i
Return > Reason:
13.9 7 Clearly Discriminable Shapes Shapes used in coding for data groups should be clearly discriminable.[AI]
OK Comnent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.9-8 Simple Pattern Codes When pattems are used to code displayed areas, simple rather than elaborate pattems should be ugd.[AI]
OK Comment:
1
. A Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.9-9 Pattern Coding of Extreme Values t
Pattern density should vary with the value of the coded variable so that the least dense pattern is associated with one extreme and the most dense pattern with the other extreme.
OK Comment:
Dberepancy
, N/A Return > Reason:
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Display Elements Page 1-66 1.3.10 Ilighlighting by Brightness and Flashing 13.10-1 Easily Recognizableliighlighting Highlighting should be easily recognizable and used to attract the user's attention to special conditions, items important to decision-making or action requirements, or as a means to provide feedback.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.10-2 MinimalIfighlighting H_ighlighting of information should be minimized.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.10-3 Consistency A 3 articular highlighting method should be used consistently.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.10-4 Removing Highlighting if highlighting is used to emphasize important display items, it should be removed when it no longer has meaning.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A R *=en > Reason:
13.10-5 Appropriate Use of Brightness Coding Coding by differences in brightness should be used for applications that require discrimination between only two categories of displayed items.[All oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 13 Display Elements Page 1-67 l 13.10 Highlighting by Brightness and Flashing
\
13.10 6 Significance of Brightness Levels High brightness levels shouki be used to signify information of primary importance, and lower levels s_h_ould be used to signify information of secondary interr OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 13.10-7 Brightness Coding Intensities Levels approximating 33 percent and 100 percent of the display luminance should be used for brightness coding.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.10-8 Image Reversal Image reversal should be used primarily for highlighting in dense data fields or to indicate selection o_f on-screen objects and information.
V _
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.10-9 Appropriate Use of Flash Coding Flashing shouki be used when a displayed item implies an urgent need for attention or action, but not in_ displays requiring attention to detail or reading of text.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.10 10 Flash Coding for Text i When a user must read a displayed item that is flash coded, an extra symbol such as an asterist or l arrow to me.rk the item should be used, and the marker symbol should flash rather than the item itself.IA!]
C*a Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.3 Display Elements Page 1-68 1.3.10 liighlighting by Brightness and Flashing 13.10-11 Small Area O_rily a small area of the screen should flash at any time.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 3.10-12 Coding by Flash Rate N_o more than two flash rates should be used.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.10-13 Flash Suppression Event acknowledgement or flash suppression keys should be provided.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
!GA Heturn > Reason:
1 3.10-14 Long Persistence Phosphor Displays Flashing should not be used with long-persistence phosphor displays.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.10-15 Flash Rate for Critical Information When two rates are used, the higher rate should apply to the more critical information.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Displ y El:ments Page 1-69 m 1.3.11 Auditory Coding 13.11 1 Appropriate Use of Auditory Signals Auditory signals shouki be provided to alert the operator to situations that require attention, such as an incorrect input action by the operator or a failure of the HSI to process an input from the oyerator.[AI) oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA
, Return > Reason:
13.11-2 Dedicated Use Systems used to transmit non-verbal auditory signals should be used only for that purpose.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
13.11-3 Localization Auditory signals should provide localization cues that direct operators to those control room work
(] /
stations where operator attention is required.
oK Comment:
Discrepacey NA Return > Reason:
13.11-4 Selection Auditory signals shouki be selected to avoid interference with other auditory sources, including verbal communication.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
13.11-5 Signal Priority Distinction Caution signals shouki be readily distinguishable from warning signals and used to indicate conditions rejuiring awareness, but not necessarily immediate action.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA
/ ,
k Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 !
13 Display Elements Page 1-70 13.11 Auditory Coding 1.3.116 Association with Visual Warnings A_uditory alerts, as well as caution and waming sounds, should accompany visual displays.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.11-7 Unique Signal Event Association Once a particular auditory signal code is established for a given operating situation, the same signal should not be designated for some other display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1J.118 Total Number of Simple Signals If the audio signal varies on one dimension only (such as frequency), the number of signals to be identified should not exceed four.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.3.11-9 Use with Several Visual Displays One audio signal may be used in conjunction with several visual displays, provided that immediate discrimination is not critical to personnel safety or system performance.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1J.11-10 Confusible Signals Audio waming signals that might be confused with routine signals or with other sounds in the oprating environment should not be used.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 ,
1.3 Dispity Elements Page 1-71 n 1.3.11 Auditory Coding b
1 3.11-11 Signal Compatible with Environment The intensity, duration, and source location of the signal should be compatible with the acoustical environment of the intended receiver as well as with the requirements of other personnel in the signal a_rea. [AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
13.11-12 Turning Off Non-Critical Auditory Signals N_oncritical auditory signals should be capable of being turned off at the discretion of the user.[AI]
oK Comment:
~
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.3.11 13 Indicating Who is to Respond When the signal must indicate which user (of a group of users) is to respond, a simple repetition code Q should be used.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reamn:
1J.11-14 Direction of Sound Sound sources (speakers or buzzers) should direct sound toward the center of the primary operating area.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
13.11-15 Signal Bending Around Obstacles When an audio signal must bend around major obstacles or pass through partitions, its frequency sh_ould be less than 500 Hz.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
^
Return > Reason:
l 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 IJ Display Elements Page 1-72 13.11 Auditory Coding 13.11-16 Audibility A_uditory alert and warning signals should be audible in all parts of the control room. j oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.3.11 17 Signal Intensity The intensity of auditory signals should be set to unmistakably alert and get an operator's attention.[AIJ oK Comment:
Dbcrepancy MA Return > Reason:
13.11 18 Signal Travel Over 1000 ft When an audio signal must travel over 1000 feet, its frequency should be less than 1000 Hz.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.3.11 19 Iligh or Unknown Noise Environments When the noise environment is unknown or expected to be difficult to penetrate, audio signals should have a shifting frequency that passes through the entire noise spectrum and/or be combined with a visual signal.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
13.11-20 Masking Audio warning signals should not interfere with any other critical functions or warning signals, or mask any other critical audio signals.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
4 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.3 Displ:y El:ments Page 1-73 l 13.11 Auditory Coding
(~h h 13.11-21 Failure of Auditory Signals The audio display device and circuit shouki be designed to preclude waming signal failure in the event of system or equipment failure and vice versa.[AI)
UK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
N/A
'l Return > Reason:
13.11 72 False Alarms A_uditory alarm systems should be designed so that false alarms are avoided.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.11-23 Distinctive Coding Coding methods should be distinct and unambiguous, and should not conflict with other auditory
- signals.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
< Return > Reason:
13.11-24 Not Contradictory Similar auditory signals must not be contradictory in meaning with one another. !
oK Comment: I 4 Discrepancy N/A 3 Return > Reason:
1J.1125 Pulse Coding Auditory signals may be pulse coded by repetition rate. Repetition rates should be sufficiently separated to ensure operator discrimination.
l OK Comment:
7 -
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
j
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Dispiry Elements Page 1-74 13.11 Auditory Coding 13.11 26 Frequency Change Coding If modulation of the frequency (Hz) of a signal denotes information, center frequencies should be b_etween 500 and 1000 Hz.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.11-27 Discrete Frequency Coding Ifdiscrete-frequency codes are used for audible signal coding, frequencies should be broad band and wikiy spaced within the 200 to 5000 Hz range (preferably between 500 and 3000 Hz).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
1.3.11-28 Coding by Intensit;/
C_oding by intensity is not recommended.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
13.11-29 Testing It_should be possible to test the auditory signal system.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I i
e i
i I
l l
O ;
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.4 Data Quality cnd Update Rrte Page 1-75
/' l.41 Display Update Rate Requirements
( The maximum update rate should be determined by the time required for the user to identify and gocess the changed feature of the display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepaan MA
- Return > Reason
- 1.4 2 User Control of Display Update Rate The user should be capable of controlling the rate of information update on the display, but the allowable rate should not exceed that capable of being met by the information source and the Eocessing equipment.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
a 1.4-3 Changing Values Changing alphanumeric values which the user must reliably read should not be updated more often than once per second.[AI]
( oK Comment:
4 Discrepancy WA l
Return > Reason:
1.4-4 Initial Erasure to Replace Changed Data When the computer generates a display to update changed data, the old items should be erased before adding new data items to the display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy WA Return > Reason:
1.4 5 Display Motion Items on a graphic display should not move faster than 60 degrees of visual angle per second, with 2_0 degrees per second preferred.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy I
g Retor. >. Res :
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.4 D:ta Quality cnd Update R te Page 1-76 1.4-6 Data Sampling Rate The sampling rate for each critical plant variable should result in no meaningful loss of information in_the data presented.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.4-7 Time Delay The time delay from when the sensor signal is sampled to when it is displayed should be consistent wjth the user's task performance requirements.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.4 8 Accuracy Each variable shouki be displayed with an accuracy sufficient for the users to perform their tasks.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.4-9 Data Verification for Critical Plant Variables R_edundant sensor readings should be compared before displaying the critical plant variable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.410 Analytical Redundancy A_nalytical redundancy among different critical plant parameters should be used.[All oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
i 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.4 D:ta Qu lity and Update Rate Page 1-77 q(V
]
l.4-11 Data Quality Display Variables that are subject to validation (e.g., checks for accuracy) should be identified and an indication should be provided when these data are invalid. When data fails to meet the specified criteria for validity and thus is suspected of being of poor quality, an indication of validation failure j shouki be provided. Data entered by personnel should be identified such that it is easily distinguished
=
from validated data.
I OK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
, N/A
- Return > Reason
e i I
i i
i\ l i
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.5 Dispiny Devices Page 1-78 1.5.1 Video Display Units 1.5.11 VDU Resolution The display should have adequate resolution; i.e., users can discriminate all display elements and c_ odes from maximum viewing distance.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.1-2 VDU Contrast Be contrast ratio of the display should be greater than 3:1; a contrast ratio of 7:1 is preferred.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.1-3 Flicker The display should be " flicker free."[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reamn:
1.5.1-4 Geometric Stability
'I_he display should be free of " jitter."[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.1-5 Image Continuity The display should maintain the illusion of a continuous image, i.e., users should not be able to re_ solve scan lines or matrix spots.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
- 1.5 Dispisy Devices Page 1-79
. 1.5.1 Video Display Units
[-
i
( l.5.16 VDU Image Linearity De display should be free of geometric distortion.[AI]
oK Comment:
1 Discrepancy
_ i MA l
] Return > Reason: 1 l
1.5.1-7 VDU Display Luminance De display should have adequate luminance.[AI] ;
1 oK Comment:
l Discrepancy '
MA Return > Reason:
l J
l
)
1.5.1-8 Luminance Uniformity All luminances that are supposed to be the same should appear the same.[Af] j
- j. oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A (
Q Return > Reason:
l l
l.5.1-9 VDU Controls Frequently used controls should be easily visible and accessible to the VDU user from the normal working position.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.5.1 10 VDU Luminance Control A control to vary the VDU luminance from 10 percent of minimum ambient luminance to full lu_minance should be provided.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
i
%/
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.5 Displ y Devices Page 1-80 1.5.2 Large Screen Displays 1.5.2-1 Control of CriticalInformation Display Control of large-screen group display systems should be such that critical information cannot be m_odified or deleted inadvertently or arbitrarily.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.2 2 Resolution U_sers should be able to resolve all important display detail at the maximum viewing position.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.2-3 Size of Characters The height ofletters and numerals should not subtend less than 15 minutes (4.5 mrad) of visual angle as_ measured at the maximum viewing distance.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.2-4 Contrast Polarity Contrast should be either light on a dark background or vice-versa, except where superposition is used.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
1.5.2 5 Projected Display Luminance Ratio The luminance ratio provided by the projection system should be adequate for the type of material b_eing projected.[AI]
OK Comment:
Diserapancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 I 1.5 Displ y Devices Page 1-81 I I.5.2 Large Screen Displays 1.5.2-6 Projected Display Image Luminance Image luminance and light distribution should be uniform. The luminance of the screen center at maximum viewing angle should be at least halfits maximum luminance.
l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.2-7 Minimize Keystone Effects i I
If projected displays are used, projector and screen should be arranged so as to minimize " keystone effect,"i.e., distortion of projected data proportions due to non-perpendicularity between projector and screen.
oK Commsv DL$crepancy j N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.2 8 Minimum Viewing Distance The display should not be closer to any observer than half the display width or height, whichever is greater.
(m"] _
OK Comment:
Discrepancy j N/A j Return > Reason:
4
- 1.5.2-9 Interruption of View i
Large screen displays should be located relative to critical observers so that the view is not obscured by other people.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
, N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.2-10 Seating Area Off-centerline viewing for large-screen optical projection displays should not exceed 30 degrees (525 mrad); an angle of less than 20 degrees (350 mrad) is preferred.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 !
1.5 Dispi:y Devices Page 1-82 l.53 Printers, Recorders, and Plotters j l
1.53-1 Use l
As a general rule, printers / plotters should be used to record alarm data, trend information, and other process data which may be needed for later reference.
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Returo > Reason:
1.53-2 Placement of Printers in principle, printers should be located within the primary operating area because they must be verified and attended by the operator.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A l
Return > Reesco:
1.53-3 Legibility Print output should be free from character line misregistration, character tilt, smear, or glare.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
1.5.3-4 Contrast A minimum contrast ratio of 4:1 shouki be provided between the printed material and the background on which it is printed.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
1.53-5 Illumination The printer shoulti be provided with intemal illumination if the printed matter is not legible in the planned operational ambient illumination.
oK Comment:
Discrepasey N/A Retura > Reason:
l 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
- 1.5 Dispicy Devices Page 1-83 m 1.53 Printers, Recorders, and Plotters l.53-6 Visibility
, When used for real-time applications, the printed matter should not be hidden, masked or obscured in_a manner that impairs direct reading.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dkrepacy
- N/A
, Return > Reesco:
l.53-7 User Annotation Capability
- When used in real-time applications, printing devices should be mounted so that the users may write on or mark the printed matter (e.g., paper or metalized paper) while still in the printer.
OK Comment:
in.crep cy N/A Return > Reason:
. 1.53-8 Take-up Provision A take-up device should be provided for printed material.[Al]
OK Coenment:
D6 nep a cy l __
[ N/A Return > Reason:
1.53-9 Indication of Supply of Materials A positive indication should be provided of the remaining supply of printing materials (e.g., paper, to_ner, and ribbons).
oK Comment:
D k np acy N/A Return > Reason:
1.53-10 Quality of Expendable Materials Pens, inks, and paper should be of a quality to provide clear, distinct, and reliable marking.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
l l
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l l
1.5 Displ y Devices Page 1-84 1.5.3 Printers, Recorders, and Plotters 1.5.3-11 Availability of Expendable Material Paper, ink, and other operator-maintained expendables should be provided and accessible in the ;
control room.
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3-12 Ease of Routine Replenishment P_rinter design should permit quick and easy replenishment of paper, toner, ribbons, or ink.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3-13 Smudging / Smearing Hie hardcopy should be resistant to smudging or smearing when handled by users.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3-14 Job Aids Graphic overlays shouki be provided where these may be critical to proper interpretation of graphic da.ta as it is being generated.[Al]
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3-15 Scale Design Plotter scales shouki be numbered and marked according to the principles of display design and scale marking given in Sections 1.1 and 1.3.6.
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.5 Displ3y Devices Page 1-85 1.5.3 Printers, Recorders,and Plotters 1.5.316 Scale Compatibility Scales printed on the recording paper should be the same as the scales shown on the recorder.
oK Comment:
Discrepang J
N/A Return > Reason:
, 1.5.3-17 Paper Takeup and Cutoff 1 A take-up spool shouki be provided to receive completed recordings and a means should be provided for tearing off completed records for storage.
)
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3-18 Paper-Speed Adjustability Provide a high paper-speed option to run out records for detachment and a selection of lower speed j options to permit adjustment of the time scale so that rate-of-change information can be indicated.
< oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l.
1
] Return > Reason:
1.5.3-19 Annotation 4
It should be convenient to annotate recordings with date and time markings, with paper speed if varied from normal, with parameter identification, or with any other relevant information.
oK Comment: l Discrepancy j N/A Return > Reason:
l i
- 1.5.3-20 Labeling i
Labels should identify the parameters recorded.[AI]
oK Comment:
1 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I
1 l
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i 1.5 Dispiry Devices Page 1-86 1.5.3 Printers, Recorders, and Plotters 1.5.3 21 Ink Colors Each pen should use a different colored ink to permit channel identification from line color.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3 22 Channel Overload The recorder shouki not be loaded beyond its designed channel capacity because this adds complexity to_the analysis and prolongs sampling cycle time.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3-23 Channel Identification on Instrument Discrete recorders should be equipped to display the channel being plotted in an easily-viewed manner.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3 24 ChannelIdentification on Recording Number-printing mechanisms should be designed and maintained to provide clear, sharp, and small n_umbering to avoid crowding of data and consequent analysis problems.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.3-25 Channel Selection Capability Provisions should be made to select any single channel for immediate display without awaitir.g completion of a sampling cycle.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- . . . . . . _ . _ . - . . . - . - . . - . = . _ . . . - . . ~ . . . . _ - - - . - - . . - - . - . - . - . - . . . . . - - . . - . . .
- 1INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i 1.5 Display Devices Page 1-87 i
1.5.4 Audio Display Devices l The guidelines for audio display devices are contained in Section 6.2, Speech-Based Communication.
.i l
i i k
i ,
i 'I f l
! I i
i i
i i
i I
I 1
1 I
i i
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 13 Display Devices Page 1-88 1.5.5 Meters 1.5.5-1 Circular Scales Scale values should increase with clockwise movement of the pointer.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.5-2 Vertical Straight Scales Scale values should increase with upward movement of the pointer.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.5-3 Horizontal Straight Scales Scale values should increase with pointer movement to the right.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.5-4 Pointer Tip Form Pointer tips should be simple.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.5-5 Pointer Positioning Relative to Scale Pointer tip should extend to within about 1/16 inch of(but not overlap) the smallest graduation marks on the scale.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
I INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 1.5 Dispiry Devices Page 1-89 l 1.5.5 Meters l
1.5.5-6 Pointer Visibility Pointer / background contrast and pointer size should be adequate to permit rapid recognition of pointer position.
UK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.5.5-7 Distinctiveness Zone markings should be conspicuous and distinctively different for different zones.[AI]
OK Comnwnt:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.5.5 8 Consistency To facilitate reading of meters and prevent misreading, the orientation of scale markings should be consistent.[AI]
OK Comment:
t Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1 1.5.5 9 Numerical Orientation l
Individual numerals on any type of fixed scale should be vertical.[All l oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1.5.510 Zero-Point Orientation Where pointer movement is more than 360 degrees, the zero point should be located at the 12 o' clock position.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dbwrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.5 Displ y Devices Page 1-90 1.5.5 Meters 1.5.5-11 End Point Indication or. . artial Revolution Scales Where the scale covers less than a full rotation of the pointer, scale end points should be indicated by a break in s.; ale.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.5-12 Moving-Scale Meters Versus Fixed Scale Moving-Pointer Types Moving-scale fixed-pointer meters should be avoided in favor of the more effective fixed-scale moving-pointer types.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.5 Display Devices Page 1-91 1.5.6 Light Indicators 1.5.61 Precautions to Assure Availability' Dual-bulb or dual-filament light assemblies should be used.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A i Return > Rees e:
1.5.6-2 Precautions to Assure Unambiguous Sensing by Operators Lj; hts should not appear to be glowing when in fact they are off, or vice versa.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang
{ N/A Return > Reason: l 1.5.6-3 Precautions to Avoid Misinterpretation System / equipment status should be inferred by illumir_.ed indicators, and never by the absence of illumination.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy j _
kg l N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.6-4 Use as Alerting Indicators Alerting the operators to unfavorable status should be a function of the annunciator system and not assigned to lightindicators.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason.
l 1.5.6-5 Identification of Meaning Where meaning is not apparent, labeling must be provided close to the light indicator showing the message intended by its glowing.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepeney N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 1.5 Dispi y Devices Page 1-92 l I
1.5.6 Light Indicators 1.5.6-6 Light Intensity The illuminated indicator should be at least 10 percent greater in light intensity than the surrounding panel as measured by a spot photometer.
oK Comment:
Dberepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.5.6 7 Visibility Factors l When using legend light indicators, make sure contrast and ambient / transilluminated conditions are considered.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.5.6 8 Legend Design G_eneral legend design should be consistent throughout the control room.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.5.6-9 Distinguishability from Legend Pushbuttons Illuminated legend indicators shouki be readily distinguishable from legend pushbuttons by form, size, or other factors.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1.5.610 Color Coding The color of the legend background under transillumination shouki conform to the general color code established for the control room.[ Arj OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy NA Return > Reason:
. - _. - _ - -_ .- =-
1 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1.5 Displ y Devices Page 1-93 1.5.7 Numeric Readouts (c
x
. 1.5.7-1 Orientation l
Multi-digit numbers formed by several elements (e.g., drums and LED arrays) should be read j horizontally from left to right.[Al] ,
oK Comment:
Discrepancy 1 N/A Return > Reason: ;
1.5.7 2 Width-to-IIcight Ratio in Drum Displays To compensate for the distortion imposed by the curved surface of the drum, counter numerals should reflect a width-height ratio of 1:1.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.7-3 Grouping of Numerals if more than four digits are required, they should be grouped and the groupings separated as p appropriate by commas, by a decimal point, or by additional space.
( _
oK Discrepancy Comment:
N/A Return > Reason:
1.5.7 4 Display of Changing Values Numerals shouki not follow each other faster than one per second when the operator is expected to )
read the numerals consecutively.[ AI] !
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 Gen:ral User Input Guidelines Page 2-1 O 2.1-1 Selection of Dialogue Types b He selection of dialogue types should be based on anticipated task requirements, user skills, and anticipated system response time.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l 2.1-2 Consistent Procedures l Procedures for entering commands or informe, tion should be consistent in form and consequences.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A t
Return >
Reason:
l l 2.1-3 Consistent Wording of Commands
- All terms employed in the user-system interface, and their abbreviations, should be consistent in j meaning from one transaction to another, and from one task to another.[AI]
i oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.1-4 Wording Consistent with User Guidance The wording and required format of information or command entry functions should be consistently reflected in the wording of user guidance, including alllabels, messages, and instructional material.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.1-5 Minimal Demands on the User Entry of information or commands should not require the user to remember special codes or se_quences or to perform translations or conversions.[AI]
oK Comment:
i Discrepancy
/ WA
, Return > Reason:
i
r 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 21 Genri User Input Guidelines Page 2-2 2.16 Minimal User Actions User input actions should be simple, particularly for real-time tasks requiring fast user response.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-7 Unnecessary Entry ofInformation A_ user should not be required to re-enter information already available to the system.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.18 Availability ofInformation Information necessary to accomplish a specific entry (e.g., labels, annotations, p,ompts, or options lists) should be available to the user when that unsaction action is appropriate.[All OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-9 Logical Transaction Sequences An information entry sequence should be designed so that its organization reflects the user's view of the task, and should provide all control options that may be required.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-10 Flexible User Entry Flexible means of entering information or commands should be provided so that users can l
accomplish necessary transactions, and can obtain guidance as needed in connection with any transaction.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 Gen:ral User Input Guidelines Page 2-3 O 2.1 11 Control by Explicit User Action b Users should be allowed to control the processing ofinformation or commands by explicit action.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
2.1-12 Compatibility with User Expectations The results of any entry should be compatible with user expectations, so that the system changes in_a " natural" way in response to user actions.[AI]
OK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A l l Return > Reason:
2.1 13 Feedback for User Entries The computer should acknowledge every entry immediately.[AI]
OK Comment:
/ Discrepancy
'(_/ N/A 4
Return > Reason:
a 2.1 14 PerioJic Feedback j When system functioning requires the user to stand-by, periodic feedback should be provided to in_dicate hor.nal system operation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-15 Indicating Completion of Processing When processing in response to an entry is lengthy, the user should be given some positive indication of subsequent completion.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2 USER-SYSTEM IkERACTION 2 ! General User Input Guidelines Page 2-4 2.1-16 Indicating Control Lockout If entries must be delayed pending computer processing of prior entries, the delay should be indicated to the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-17 Interrupt to End Control Lockout in situations where control lockout does occur, an auxiliary means of control entry should be pr_ovided, such as a special function key, to abort a transaction causing extended lockout.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-18 Entry via Primary Display When data entry is a significant part of a user's task, entered data should appear on the user's smary display.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1 19 Entry of Corrections The same explicit ENTER action should be required for entry of corrections as used for the original entry.
oK Comment:
Discrepsacy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.120 Editing Capabilities During Text Entry l Users should be able to perform simple editing during text entry without having to invoke a l
separate edit mode.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-5 4
2.1-21 Entries Distinct from Text C If entries are made by keying onto the display, such as by keyed menu selections or commands, t_ hey should be distinguishable from displayed text.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A s
Return > Reason:
2.122 Variable Length Data Area Users should not have to remove unused underscores or otherwise enter keystrokes for each asition within a variable length entry area.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.123 Optional Versus Required Entry l Optional versus required data entries within fields on input forms should be distinct.
OK Comment:
' O, _
D6screpancy N/A
- Return > Reason
- 2.1-24 Display of User Annotations A_nnotations added by users to displayed text should be distinguishable from the text itself.[AI]
OK Comnwnt:
_ l 1 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-25 Flexible Interaction Design When information or command entry requirements may change, some means for the user (or a system administrator) to make necessary changes to available functions should be provided.'[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 Gensed User Input Guidelines Page 2-6 2.126 GuidanceInformation Users should be able to request guidance information regarding requirements for information of command entry (e.g., syntax, parameters, and options).
oK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- 2.1-27 Entry Procedures Matched to User Skill The means of entering information or commands should be compatible with user skills, permitting simple step-by-step actions by beginners, but permitting more complex entries by experienced users.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.128 Stacked Entries Users should be allowed to key a sequence of commands or option codes as a single " stacked" entry.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-29 Consistent Order in Entry Stacking For control entry stacking, entries should be required to be in the same order as they would normally be made in a succession of separate control entry actions.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-30 Abbreviation in Entry Stacking For control entry stacking, command names, their abbreviations, or option codes should be accepted just as if those control entries had been made separately.[ AI]
oK Comment:
l Discrepancy f N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-7 j G 2.1-31 Minimal Punctuation of Stacked Entries lj Users should be allowed to stack control entries without any punctuation other than spaces b_etween words or option codes.
oK Comment:
I Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-32 Standard Delimiter in Entry Stacking If punctuation other than spaces is needed to separate entries in a stacked control entry, a single ;
s_tandard symbol should be used for that purpose.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i 1
2.1-33 Distinctive Display of Control Information All displays should be designed so that features relevant to user entries are distinctive in position and/or format.[AI]
oK Comment:
0
~
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
)
2.1-34 Displayed Context if the consequences of a user entry will differ depending upon context established by a prior action, then some continuous indication of current context should be displayed for reference by the user.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-35 Consistent Display of Context Information Information displayed to provide context for user entries should be distinctive in location and format, and consistently displayed from one transaction to the next.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
( Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 Gen:ral User Input Guidelines Page 2-8 2.1-36 Record of Prior Entries ,
Users should be permitted to request a summary of prior entries to help determine present status, and should be allowed to review any parameters that are currently operative.[AI]
OK Comment: l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-37 Standard Display Area for Command Entry A command entry area in a consistent location should be provided on every display, preferably at the bottom.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-38 General List of Options A general list of basic options should be provided and always be available to serve as a "home base" or consistent starting point for user input.[AI)
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.139 Displaying Option Codes When users must select options by code entry, the code associated with each option should be di_ splayed in a consistent and distinctive manner.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-40 Organization and Labeling of Listed Options The general options list should show control entry options grouped, labeled, and ordered in terms of their logical function, frequency, and criticality of use, following the general guidelines for m_enu design.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-9 N 2.1-41-Indicating Appropriate Control Options (h
' Users should be provided with a list of the control options that are specifically appropriate for any transaction.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.142 Only Available Options Offered Only control options that are actually available for the current transaction should be offered to u_sers.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepson N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-43 Provide Further Available Action Transactions should never leave the user without further available action and should provide next steps or alternatives.[AI]
OK Comment: .
j _
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.1-44 Prompting Command Entries Users should be provided with whatever information may be needed to guide command entries at l any point in a sequence of transactions, by incorporating prompts in a display and/or by providing
- pr_ompts in response to requests for HELP.
I OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-45 Control by Simultaneous Users When several users must interact with the system simultaneously, control entries by one user should not interfere with those of another.[AI]
l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A J Return > Reason:
l
1 2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-10 2.1-46 Highlighting Selected Data When a user is performing an operation on some selected display item. that item should be i highlighted.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-47 User Contro! of Processing l Users should be allowed to control processing of a command or request.[AI]
l oK Comment:
Dlscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-48 Distinctive Interrupt Options If different kinds of user interrupt are provided, each interrupt function should be designed as a sJe arate control option with a distinct name.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-49 User Transaction Interrupts U_ser interrupts and aborts should not modify or remove stored or entered data.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-50 User Control of Entry Users should be allowed to control the pace and sequence of their entry of information or commands.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-11
/ 2.1-51 User-Specified Transaction Timing When appropriate to task requirements, users should be allowed to specify the timing of t_ransactions.[AI]
oK Cmoment:
Diacrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.152 Indicating PAUSE / SUSPEND Status if PAUSE or SUSPEND options are provided, some indication of the status should be displayed whenever such an option is selected by a user.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-53 Consistent CONTINUE Option At any step in a defined transaction sequence, if there is only a single appropriate next step, then a consistent control option to continue to the next transaction should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.154 Data Manipulation The user should be able to manipulate information without concern for internal storage and retrieval mechanisms of the system.[AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-55 Default Values When likely default values can be defined for the information to be entered in a particular task, those default values should be offered to speed entry.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy A
pg Return > Reason:
2 USER. SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-12 1 2.1-56 Display of Default Values At the start of an input transaction, currently defined default values should be displayed in their l l
appropriate data fields.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-57 Easy Confirmation to Enter Default Values Users should be provided with some simple means to confirm acceptance of a displayed default value.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-58 User Dermition of Default Values U_sers should be permitted to define, change, or remove default values for any input field.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-59 Indicating Control Defaults When keyed conunand or option code entries are used and a default is defined for a null control entry, the default should be indicated to the user.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-60 Single Method for Input Input transactions and associated displays should be designed so that a user can stay with one m_ethod of entry, and not have to shift to another.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
l Return > Reason:
- 2. USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-13 m
- t \
V 2.161 Upper and Lower Case Equivalent For interpreting user-composed control entries, upper and lower case letters should be treated as equivalent.[AI] l
, OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
2.1-62 Justification of Entries
- Unless otherwise required by processing or display requirements, alphabetic input should be left l justified, and numeric input should be right justified for integer data or decimal point justified for d_ecimal data.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
- Return > Reason
2.1-63 Automatic Justification of Entries Automatic justification of tabular data entries should be provided [AI]
4 p -
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i
! 2.1-64 Maintaining Significant Zeros When a user must emer numeric values that will later be displayed, all significant zeros should be maintained.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.1-65 Significance of Numeric Values Numeric values should be displayed to the level of significance required of the data, regardless of t_he value ofindividual input data.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.1 General User Input Guidelines Page 2-14 2.1-66 Overwriting Characters D_ata entry by overwriting a set of characters within a field should be avoided.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 l
l O
i I
i e 1
2 USER SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-15 Oi 2.2.1 Command Language 2.2.1-1 layered Command Language A command language should be designed so that its functions are organized in groups (or
" layers") for case in learning and use.[AI]
OK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.1-2 General List of Commands A general list of basic commands, with appropriate command format guidance, should be l provided to serve as a "home base" or consistent starting point for composing command ;
entries.[AI] l l
oK Comment: I Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.1-3 Distinctive Meaning for Commands Words in a command language should be distinctive from one another, and emphasize significant d differences in function.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.1-4 Distinctive Spelling for Commands Words and abbreviations in a command language should have distinctive spelling, so that simple spelling errors will be recognized as such rather than invoking a different command.[AI] ;
oK Comment:
Dwrepancy
~
1 N/A !
Return > Reason:
2.2.1-5 Abbreviation of Commands U_sers should be allowed to abbreviate commands.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A V Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-16 2.2.1 Command Language 2.2.1-6 Recognizing Command Synonyms The computer should recognize a variety of synonyms for each word defined in the command language.[AIJ oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: 1 2.2.17 Interpreting Misspelled Commands Where the set of potential command entries is well defined, the computer should recognize and execute common misspellings of commands, rather than requiring re<ntry.
OK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.1-8 Recognizing Alternative Syntax
'Rie computer should recognize probable altemative forms of command syntax.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returu > Reason:
2.2.19 User-Assigned Command Names A command language should have flexibility to permit a user to assign personal names to frequently used commands.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.1-10 User-Requested Prompts Users should be allowed to request computer-generated prompts as necessary to determine required parameters in a command entry, or to determine available options for an appropriate next command.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-17 CN 2.2.1 Command Language 2.2.1 11 Minimal Punctuation Users should be allowed to enter commands without any punctuation other than the spaces b_etween words.[All OK Comment:
D6screpancy N/A l
Return > Reason: l l
l 2.2.1 12 Ignoring Blanks in Command Entry Single and multiple blanks between words should be treated as equivalent when processing ;
command entries.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.1-13 Standard Delimiter If command punctuation other than spaces is required, a single standard delimiter symbol should
[s
\
be used for that purpose.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.1-14 Graphic Examples in Guidance Information Where possible, guidance information should be accompanied with graphic examples of command 1 content and syntax. l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Res. son:
L]
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-18 2.2.2 Menu Selection 2.2.2-1 Logical Ordering of Menu Options M_enu options should be ordered and grouped logically.[A I]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-2 Labeling Grouped Options If menu options are grouped in logical subunits, each group should have a descriptive label that is distinctive in format from the option labels themselves.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-3 Hierarchic Menus for Sequential Selection When menu selection must be made from a long list, and not all options can be displayed at once, a hierarchic sequence of menu selections should be provided rather than one long multipage menu.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-4 Consistent Design of Hierarchic Menus The display format and selection logic of hierarchic menus should be consistent at every level.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Ressan:
2.2.2 5 Labeling in Ilierarchic Menus Hierarchic menus should be organized and labeled to guide operators within the hierarchic structure.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-19 CN 2.2.2 Menu Selection l 2.2.2-6 Menu Selection by Keyed Entry When menu selection is a secondary (occasional) means of control entry, and/or only short option lists are needed, then selection by keyed entry should be provided.[AI] l OK Comment: l DLscrepancy j N/A l l
Return > Reason:
i 2.2.2-7 Explicit Option Display l When control entries for any particular transaction will be selected from a small set of options, those options should be displayed in a menu added to the working display, rather than requiring a user to remember them or to access a separate menu display.[AI]
OK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-8 Systematic Organization ofItems on Menu Bar
[ -
The categories listed across the menu bar should be organized systematically.[AI]
k _
oK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2 9 Category Labels on Menu Bar Category labels on menu bars should be centered in the vertical dimension. Horizontally, category labels on the menu bar should be separated by enough space to be distinguishable as separate items, i.e., by at least two standard character widths.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.210 IIeight of Menu Bar The height of a menu bar should be sufficient to contain standard text characters which serve as m_enu category labels, as well as space above and below the text characters.
OK Comment:
DLscrepancy
( N/A Return > Reason:
2 USERcSYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-20 2.2.2 Menu Selection 2.2.211 Consistent Display of Menu Options When menus are provided in different displays, they should be designed so that option lists are consistent in wording and ordering.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepeng N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.212 Standard Area for Code Entry When menu selection is accomplished by code entry, a standard command entry area (window) sh_ould be provided where users enter the selected code.[AI]
oK Comment: ,
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-13 Consistent Location for Menus Menus should be displayed in consistent screen locations for all modes, transactions, and !
seguences.[AI] !
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.214 Menu Options Worded as Commands ,
The wording of menu options should consistently represent commands to the computer, rather j than questions to the user.[AI] j oK Comment: !
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
)
2.2.2-15 Option Wording Consistent with Command Language If menu selection is used in conjunction with or as an alternative to command language, the j wording and syntactic organization of displayed menu options should correspond consistently to !
defined elements and structure of the command language.[AI] j oK Comment: l Discrepancy j ll N/A !
I Return > Reason:
I
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-21 C 2.2.2 Menu Selection 2.2.216 Format Consistency Where ordering cannot be determined by the above, alphabetic ordering should be used. l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
2.2.217 Consistent Coding of Menu Options Ifletter codes are used for menu selection, those letters should be consistently used in designating options from one transaction to another.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepency N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-18 Key Coded Menu Selection The code associated with each option should be displayed in a consistent and distinctive manner.[AI)
V)
(
oK Discrepancy Comment:
N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-19 Visual Representation of Path Users should be able to access a visual representation of their paths through a hierarchy of menus.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Raeson:
2.2.2-20 Minimal Steps in Sequential Menu Selection When users must step through a sequence of menus to make a selection, the hierarchic menu s_tructure should be designed to minimize the number of steps required.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
(m
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-22 2.2.2 Menu Selection 2.2.2 21 Return to Iligher-Level Menus Users should have to take only one simple key action to return to the next higher level in hierarchic menus.[AI]
OK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-22 Indicating Current Position in Menu Structure When hierarchic menus are used, the user should have some indication of current position in the m_enu structure.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-23 Distinct Subordinate Menus if hierarchical branching is used, each subordinate menu should be visually distinct from each pevious superordinate menu.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-24 Control Options Distinct from Menu Branching The display of hierarchic menus should be formatted so that options which actually accomplish control entries can be distinguished from options, which merely branch to other menu frames.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i 2.2.2-25 Consistent Entry Prompt When permanent menus are used, there should be one standard design for the input prompt that is u_ sed across all tasks.[AI]
OK Comment:
l Discrepancy Return > Reason:
l
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Voi, 2 2.2 User Input Formats {
Page 2-23 O)
I 2.2.2- Menu Selection 2.2.2-26 Permanent Menus Minimized De use of permanent menus should be minimized.[AI] I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
2.2.2-27 Activation of Pull Down and Pop-Up Menus Pull-down and pop-up menus should be activated only by a specific user action that requests the display of the menu.[Al]
1 OK Comn.ent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-28 User Requested Menus: Pull Downs and Pop Ups U_ser requested menus should be used whenever possible.[AI]
OK Comment:
! Discrepancy
%) -
N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-29 Hiding Menus After a Command is Carried Out I When a pull-down or pop-up menu item (s) has/have been selected, the menu should revert to its l hidden state as the selected command is carried out.[AI] )
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-30 Programmable Keys If menu itema are selectable via activation of programmable function keys, the arrangement of the menu list should be compatible with the arrangement of the keys to the greatest degree possible.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A n Return > Reason:
U
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2 2.2 UserInput Formats Page 2-24 2.2.2 Menu Selection 2.2.2 31 Menu Color De same color for menus should be used within the same group.
oK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2 32 Explanatory Title for Menu An explanatory title should be provided for each menu that reflects the nature of the choice to be made.[AIJ oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-33 Letter Codes for Menu Selection if menu selections are made by keyed codes, each code should be the initial letter or letters of the displayed option label, rather than assigning arbitrary letter or number codes.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-34 Complete Display of Menu Options A_ menu should be designed to display all options appropriate to any particular transaction.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-35 No Scrolling in Menus or Menu Bars A_ll menu items should be visible to the user without scrolling.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
8 l 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-25 p
2.2.2 Menu Selection l
2.2.2 36 Menu Options Dependent on Context A menu should be designed to display only those options that are actually available in the current context for a particular user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.2-37 Return to General Menu Users should have to take only one simple key action to return to the general menu at the top lev;lin hierarchic menus.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.2 38 Stacking Menu Selections Users should be able to combine a series of selections into a single " stacked" entry [AI]
[' OK Comment:
-') ~
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.2-39 Bypassing Menu Selection with Command Entry Experienced users should be able to bypass a series of menu selections and make an equivalent command entry directly.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason: 1 I
2.2.2-40 Menu Selection by Pointing When menu selection is the primary means of command entry, and especially if choices must be made from extensive lists of displayed control options, option selection by direct pointing should betprovided.iAI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-26 2.2.2 Menu Selection 2.2.2-41 Acknowledgement of Selection from Keyboard When a menu item is chosen by a keyboard entry, there should be some acknowledgement from the system that the item has been chosen.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-42 Function of Menu Should Be Evident Menus should be de.<igned so that the function of the menu is evident to the user.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Resen:
2.2.2-43 Single-Column List Format When multiple menu options are displayed in a list, each option should be displayed on a new line, ig., format the list as a single column.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A keturn > Reason:
2.2.2-44 Non-Selection of Conflicting Menu Items U_sers should not be able to select menu items that are in conflict.[ AI]
OK Comment.
Discrepacey N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-45 Non Selectable Menu Items When menu items are not selectable, they should be identified as such to the user.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER. SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-27 2.2.2 Menu Selection
, 2.2.2-46 Menus Distinct from Other Displayed Information If menu options are included in a display that is intended also for data review and/or data entry.
t_he menu options should be distinct from other displayed information.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-47 Breadth and Depth of Menu Items Menus should have a limited number of items in breadth and in depth.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
(
2.2.2-48 Dual Activation for Pointing If menu selection is accomplished by pointing, dual activation should be provided, in which the first action designates the selected option, followed by a separate second action that makes an eglicit control entry.[AI]
oK Comment:
%.d Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-49 Large Pointing Area for Option Selection If menu selection is accomplished by pointing, the acceptable area for pointing should be as large as consistently pos.sible, including at least the area of the displayed option label plus a half-character distance around that label.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2-50 liighlighting When Cursor Passes Over Item For all types of menus, menu items that are available to be selected should be highlighted whenever the cursor passes over them and the selection button is down.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy f N/A
%./
Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 22 User Input Formats Page 2-28 2.2.2 Menu Selection l 2.2.2 51 Number of Options
- Each menu option list should have 4 to 8 options.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A l Return > Reason:
2.2.2 52 Equivalent Keyboard Commands When equivalent keyboard commands are provided, they should be displayed as part of the menu option label.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2 53 ON/OFF Menu Items For menu items that can be in an "On" or "Off" state, the "On" state should be indicated by making the item perceptually distinct.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.2 54 Selection of ON/OFF Items Selection of menu items with "On" and "Off" states should change their state.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 l
2 USER-5YSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 !
22 User Input Fcrmats Page 2-29 2.2.3 Function Keys V 2.2.3-1 Function Keys for Intbrim Command Entries Function keys should be provided for interim command entries, i.e., for actions taken before the completion of a transaction.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
, Return > Reason:
2.2.3 2 Distinctive Labeling of Function Keys E_ach function key should be labeled informatively to designate the function it performs.[AI]
OK Comment:
1 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.3-3 Distinctive Location Function keys should be grouped in distinctive locations on the keyboard to facilitate their
- learning and use.[AI]
,( _
OK Comment:
jh _
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 l
2.2.3-4 Consistent Assignment of Function Keys
,' A function assigned to a particular key in a given task context should be assigned to the same key in other contexts.[AI]
OK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: ,
I 2.2.3-5 Single Key for Continuously Available Functions When a function is continuously available, its function should be assigned to a single key.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-30 2.2.3 Function Keys 2.2.3-6 Single Keying for Frequent Functions Keys controlling frequently used functions should permit single key action and should not require double (control / shift) keying.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.3-7 Consistent Functions in Different Operational Modes When a function key performs different functions in different operational modes, equivalent or similar functions should be assigned to the same key.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: ,
2.2.3-8 Logical Pairing of Double-Keyed Functions If double (control /shiff) keying is used, the functions paired on one key should be logically related.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.3-9 Consistent Logic for Double Keying If double (control / shift) keying is used, the logical relation between shifted and unshifted functions should be consistent from one key to another.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.3-10 Labeling Multifunction Keys If a key is used for more than one function, the function currently available should always be indicated to the user.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-31 2.2.3 Function Keys V 2.2.3-11 Easy Return to Base-Level Functions If the functions assigned to a set of keys change as a result of user selection, the user should be govided with an easy means to return to the initial, base-level functions.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l
, 2.2.3-12 Feedback for Function Key Activation I When function key activation does not result in any immediately observable natural response, I users should be provided with some other form of computer acknowledgment.[AI]
' l OK Comment:
_ l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 2.2.3-13 Disabling Unneeded Function Keys l When function keys are not needed for any current transaction, they should be temporarily disabled under computer control.[AI]
.O --
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A s-j Return > Reason:
i
! 2 .2.3-14 Indicating Active Function Keys If some function keys are active and some are not, the current subset of active keys should be indicated in some noticeable way, such as by brighter illumination.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.3-15 Multiple Presses of Function Key t Pressing a function key in a sequence of key presses unrelated to the function should result in a message asking the user if s(he) meant to select that function.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy p N/A
( Return > Reason:
~ __
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2,2 User Input Formats Page 2-32 2.2.4 Macros / Programmable Function Keys 2.2.41 User Definition of Macro Commands Users should be allowed to assign a single name to a defined series of entries, and then to use that named " macro" fer subsequent command entry.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.4-2 Index of Macros Users should have access to an index of their macros and programmable function keys with their respective composition of commands.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.4 3 Limiting User-Definable Macros and Programmable Keys
'Ge use of user definable macros and programmable function keys should be limited.[Af]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.4-4 Modification of Defined Macros A user should be restricted from modifying a macro or programmable function key as defined by a different originating user.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.4 5 No Duplication of Macro Names U_sers should not be allowed to duplicate macro names.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l
2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-33 2.2.5 Forms 4 p
\ 2.2.5-1 Form Filling for Command Entry Form filling should be provided as an aid for composing complex command entries.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang MA Return > Reason:
2.2.5-2 Defaults for Command Entry
[ Form filling should be used as a means of displaying default values for the parameters in complex command entries.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang NA Return > Reason:
2.2.5-3 Consistent Format for Command Forms Forms for command entry shou'i be consistent in format.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang MA Return > Reason:
2.2.5-4 Forms for Information Entry Form filling should be used for tasks where some flexibility in information entry is needed, such as t_he inclusion of optional as well as required items, and/or where computer response may be slow.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy WA Return > Reason:
2.2.5 5 Grouping Data Fields Where no source documents or forms exist to support information entry, then fields should be loJ ically grouped, by sequence and frequency of use, importance, and functional associations.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
V
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 22 User Input Formats Page 2-34 2.2.5 Forms 2.2.5 6 Combined Entry of Related Data Just one explicit entry action at the end of the transaction sequence should be required, rather th_an separate entry of each item.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy h/A Return > Reason:
2.2.5-7 Data Field Labels For each data field, an associated label should be displayed to help users understand what entries ca_n be made.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.5 8 Minimal Use of Delimiters Whenever possible, entry of multiple data items should be allowed without keying special separator or delimiter characters.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.5-9 Standard Delimiter Character When a field delimiter must be used for data entry, a standard character should be employed consistently for that purpose.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.5-10 Flexible Interrupt When multiple data items are entered as a single transaction, as in form filling, the user should be allowed to REVIEW, CANCEL, or B ACKUP and change any item before taking a final ENTER ac_ tion.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 22 UserInput Formats Page 2-35 2.2.5 Forms 2.2.5-11 Deferring Input ofInformation When entry of information in a field is deferred or omitted, the system should identify the field by highlighting or other means. Before the information is filed or accessed, the user should be re_ minded that information has not been entered.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.5-12 Use of Tabular Displays When sets of data items must be entered sequentially, in a repetitive series, a tabular display fo_rmat should be provided where data sets can be keyed row by row.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.5-13 Distinctive Label Formats Distinctive formats should be provided for column headers and row labels, so that users can distinguish them from data entries.
Nj -
OK Comment:
)
Discrepancy N/A ,
l Return > Reason:
2.2.514 Aiding Entry of Duplicated Data For entry of tabular data, when entries are frequently repeated, users should be provided with so_me easy means to copy duplicated data.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
s
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-36 2.2.5 Forms 2.2.5-15 Tabbing to Advance to Subsequent Fields Where the number of fields is limited, screen traversal distances are short, and when data fields will be accessed sequentially, users should be allowed to tab directly from one data field to the next, so that the cursor can move freely back and forth across rows or columns.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I*
2.2.5-16 Direct Pointing Devices for Selecting Fields Direct pointing devices, such as a mouse or lightpen, should be available (1) for selecting fields in complicated forms, or (2) when field entry will be less predictable (as in database update).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.5-17 Row Scanning Cues For long forms, those with many rows, some extra visual cue should be provided to help a user scan a row accurately across columns.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
l l
2 USER-SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 !
2.2 User Input Fcrmats Page 2-37
, 2.2.6 Direct Manipulation V) f 2.2.6-1 When to Use Direct Manipulation Direct manipulation should be used primarily in tasks with actions and objects that lend themselves to pictographic representation, and in which the actions and objects need not h m_odified for the successful interpretation of the command by the system.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.6-2 Pointing When user input involves frequent pointing on a display surface, the interface should be designed so that other actions (e.g., display control) are also accomplished by pointing, in order to 1 minimize shifts from one entry device to another.[AI] I OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
l 2.2.6-3 Highlighting the Selected Item I Selection of an icon, menu, or application-specific capability from a function area shy ild be acknowledged by highlighting the selected item.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.6-4 Other Features of the Direct Manipulation Interface The direct manipulation interface should include (1) windows for containing the data files. (2) menus for additional objects and actions that are not easily represented by pictographic icons.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return & Reason:
2.2.6-5 Fast Computer Response with Direct Manipulation Direct manipulation should not be used when the computer response is slow.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy Q *^
Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-38 2.2.6 Direct Manipulation 2.2.6-6 Supplementary Text Labels If icons are used to represent control actions in menus, a text label should be displayed with each ic_on to help assure that its intended meaning will be understood.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6-7 Graphic Display of Control Context Graphic means should be provided for displaying the context of current control actions to users.[All OK Co ument:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6-8 Graphic Display of Control Prompting Prompting aids and other guidance pertaining to current control actions should be displayed graphically to the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6 9 " Opening" an Icon A_ user should be able to "open" an icon with a simple, explicit action.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6-10 Size ofIcons items on the screen that are displayed for selection should be a minimum of 5 millimeters on a side and separated by at least 3 millimeters.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-39 2.2.6 Direct Manipulation
(
C)' 2.2.6-11 Text Selection Area When functions are represented by text labels, a large area for pointing should be provided, in_cluding the area of the displayed label, plus a half-character distance around the label.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6-12 Zooming for Precise Positioning When data entry requires exact placement of graphic elements, users should be allowed to request eyansion of the critical display area (" zooming") to make the positioning task easier.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.613 Selecting Graphic Elements Users should be provided some means for designating and selecting displayed graphic elements
,- for manipulation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6-14 Highlighting Selected Elements When a user has selected a displayed graphic element, that element should be highlighted in some way so that the user can anticipate the consequences of any proposed action involving that s_ election.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6-15 Displaying Current Attributes During graphic data entry / editing, the selected attributes that will affect current actions should be displayed for ready reference by the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER. SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Fcrmats Page 2-40 2.2.6 Direct Manipulation 2.2.6-16 Automatic Data Registration Automatic registration or alignment of computer-generated graphic data should be provided, so that variable data are shown properly with respect to fixed background or map data at any display s_cale.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dkcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 2.2.6-17 Automated Data Plotting When complex graphic data must be entered quickly, computer aids should be provided to automate that process.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6-18 Plotting Stored Data Automated plotting of computer-stored data should be provided at user request, with provision for subsequent editing by a user.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.619 Predefined Graphic Formats When graphic data must be plotted in predefined standard formats, templates or skeletal displays for o those formats should be provided to aid data entry.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6 20 Aids for Graph Construction When graphs must be constructed for data plotting, computer aids should be provided for that qurpose.[AI]
l oK Comment:
( Discrepancy N/A
[ Return > Reason:
I 1
I i
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-41 2.2.6 Direct Manipulation s 2.2.6 21 Aids for Scaling Computer aids should be provided to help users specify appropriate scales for graphic data entry.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.6 22 Grouping Elements Users should be allowed to designate a group of elements to which graphic editing operations will b_e applied in common.[AI]
OK Comment:
D k spancy N/A Return > Reason:
o v
2 USER-SYSTEMSINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 User Input Formats Page 2-42 2.2.7 Natural Language No guidelines are currently available in this section.
O O
l l
l
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-43 2.2.8 Query Language (h
( 2.2.8-1 Natural Organization of Data
, A_ query language should reflect a single, natural data structure or organization.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 1
Return > Reason:
l 2.2.8-2 Task-Oriented Wording The wording of a query should simply specify what data are requested.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A 6 l Return > Reason:
2.2.8-3 Flexible Query Formulation Users should be allowed to employ altemative forms when composing queries, corresponding to common alternatives in naturallanguage.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
( N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.8-4 Minimal Need for Quantifiers A_ query language should minimize the need for quantifiers in query formulation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.8-5 Logic to Link Queries A query language should include logic elements that permit users to link sequential queries as a s_ ingle entry.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy t i Retus'n > Reason: I l
tw/ I
2 USERoSYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 22 User Input Formats Page 2-44 2.2.8 Query Language 2.2.8-6 Confirming Large-Scale Retrieval If a query will result in a large-scale data retrieval, the user should be informed and required to co_nfirm the transaction or to narrow the query before processing.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
a 6
O
.- -= _ _ . . - . .. . . . -- . . . . . _ .
2 USER-SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-45 ,
2.2.9 Question and Answer 2.2.9-1 Request for Information The system should provide the user with a specific request for information.
OK Comment:
i Discrepancy '
N/A Return > Reason.
1 1
2.2.9-2 Questions Displayed Singly Each question should be displayed separately.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.9-3 Stacking Related Questions The system should be able to stack questions and their associated answers if a series of questions
, are concerned with the same topic.
OK Comment:
i !
[] >
Discrepancy
' \
q) N/A Return > Reason:
2.2.9-4 Contextual Information Should Be Supplied
- The system should provide the user with contextual information required for answering the question.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reasos:
. 2.2.9-5 Unlimited Room for Answers :
T_he system should accept as much information from the user as s(he) provides in an answer.[AI]
l OK Comment:
, Discrepancy 4
+
Return > Reason:
(
l I
i I U
1 l
1
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2c2 User Input Formats Page 2-46 2.2.9 Question and Answer 2.2.9-6 Recapitulating Prior Answers When a series of computer-posed question are interrelated, answers to previous questions should b_e displayed when those will provide context to help a user answer the current question.[ AI]
UK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.9-7 Removing and Recalling Questions The user should have the ability to remove a question and answer from the screen or recall a question and answer to the screen.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.9-8 Sequence Compatible with Source Documents When questions prompt entry of data from a source document, the question sequence should match the data sequence in the source document.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.9 9 Question Mark Delimiter A_ question mark should be the delimiter of the question and answer dialogue.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
O
4 l 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-47 2.2.10 Speech v 2.2.10-1 Speech Input Spoken input should be used only when entry cannot be accomplished through more reliable methods such as keyed entry or pointing.[AI]
oK Comment:
DLscrepancy NA Return > Reason:
2.2.10-2 Limited Vocabulary for Speech Input The vocabulary used for spoken input should be constructed so that only a few options are needed for any transaction.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
2.2.10-3 Feedback and Error Correction for Speech Ir.put Feedback and simple error correction procedures should be provided for speech input, so that when a spoken entry has not been correctly recognized by the computer, the user can cancel that
> entry and speak again.[AI]
oK Comment:
DLscrepancy WA Return > Reason:
2.2.10-4 Alternative Entries for Speech Input When speech input is the only form of input available, altematives forms for critical entries should be allowed, so that if the system cannot recognize an entry after repeated attempts, another entry form can be substituted.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
C \
l 1
l
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-48 2.2.10 Speech 2.2.10-5 Activation and Deactivation Speech recognition systems should have an extemal, non-speech means of activation and deactivation (e.g., PAUSE and CONTINUE options) so that conversation between users is not taken as command input.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang NA Return > Reason:
2.2.10-6 Vocabulary Itents The vocabulary items should (1) consist of words that are meaningful and familiar to the user, (2) b_e phonetically distinct from one another; and (3) consist of 2-5 syllables.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.10-7 Vocabulary Sets Application vocabularies should be divided into sets based on the hierarchy of the application and recognition accuracy requirements.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.2.10-8 Testing the Recognition ofIndividual Vocabulary Items The user should be able to test the recognition of any individual vocabulary item without the entire interactive system being on-line. Feedback on the word recognized and the corresponding confidence score should be available immediately after each use of a word.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy I MA Return > Reason:
l O1
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.2 User Input Formats Page 2-49 2.2.10 Speech l (V,,h 2.2.10-9 User-Adjustable Features l I
When the consequences of errors are not significant, the speech amplitude and rejection levels rguired for input should be user-adjustable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason: j i
j 2.2.10-10 Word Boundanes l Where word boundaries (pauses between words) are required for system interpretation, b_oundaries of 100 milliseconds or more should be allowed by the system.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA j Return > Reason:
. 2.2.10-11 Confidence Rating l An indication of the similarity of each spoken command to the recorded template should be !
g available to the user.
OK Comment: l
~
Discrepancy j NA Return > Reason:
2.2.10-12 Speaker-Dependent Voice Recognizer if an application functions with a speaker-dependent voice recognizer, the user should be able to retrain or update any or all vocabulary templates at any time.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
V
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-50 2.3.1 Appearance 23.1-1 Distinctive Cursor C_ursors should have distinctive visual features (shape, blink, or other means of highlighting).[AI)
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.1-2 Display of Cursor De cursor should not move beyond the display boundaries or disappear from sight.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reawn:
2.3.13 Non Distracting Design The cursor should not be so distracting as to impair the searching of the display for information u_nrelated to the cursor.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.3.1-4 Stable Cursor De displayed cursor should be stable.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.3.1-5 Initial Cursor Placement On the initial appearance of a data entry display, the cursor should appear automatically at some consistent and useful location.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-51
, 2.3.1 Appearance
! 23.1-6 Consistent HOME Position When there is a predefined HOME position for the cursor, that position should be consistently defined on all displays of a given type.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- 23.1-7 Automatic Return of Cursor
) When the user must repeatedly return the cursor to the origin or other specific screen location, 4
automatic return or repositioning of the cursor should be provided.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy 2
N/A Return > Reason:
i 4
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-52 23.2 Controls 23.2-1 Cursor Control- General The user should be able to adjust the sensitivity of the cursor movement to be compatible with the reSuired task and user skills.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
23.2-2 Compatible Control of Cursor Movement Control actions for cursor positioning should be compatible with movements of the displayed cursor, in terms of control function and labeling.[AIJ OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.3.2 3 Easy Cursor Positioning Users should be provided with an easy, accurate means of positioning a displayed cursor to point at_different display elements and/or display locations.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA l
Return > Reason:
23.2-4 Consistent Positioning Where cursor positioning is incremental by discrete steps, the step size of cursor movement should be consistent horizontally (i.e., in both right and left directions), and vertically (in both up l and down directions).
l OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
23.2-5 Cursor Control Key Functions At the minimum, keys for cursor control should allow horizontal and vertical cursor m_ovement.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
, . . -. . .-.. ..- . - _ _ . . - - - - _ . . = _ _ _ _ _ . - . - .
1' 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-53 23.2 Controls l 23.2-6 Cursor Control at Keyboard When position designation is required in a task emphasizing keyed data entry, cursor control should be provided by some device integral to the keyboard (function keys, joystick, and t_rackball).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.2-7 Location of Cursor Control Keys if cursor movement is accomplished by depressing keys, the keys should be located on the main keyboard.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
Om I
l 1
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-54 2.33 Movement 23.3-1 Cursor Movement if the cursor is moved by depressing a key, releasing the ke" should cause the cursor to stop m_oving.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.33-2 Responsive Cursor Control For arbitrary position designation, moving a cursor from one position to another, the cursor control should permit both fast movement and accurate placement.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.3-3 Precise Pointing When fine accuracy of positioning is required, as in some forms of graphic interaction, the displayed cursor should include a point designation feature.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A '
Return > Reason:
23.3-4 Selectable Rate Aiding De user should be able to turn rate aiding of the cursor movement on or off.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.3.3-5 User Selectable Speed j Users should be able to select at least two speeds (normal and fast) for the movemen; of the cursor when the keys for cursor control are held down.
OK Comment: j t
Discrepancy N/A t Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rey,1, Vol. 2 2.3 Cursors Page 2-55 23.3 Movement n
233-6 Variable Step Sizt When character size is variable, the incremental cursor positioning should vary correspondingly, with a step size matching the size of currently selected characters.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
233-7 Easy Cursor Movement to Data Fields if a cursor must be positioned sequentially in predefined areas, such as displayed data entry fields, this should be accomplished by simple user action.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
! Return > Reason:
233-8 Explicit Activation Users should be required to take a separate, explicit action, distinct from cursor positioning, for
, t_he actual entry (enabling, activation) of a designated function.[AI]
OK Comment:
f)
~
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.3-9 Display Format Protection i When there are areas of a display in which data entries cannot be made (such as blank spaces or protected field labels), those areas should be insensitive to pointing actions and the cursor should b_e prevented from entering those areas.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.3.3-10 Free Cursor Movement For text editing, users should be allowed to move the cursor freely over a displayed page of text to_specify items for change, and to make changes directly to the text.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-56 233 Movement 23311 ProportionalSpacing If proportional spacing is used for displayed text, computer logic should make necessary agustments automatically when the cursor is being positioned for data entry or data change.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
233-12 Cursor Movement by Units of Text Users should be able to move the cursor by specific units of text, as well as one character at a time.[AI]
oK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
233-13 Data Entry Independent of Cursor Placement An ENTER action for multiple data items should result in entry of all items, regardless of where t_he cursor is placed on the display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l I
O
l 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-57 23.4 Multiple Cursors l 2.3.41 Minimal Use of Multiple Cursors Multiple cursors on a single display should be used only when it can be demonstrated that they are reguired by the task.[AI]
oK Comment:
l DiscrePasq N/A Retura > Reason:
23.4 2 Multi Monitor / Multi Controller Cursor Characteristics In a multitasking environment with multiple monitors, controllers, or cursors, the location of the ac_tive cursor should be obvious to the user.[AI]
oK Coeucent:
Descrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.3.4 3 Distinctive Multiple Cursors if multiple cursors are used, they should be visually distinctive from one another.
oK Comment:
! I Discrepaan N/A keturn > Reason:
23.4-4 Compatible Control of Multiple Cursors If multiple cursors are controlled by different devir%, meir separate controls should be compatible in operation.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
23.4 5 Distinctive Control of Multiple Cursors If multiple cursors are controlled by a single device, a clear signal should be provided to the user to_ indicate which cursor is currently under control.
oK Comment:
- Discrepancy l N/A ps Return > Reason
I d ,
h 2 USER-SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-58 2.3.4 Multiple Cursors 23.4-6 Multiple Pointing Cursor Control Devices When there are multiple cursor control / pointing devices, a unique pointing cursor shape should be associated with each device.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.4 7 Unique Shapes .
C_ursors of different shapes should be used for different purposes.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O i
)
1 i
O
(_ _ _ _ _ - _
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-59 2.3.5 Pointing Cursors O
h 23.5-1 Pointing Cursor Visibility The pointing cursor should be visible to the user at all times and may obscure characters unless it l
interferes with performance within an application.[AI) 1 oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A i
Return > Reason:
1 I
23.5-2 Pointing Cursor Blink The pointing cursor should not blink.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.5-3 Pointing Cursor: Image Quality
- Pointing cursors should maintain image quality throughout an entire range of motion within the display. The position of the pointing cursor should be clearly visible during movement from one s_creen position to another. Flicker should be minimized.
(g oK Comment:
y Dhcrepancy 3 N/A Return > Reason:
2.3.5-4 Pointing Cursor Design To the greatest degree possible, pointing cursors should be completely graphic and should not co_ntain a label.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason: '
23.5 5 Pointing Cursor: Size Constancy T_tte pointing cursor should maintain its size across all screen and display locations.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
1 l
l I
1
2 USERaSYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2J Cursors Page 2-60 23.5 Pointing Cursors 23.5 6 Pointing Cursor: Movement The movement of the pointing cursor should appear to the user to be smooth and continuous, i
with smooth and continuous movement of the cursor control device. The pointing cursor should l n_ot move in the absence of any input from the user. I OK Comment:
Diwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
l i
i I
a 4
- 9 l
l 1
1 l
O
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Cursors Page 2-61
,. 23.6 Text Entry Cursors (3\
V 23.61 Text Entry Cursor Visibility The text entry cursor should only be visible when text entry is possible.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.6-2 Identification of Text Entry Cursor At the initiation of a task, an application, or a new display, the user should be able to immediately determine the location of the text entry cursor. Following the initial placement of the text entry c_ursor, the position of the cursor should be under the user's control.[AI]
oK Comme. :
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.6-3 Text Entry Cursor Blink If text entry cursor blinking is to be used to direct the user's attention, the default blink rate should b_e 3 Hz.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.6-4 Nonobscuring Text Entry Cursor The placeholding cursor should not obscure any other character displayed in the position designated by the cursor.[AI] -
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
23.6 5 Number of Text Entry Cursors There should be only one text entry cursor per window.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
k 1
! 2 USERoSYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.3 Cursors Page 2-62 2.3.6 Text Entry Cursors 2.3.6 6 Text Entry Cursor Size The text entry cursor should assume the height and/or width of the text characters adjacent to it.
oK Commcat:
I Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O 1
1 l
I l
O
l 2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-63 2.4.1 General
{
(s# 2.4.1-1 Standard Display Location System messages should appear in standard locations.[AI] j
+
OK Comment:
Discrepancy I N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.1-2 Consistent Format for System Messages 1
C_onsistent grammatical construction should be used in system messages.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.13 Familiar Wording System messages should use familiar terminology.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
[]
\
Return > Reason:
2.4.1-4 Concise Wording of System Messages System messages should be concise and clearly worded.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.15 Speaking Directly to Operators Wording for system messages should be directed at the operator.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: i l
V i
1 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol, 2 2.4 Syst;m Response Page 2-64 2.4.1 General 2.4.16 Only Necessary Information Displayed N_o extraneous information should be displayed.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.1-7 Anthropomorphism P_ resenting the system as a person should be avoided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
l I
O i
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-65
- 2.4.2 Prompts 2.4.2-1 Prompting User Entries Operators should be provided with clear and specific information to guide entries during L_OG-ON/OFF or command or information entry.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reamn:
2.4.2-2 Prompting Address Entry When an operator must specify the address for a message, prompting should be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
Descrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.2-3 Standard Symbol for Prompting Entry S_tandard symbols should be used for input prompting.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A j Return > Reason:
2.4.2-4 Prompting Command Correction When a command entry is not recognized or inappropriate, operators should be prompted to 4 correct, rather than re-enter the command.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.2-5 Prompting Field Length C_ues should be provided to indicate the size of a fixed-length data entry field.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
t
I 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 2.4 System Response Page 2-66 2.4.2 Prompts 2.4.2-6 Data Format Cuing in Labels A_dditional cuing of data format should be included in a field label when that seems helpful.[ AI] l OK Comment: j Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.2-7 Operator-Requested Prompts Operators should be able to request computer generated prompts to determine required parameters or available options for a command.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.2-8 Prompting Data Entry P_iompting should be provided for required formats and acceptable values for data entries.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.2-9 Graphic Display of Control Prompting Graphic means may be provided for displaying to operators prompting aids and other guidance pertaining to current control actions.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
l l
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1
~
2.4 System Response Page 2-67 I 2.4.3 Feedback 2.4.3-1 Feedback During Data Entry Feedback should be displayed for all user actions during data entry; keyed entries should be di_ splayed stroke by stroke.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
, Return > Reason:
2.4.3 2 Feedback for Completion of Data Entry The computer should acknowledge completion of a data entry transaction with a confirmation .
j message if data entry was successful, or else with an error message.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.3-3 Feedback for Repetitive Data Entries
. For a repetitive data entry task that is accomplished as a continuing series of transactions, successful entry should be indicated by regenerating the data entry display, automatically removing thejust-entered data in preparation for the next entry.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 I
1 J
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-68 2.4.4 Advisory Messages 2.4.4-1 Distinctive and Consistent Advisory Messages A_dvisory messages should be distinctive.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.4-2 Redundant Display I_mportant information should be presented through both visual and auditory means.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.4-3 Informing Operators of Potential Data Loss P_rotection against data loss should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.4-4 Time-Consuming Processes U_sers should be informed when a command will be time-consuming to process.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 1
Return > Reason:
O
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-69
-2.4.5 Error Messages l
(
( 2.4.51 Informative Error Messages When the computer detects an entry error, an error message should be displayed stating the error and possible subsequent operations.[AI]
I oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.4.5-2 Task-Oriented Error Messages '
Wording for error messages should be appropriate to the task.[AI]
4 oK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A 4
Return > Reason:
i 2.4.5-3 Neutral Wording for Error Messages
- E_rror messages should use neutral wording.[AI]
oK Comment:
j] Discrepancy
\, N/A Return > Reason:
1 2.4.5 4 Non-Disruptive Error Messages Be computer should display an error message only after completion of an entry.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.5-5 Invalid Action Where an entry is invalid or inoperative at the time of selection, no action should result except a l display of an advisory message indicating the error and the appropriate functions, options, or commands.[AI] 1 oK Comment: l l
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-70 2.4.5 Error Messages 2.4.5-6 Advisory Error Messages Where data or control entry is made from a small set of alternatives, error messages should in.dicate the correct alternatives.
oK Comment:
Discrep.mcy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.5-7 Displaying Erroneous Entries When an entry error has been detected, the erroneous entry should remain displayed until the error has been corrected.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.5-8 Cursor Placement Following Error In addition to providing an error message, the location of a detected error should be marked by asitioning the cursor at that point on the display, i.e., at that data field or command word.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.5-9 Indicating Repeated Errors If_a operator repeats an error, a noticeable change should exist in the displayed error message.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I 2.4.5-10 Errors in Stacked Commands If an error is detected in a group of entries, the system should process correct commands until the e_rror is displayed.
oK Com.nent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I 1
1
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2A System Response Page 2-71 2.4.5 Error Messages
/
V) 2.4.5-11 Multilevel Error Messages Following the output of a simple error message, operators should be able to request a more detailed explanation of the error.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 2.4.5-12 Cautionar3 Messages When a data or command entry error is suspected but cannot be determined (in terms of system e_rror logic), a cautionary message asking for confirmation should be displayed.[AI]
5- OK Comment:
4 --
4 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i j 2.4.5-13 Multiple Error Messages N_otification should be made for each error when multiple errors are detected.[AI]
i -
oK Comment:
\ Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.5-14 Error Message Placement Error messages should be presented at the point of the error or in a consistent area of the display.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.515 Documenting Error Messages As a supplement to on-line guidance, system documentation should include a listing and eylanation of all error messages.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 Syst:m Response Page 2-72 2.4.6 User Guidance / Help 2.4.6-1 On Line Guidance Reference material describing system capabilities, procedures, and commands and abbreviations, sh_ould be available on-line.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.6-2 Access to Guidance Explicit actions should be required to access or suppress user guidance.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.6-3 IIELP Request At any point in an interaction, users should be able to access on-line user guidance by means of a simple action that is consistent throughout the interface.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.6-4 IIELP Guidance A_dvisory messages or prompts should be available to guide users in accessing help messages.[AI]
OK Comment: i l
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.6-5 Synonyms for Standard Terminology l Vfien a user requests HELP on a topic, the computer should accept synonyms and abbreviations.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-73
, ,, 2.4.6 User Guidance / Help 2.4.6-6 Context-Sensitive HELP The information presented in response to a HELP request should be tailored to the task context.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
- N/A Return > Reason
2.4.6-7 Clarifying HELP Requests When a request for HELP is ambiguous in context, the computer should initiate a dialogue to specify what data, message, or command requires explanation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.6-8 Automatic HELP
- When appropriate, HELP should be automatically provided.[AI]
,o OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A I Return > Reason:
2.4.6-9 Multilevel HELP When a HELP display provides summary information, more detailed explanations should be available.
OK Comment:
1 Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reewn:
2.4.6-10 Browsing HELP U_sers should be able to browse on-line HELP.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
[
\
1 l
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 !
)
2.4 System Response Page 2-74 2.4.6 User Guidance / Help 2.4.611 Return from HELP The user should be able to easily return to the task after accessing HELP.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.6-12 Hardcopy Procedures A complete hardcopy set of computer system operating procedures and contingency procedures should be available in the control room.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.6-13 Computer System Procedures P_rocedures should be prepared from the point of view of the control room operator.
l oK Comment:
I Discrepancy N/A
( Return > Reason:
2.4.6-14 Display Indices Cross-indices of the available data displays should be available in the control room in hardcopy fo_rm.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O-
I 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-75 2.4.7 System Response Time l
C 2.4.7-1 Appropriate Computer Response Time I
l The speed of computer response to user entries should be appropriate to the transaction l
involved.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA !
Return > Reason:
2.4.7-2 Display Average System Response Time Average system response time, if affected by the number of on-line users, should be displayed at time of LOG-ON.[AI]
oK Comment:
. Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
1 2.4.7-3 Response Time Consistent with Requirements System response times should be consistent with operational requirements.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA
- Return > Reason
2.4.7-4 Processing Delay Where system overload or other system conditions will result in a processing delay, the system should acknowledge the data entry and provide an indication of the delay to the user.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.4.7-5 Indicating Completion of Processing When processing in response to a control entry is lengthy, the user should be given a positive i_ndication of subsequent completion time and appropriate related information.[AI]
oK Comment:
~
l Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
N. ,
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.4 System Response Page 2-76 2.4.7 System Response Time 2.4.7-6 Response Time Induced Keyboard Lockout If computer processing time requires delay of concurrent user inputs and no keyboard buffer is available, keyboard lockout should occur until the computer can accept the next transaction. An alert should be displayed to indicate to the user that lockout has occurred.
oK Comment:
Discrepancv N/A 3
Return > Reason:
2.4.7-7 Keyboard Restoration A signal should be presented when the computer is ready to continue following response time-induced keyboard lockout.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.4.7-8 Variability of Response Time R_esponse time deviations should not exceed more than half the mean response time.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A j Return > Reason:
2.4.7-9 Maximum System Response Times Maximum system response times for real-time systems should not exceed the values presented in Table 2.4.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
\ ..
www 1 A*a 4 reO f Table 2.4 Maximum and preferred system response times . $2 $ -I Response Time (sec)
'I)3*.
E 4 .!
l User Activity Maximum 0.10 Preferred
<0.10 8 ){[ Q !
Control Activation (for example, keyboard entry, cursor controller movement) 3g.
System Activation (system initialization) 3.0 - < 0.50 -d m m t Request for given service: Simple 2.0 <0.25 5 >-
Complex 5.0 < 2.0 h l Loading and Restart 15-60.0 < 6.0 o i 2
Error Feedback (following completion of input) 2.0 - <0.25 Response to I.D. 2.0 <0.25 Information on next procedure < 5.0 < 2.0 Response to simpleinquiry from list 2.0 < 0.25 Response to simple status inquiry 2.0 <0.25 Response to complex inquiry in table form 2-4.0 < 0.25 Request for next page 0.5-1.0 < 0.25 Response to " execute problem" < 15.0 ' < 6.0 Light pen entries 1.0 < 0.25 !
Z l Drawings with light pens 0.1 <0.10 c ;
p i Response to complex inquiry in graphic form 2-10.0 < 0.25 m t O
Response to dynamic modeling - ---
6 i
-a i Response to graphic manipulation 2.0 < 0.25 g Response to user intervention in automatic process 4.0 < l.50 'n !
E i
?-a< .
uo 1 y ."
4N
- _ _ _ _ = _ _ - _ _ . _ _ - _ _ _ - - _ - - _ _ _ _
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M:n:ging Displays Page 2-78 2.5.1 Display Selection and Navigation 2.5.1 1 Information for Navigating The user interface should provide users with information and actions needed to navigate the interface.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.1-2 Navigation Among Displays U_sers should be able to easily move among displays.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.1-3 Sequential Steps on Multipage Displays When actions on a new display in a sequence require completion of actions on a previous display, the user should be able to move to the new display only when all of the conditions have been met or when an intentional override procedure has been confirmed.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.1-4 Navigation Messages A message should be available that provides explicit information to the user on how to move from one frame to another or how to select a different display.
OK Comment:
D,1crepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION ~ NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4
2.5 Man:ging Displays Page 2-79 n 2.5.2 Display Control l
( 2.5.2-1 Display Control Users should be able to specify the information to be displayed and select the format in which it is
- gesented.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 4
Return > Reason:
2.5.2-2 Display of Control Options Screen control locations and control options should be clearly and appropriately indicated.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
- Return > Reason
- 2.5.2-3 Information Displayed as Available Information that the user must manipulate should be displayed as it becomes available.
2 oK Comment:
mscrepancy Return > Reason:
J J
2.5.2-4 Zooming for Display Expansion The user should be provided with a zooming capability that allows the user to expand the display i of any selected area.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
! 2.5.2-5 Functional Labeling for Display Framing Display framing should be described (e.g., in user instructions and key labels) in functional terms, and wording that implies spatial orientation should be avoided.[AI]
oK Comment:
3 Discrepancy N/A 4
Return > Reason:
O
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2J5 htnrging Dispirys Page 2-80 2.5.2 Display Control 2.5.2 6 Easy Paging When requested data exceeds the capacity of a single display frame, users should be given some easy means to move back and forth over displayed material by paging or panning / scrolling.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.2-7 Show Changing Scale When a display is expanded from its normal coverage, a scale indicator of the expansion factor should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.2 8 Show Overview Position of Visible Section When a display is panned and/or expanded from its normal coverage, some graphic indicator of t_he position in the overall display of the currently visible section should be provided.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.2-9 Return to Normal Display Coverage If a user is allowed to pan over an extended display, or zoom for display expansion, an easy m_eans for the user to return to normal display coverage should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
9'
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 23 Man:ging Displ:ys Page 2-81 2.5.3 Display Update / Freeze I
(,,- '2.5.31 Automatic Display Update Users should be able to request automatic update (computer regeneration) of changed data, and sh_ould be able to control the update rate.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.5.3-2 Readability of Changing Data Changing data values that must be read should be displayed in a fixed position and updated no more than once per second. If users need only to monitor general trends in changing data values, and do not need to take exact readings, faster update rates may be acceptable.
OK Comment:
D!acrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.3-3 VisualIntegration of Changing Graphics g)
(
When a user must visually integrate changing pattems on a graphic display, the data should be updated at a rate appropriate to human perceptual abilities for that kind of data change.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.3-4 Refresh Rate for Free drawn Graphics For free-drawn graphics, the refresh rate on the monitor should be high enough to produce the appearance of a continuous track.'
OK Comm-nt:
Descrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.3 5 Display Freeze The user should be able to " freeze" automatically updated data at any point. This is necessary in order for the user to examine changed data more deliberately.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A
%/
Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTIOS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M:naging Dispirys Page 2-82 2.5.3 Display Update / Freeze ,
2.5.3-6 Labeling Display Freeze When a display is " frozen," the display should be appropriately labeled to remind users ofits
" frozen" status.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.3-7 Signaling Changes to Frozen Data When a display being updated in real-time has been frozen, the user should be advised if some significant, but not displayed, change should be detected in the computer processing of new data.
oK Comment:
DL9erepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.3-8 Resuming Update After Display Freeze When the user elects to resume update after a display being updated in real time has been frozen, t_he resumed display update should be positioned at the current real-time point.[Af]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I O
l l
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M:nrging displays Page 2-83 g 2.5.4 Display Suppression
' (
2.5.4-1 Temporary Suppression of Displayed Data
) De user should be able to temporarily suppress standard data displays.
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy j MA Return > Reason:
) 2.5.4 2 Labeling Display Suppression A data display that has been suppressed should be annotated with an appropriate label to remind users that data have been suppressed.
4 OK Comment: '
Discrepancy
- ^
- Return > Reason
2.5.4-3 Signaling Changes to Suppressed Data Users should be advised if some significant (but not displayed) change is detected in the computer gocessing of new data when data have been suppressed from a display.
- ~
}/ q oK Comment:
Dberepancy l NA Return > Reason:
2.5.4-4 Resuming Display of Suppressed Data
. Data that has been suppressed from a display should be able to be quickly restored to its '
complete, originally generated form.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
WA Return > Reason:
9 2.5.4 5 Dedicated Function Key Function keys used to restore suppressed data should have no other use.[AI]
, OK Comment:
Dkerepancy MA Return > Reason:
. V
l 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NU '
(), Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M:naging Dispirys Page 2-84 2.5.5 Scrolling and Paging 2.5.5-1 Continuous Text Data Pf ngi and windowing should not used when searching through continuous text data.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-2 Consistent Orientation A_ consistent orientation for display framing should be used.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-3 Panning with Free Cursor Movement In applications where a user moves a cursor freely about a page of displayed data, panning should b_e adopted rather than scrolling as the conceptual basis of display framing.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-4 Framing Consistently for All Data Framing functions should be performed consistently so that panning and/or zooming affect all displayed data in the same way.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-5 Paging Controls Users should be allowed to move easily from one page to another for displays which are partitioned into separately displayable pages.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 Man:ging Displays Page 2-85
, 2.5.5 Scrolling and Paging 2.5.5-6 HorizontalScrolling The user should have the ability to shift the text information shown when the user cannot view all off the characias in the horizontal line.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Re eson:
2.5.5-7 AppropriataScrolling/PagingStructures Structures for horizontal scrolling / paging shou'd appear only on displays for which horizontal movement is appror,riate. Similarly, structures for vertical scrolling / paging should appear only on displays for which vertical movement is applicable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-8 Common Display Structure
,e Djsplay structure used for scrolling and paging should be common to all files.
( _
OK Descrepancy Comment:
N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-9 Scrolling / Pas;ingTechniques U_sers should have the ability to scroll or page using several different techniques.[AI]
OK Como. at:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-10 One Structure for Vertical, One for Horizontal Movement Only one scrolling / paging structure should be used for vertical movament in a display and one for horizontal movement in a display.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
2 USER SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M:n:ging Displays Page 2-86 2.5.5 Scrolling and Paging 2.5.5-11 Labeling Scrolling Function The function of the scrolling / paging structure should be clearly indicated by either a textual or graphic label.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/a Return > Reason:
2.5.5-12 Evident Direction of Paging The direction that a user must page (toward the top or bottom, left or right) should be evident to the user before s(he) begins to page.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-13 Paging in One or Multiple Page Increments Users should be able to page in one page or multiple page increments.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.5-14 Discrete Paging When moving over multiple pages, the movement should be discrete with no display of intermediate pages between the starting page and the selected page.
oK Comment:
Deepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.5.515 Indicate Absolute and Relative Positions of User Scrolling / paging structures should indicate both the absolute and relative positions of the user in l
the data file.[ AI]
l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l
(_ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1 Vol. 2 2.5 Mrniging Disp 12ys Page 2-87 2.5.5 Scrolling and Paging Q 2.5.5-16 Graphic Indication of Scroll Position Large display outputs which are viewed by continuous panning / scrolling should be provided with l
afraphic indicator inset at the margin of the display frame to indicate current location. l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A I
Return > Reason:
2.5.5-17 Scroll by Line or Display Unit The scroll motion rate should allow the user to scroll by line or by display unit.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepsexy
}
, Return > Reason:
2.5.5-18 Display Window R_OLL and SCROLL commands should refer to the display window, not the text / data.[AI]
- UK Comment
f _
Discrepancy k N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.519 Parameters Refer to Data not Window The parameters of roll / scroll functions should refer to the data being inspected, not to the window.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
[
\
x l
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M:n:ging Dispirys Page 2-88 2.5.6 Windows 2.5.61 Window Identification Windows should be identified by a label consistently located at the top of the window's border.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-2 Window Selection and Display U_sers should be able to select separate data windows that will share a single display screen.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-3 Displaying Multiple WNdows When multiple windows are open r.imultaneously, the user should have the capability to er.sily tile, layer, or sequentially view the windows.[AI]
OK Coniment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-4 Managing Open Windows The system should keep track of the windows that are open (but not necessarily active or displayed), and provide a means of displaying the list of open windows to the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-5 Window Demarcation Windows should be visually separated from each other and from their background, preferably by borders or similar demarcation.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return >
O Reason:
1 I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 Man:ging Dispirys Page 2-89 2.5.6 Windows Q) 2.5.6-6 Distinction Between Window Types Window types should be perceptually distinct.[AI]
oK Comment:
D6screpancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-7 Active Windows Priority U_nder normal operating conditions, active windows should be frontmost on the display.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-8 Caution and Warning Window Priority Caution and waming windows should be frontmost on the display.
oK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-9 Default Window Size The size and shape of the initial presentation of a window should be consistent with its contents (amount ofinformation, number of menus, and data fields).[Af]
l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.610 Minimum Height for Text Windows He default height for text windows and windows used for scanning data should be at least four lines ofinformation.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
/
i
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 Man:ging Dispirys Page 2-90 2.5.6 Windows 2.5.611 Minimum Width for Text Windows The default width for a generic text window should enable 50 to 80 characters to be di_ splayed.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-12 Consistent Window Control User control of windows should operate consistently from one display to another for each type of window.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-13 Window Control Functions As appropriate to the user task, windows should be capable of the following operations:
scrolling / panning, resizing, moving, hiding, activating, deactivating, copying to/from, zooming i_n/out, tabbing, and undo-last.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-14 Consistent Control Within Windows When control actions such as command entry may be taken by a user working within a window, th_ose control actions should be consistent from one window to another.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.615 Window Opening Methods T_l1e user should be able to open a window by performing any of a set of simple actions.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M:niging Displiys Page 2-91 2.5.6 Windows 2.5.6-16 Closing Windows U_sers should be able to close a window with a single action.
oK Comenent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-17 Easy Shifting Among Windows If several windows are open, several easy means should be provided for a user to shift among t_ hem.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-18 Activating a Previously Opened Window The user should be able to put a window in the interactive state by performing any of a set of simple actions in that window or related to that window.[AI]
m oK Comment:
N Discrepancy s _
N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.619 Activation of Window Cursor The action that puts a window into the interactive state should automatically position the placeholding cursor in that window so that the user can provide inputs through that window.
oK Comewat:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-20 Multi-Modal Window Designation if windows are capable of different modes, the system should provide immediate and unambiguous feedback concerning which mode is active.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
L
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 M^n:ging Displays Page 2-92 2.5.6 Windows 2.5.6 21 Movable Windows Window movement capability should be provided such that the user can move windows to different areas of the display.
oK Comment:
~
I Discrepancy '
N/A l Return > Reason:
2.5.6-22 Window Position It should not be possible to position windows in such a way that menu bars, access to the command area, or caution and warning messages are obscured.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.5.6-23 Smooth Window Movement )
M_ovement of a window should appear to be smooth and continuous to the user. j oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.5.6-24 Indicate Active Window If several windows are displayed at once, the window (s) in which action can be taken should be indicated.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
2.5.6-25 Update of Hidden Windows A_ window that is not displayed should be capable of receiving information from the system.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 Managing Dispirys Page 2-93 2.5.6 Windows k 2.5.6-26 Alerting User to Information Availability The system should alert the user to critical information that becomes available in an inactive or non-displayed window.
OK Comment:
Discrepany MA Return > Reason:
2.5.6-27 Window Activates Upon Opening T_he action that opens a window should automatically make that window active.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.5.6-28 Varying Window Size Users should be able to change the horizontal and vertical dimensions of a window independently or together.
p _
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
/ _
NA Return > Reason:
2.5.6-29 Accessibility to Partially Removed Windows Windows partially moved off the display should be made readily accessible with a single action.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
2.5.6-30 Scrollable Windows The user should have the ability to scroll through the contents of a window both horizontally and vertically.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Retura > Reason:
m
, 2 USER-SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.5 htnsging Displays Page 2-94 2.5.6 Windows 2.5.6-31 User Control of Automatic Update A_utomatically updated windows should have display freeze capability.[AI]
i OK Comment:
Discrepancy 7
N/A Return > Reason:
)
i i
l l
Ol 4
O
I 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 16 M:nigingInformation Page 2-95 2.6.1 Editing Documents V 2.6.1-1 Natural Units of Text Users should be allowed to specify segments of text in whatever units are natural for entry / editing.[AI]
OK Comment:
_ )
DLwrepancy N/A '
Return > Reason:
2.6.1-2 Text Displayed as Printed U_sers should be allowed to display text exactly as it will be printed.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-3 Format Control by User Easy means should be provided for users to specify required format control features (e.g., margin and tab settings) during text entry / editing.[AI]
OK Comment:
5 /
9 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.14 Establishing Predefined Formats When text formats must follow predefined standards, the standard format should be provided automatically and not rely on users to remember and specify proper formats.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-5 Storing User-Defined Formats When text formats cannot be predicted in advance, users should be able to specify and ston: for future use the formats that might be needed for particular applications.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
YO l l
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2 6 M:n:gingInformation Page 2-96 2.6.1 Editing Documents 2.6.1-6 Consistent Word Spacing Unless otherwise specified by the user, entered text should be left-justified to maintain constant spacing between words, leaving right margins ragged if that is the result.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
i l
2.6.1-7 Ilyphenation by Users In the entry / editing of text, automatic pagination and line breaks by the computer should keep words intact, and hyphenation should only be introduced where specified by users.[ AIJ OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.18 Changing Physical Characteristics of Text T_he user should have the ability to change the physical characteristics of text.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-9 Tabs A tab function should be available for paragraph indentation and for moving the cursor to a preselected location.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-10 Tab Controls For editing programs or tabular data, cursor tab controls or other provisions for establishing and m_oving readily from field to field should be provided.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
a 2 _ USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.-1, Vol. 2 2s6 ManagingInfcrmation Page 2-97 l s l 2.6.1 Editing Documents i
j -
2.6.1 11 Margins T_he user should have the ability to change margins for a text file.[AI]
l
,oK Comment:
Dkrepen MA J
- Return > Reasoa
2.6.1-12 Automatic Line Break For entry / editing of unformatted text, an automatic line break ("retum") should be provided when te_xt reaches the right margin, with provision for user override.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang MA Keturn > Reason:
2.6.1-13 Automatic Pagination Aids Automatic pagination for text entry / editing should be provided, allowing users to specify the page
- size.[AI]
oK Comosent:
V _
DkrePan MA Return > Reason:
2.6.1-14 User Control of Pagination When automatic pagination is provided, users should be allowed to override that pagination in order to specify page numbers at any point in a document.[AI] ]
oK Comment:
DkrePMU NA Return > Reanos:
2.6.1 15 Controlling Integrity of Text Units When automatic pagination is provided, users should be allowed to specify how many lines in a paragraph can stand alone at the bottom or top of a page (" widows" and " orphans"), and to specify any text that should not be divided between two pages, such as lists or tables. l oK Comment:
Discrepang NA k Returo > Reason:
)
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2s6 M:n:gingInformation Page 2-98 2.6.1 Editing Documents 2.6.1-16 Protecting Text During Page Overruns When a user is inserting text into a document that has already been paginated, no text should be lost if the user insens more text than a page can hold.[AI]
oK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-17 IIcad- and Foot of File The means should be provided to readily move the cursor to the head (beginning) or the foot (end)of the file.
oK Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-18 Inserting When inserting words or phrases, items to be inserted should be displayed as the final copy will ap ear.
oK Comment:
DL*Tepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-19 String Search Users should be allowed to specify a string of text and request the computer to advance (or back up) the cursor automatically to the next (or last previous) occurrence of that string.[AI]
oK Comment:
DL5crepancy N/A Return > Reawn:
2.6.120 Multiple Methods of Searching U_sers should have multiple methods for searching for lines or alphanumeric strings.
oK Comment:
DLutepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.6 M:n:gingInform: tion Page 2-99 n 2.6.1 Editing Documents (V 1 2.6.121 Search for Line Numbers U_sers should have the ability to search for and move to a specific line number in a file.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A i l
Return > Reason:
2.6.1-22 Upper and Lower Case Equivalent in Search I Unless otherwise specified by a user, upper and lower case letters should be treated as equivalent I in_ searching text.[AI] ;
OK Comment:
Discrepancy )
N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-23 Specifying Case in Search When case is important, users should be allowed to specify case as a selectable option in string se_ arch.[AI]
OK
] _
Comment:
DLscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-24 Global Search and Replace When systematic editing changes will be made throughout a long document, a " global search and replace" capability should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.125 Case in Global Search and Replace if a global search and replace capability is provided, the case of the replacement string should match the case of the old string, unless otherwise specified by the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2 USER SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2 6 M:nagingInformation Page 2-100 2.6.1 Editing Documents 2.6.1-26 Moving Text Users should be allowed to select and move text segments from one place to another within a d_ocument.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepany N/A Return > Reamn:
2.6.1-27 Pasting Text into a Graphical File and Vice Versa The user should be able to paste (1) alphanumeric data cut or copied from a text file or table into apaphical display, and (2) graphical data into a text or tabular file.
oK Comment:
Dberepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-28 Cutting Graphical Objects and Areas of Graphical Displays U_sers should be able to cut both graphical objects and areas of a graphical display.
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.129 Viewing Text Prior to Pasting U_sers should be able to view text that has been cut or copied prior to pasting.
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.130 Placing Cut Text in Compatible Files Users should be able to insert copied text at any location in the current file or other files created with the same application.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dberepang N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM LNTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.6 ManagingInformation
. Page 2-101 4
2.6.1 Editing Documents 2.6.1-31 Placement of Pasted Text The pasted text should be inserted at the location immediately before the cursor (in a text file), or at the approximate location of the cursor (in a graphical file).[AI]
- OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.1-32 Pasting the Same Text More than Once Pasting the most recently cut or copied text should have no effect on the users' ability to paste the j same text again.[AI]
i OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
i i 2.6.1-33 Cutting Without a Gap in the Text N_o gap should be left in the file at the point from which cut text was removed.[AI]
A OK Comment:
Discrepancy i
N/A I
Return > Reason:
2.6.1-34 Storing Frequently Used Text I
Users should be allowed to label and store frequently used text segments, and to later recall (copy into current text) stored segments identified by their assigned labels.[AI]
OK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.135 Vertical Scrolling When Selecting Text if the selected text, table, or graphics area extends beyond the bottom of the displayed page, the s_creen should automatically scroll until the user stops selecting.
OK Comment:
Dkrepancy N/A
[
\
Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.6 M:n:gingInformation Page 2-102 2.6.1 Editing Documents 2.6.1-36 Non Contiguous Blocks of Text Users should not be able to select non-contiguous blocks of text when cutting and pasting.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O I j
O
1 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 2 6 M:niging Information Page 2-103 2
2.6.2 Saving Files l 2.6.2-1 Saving to a Data File ne user should be able to save the information entered into a file by a single action that will grmit the user to continue interacting with that file.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A
^
Return > Reason:
a 2.6.2 2 Exit With Save After finishing the interaction with any type of file, the user should be able to save the information ,
and stop interacting with the file by a single action.
OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A ,
4 Return > Reason:
I 2.6.2-3 Exiting a File After finishing the interaction with any type of file, the user should be able to stop interacting with lg the file by a single action (e.g., selecting a menu item) without saving the changes to the file.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.2-4' Distinct Commands for Exit With and Without Save
' The command used to " exit with save" should differ from the commands for "save" (without exit) and for " exit without save."
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
~
i N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.2-5 Protection Against Exiting a File Without Saving
, The user should be protected against exiting a file without the opportunity to save the file contents.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
( Return > Reason:
! (
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2<6 M n:gingInformation Page 2-104 2.6.2 Saving Files 2.6.2 6 Recovery of Replaced File Information from a file that has been modified and stored with the "save" or " exit with save" ac_tions should be retrievable with a single action.
OK Comment:
Dbcrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.2-7 Automatic Saving of a File i The system should save a file automatically at frequent intervals while being edited.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dbcrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.2-8 Automatic Backup Users chould have the option of invoking an automatic backup function that retains previous versions of files. The specific number of previous versions saved should be selectable by the user.
OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.2-9 Access of Modified Information After Exit Without Save information from a file that has been modified by new input should be retrievable with a single ac_ tion even after exiting without saving new input.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
l I
l 1
9
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.6 M:n:gingInform tion Page 2-105 2.6.3 Temporary Editing Buffer V 2.6.3-1 Automatic Placement of Cut Data in Buffer When selected data is cut or copied from a text file, tabular file, and/or graphics file and placed in a temporary editing buffer, the data should be placed in the buffer automatically, with the only specific action required by the user being the cut or copy action.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.3-2 Contents of Temporary Buffer I The contents of the temporary editing buffer should remain intact after the application from which the contents were taken is closed.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
i 2.6.3-3 Default Conditions of Buffer The default condition should be that additions to the temporary editing buffer are not
(, cumulative.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.3-4 Access to Contents of Temporary Buffer The user should be able to access the contents of the temporary editing buffer in a window with a single action.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
(
j
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.6 M:nigingInformation Page 2-106 2.6.4 Excerpt File 2.6.41 Accessing Information Across Applications
' Die capability to accept and maintain information, independent of application, should be provided fo_r holding relevant information across displays or applications.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.4-2 Excerpt File .
U_sers should have the capability to create multiple excerpt files. !
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l i
2.6.4-3 Integrating Data T_he user should have the capability to integrate new data with data already in the file.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.6.4-4 Copying Excerpt File De user should be able to cut or copy data from the excerpt file and paste it to any other file.
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i l
2.6.4 5 Saving Excerpt File i Be user should be able to save the excerpt file. j OK Comment:
i Dberepancy N/A ,
i Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Prevention / Detection / Correction of Errors Page 2-107 2.7.1 Validating User Input G
2.7.1-1 Automatic Data Validation i Software for automatic data validation should be provided to check any item whose entry and/or I I
correct format or content is required for subsequent data processing. )
OK Comroent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.12 Validation Data entries should be validated by the system for correct format, legal value, or range of values. ,
Where repetitive entry of data sets is required, data validation for each set should be completed l before another transaction can begin. I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1-3 Stroke-By-Stroke Echo Data being entered through a keyboard should be echoed en the screen on a stroke-by-stroke i basis, except when applied to passwords or other security measures.
J _
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.14 System Validation Where possible, when a command entry does not meet validation logic, a cautionary message sh_ould be displayed asking the user to confirm data entry.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1-5 Data Verification by User Review When verification of prior data entries is required, users should be allowed to review and confirm the data, rather than re-entering the data.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A V Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Prevention / Detection / Correction of Errors Page 2-108 2.7.1 Validating User Input 2.7.16 Cross Validation of Related Data For the entry of related data items, automatic cross validation should be provided to ensure that the data set is logically consistent.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1-7 Displaying Default Values Currently operative default values should be displayed for data entry, so that users can review and confirm them for computer processing.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1-8 Non Disruptive Error Messages If data validation detects a probable error, an error message should be displayed to the user at the completion of data entry.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1-9 Timely Validation of Sequential Transactions .
In a repetitive data entry task, the cata for one transaction should be validated, and the user l should be allowed to correct errors before beginning another transaction.[ AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1 10 Optional Item-by-Item Validation O
J tionalitem-by-item data validation within a multiple-entry transaction should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Prevention / Detection / Correction cf Errors Page 2-109 4
2.7.1 Validating User Input t
\ 2.7.1-11 Deferral of Required Data Entry If a user wishes to defer entry of a required data item, the user should be required to enter a special symbol in the data field to indicate that the item has been temporarily omitted rather than ignored.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1-12 Reminder of Deferred Entry if a user has deferred entry of required data but then requests processing of entries, that omission should be signaled to the user, and immediate entry (or perhaps further deferral) of missing items sh_ould be allowed.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.1-13 User Validation
) The user should be able to obtain a paper copy (screen dump) of the contents of alphanumeric or V graphic displays.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
l 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Pmvention/ Detection / Correction of Errors Page 2-110 2.7.2 Correction Information/ Command Entries 2.7.21 Acknowledging Corrections All error corrections by the user should be acknowledged by the system either by indicating a l correct entry has been made or by another error message.
OK Comment:
DLurepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-2 UNDO to Reverse Control Actions Any user action should be immediately reversible by an UNDO command.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-3 User Review and Editing of Entries For all inputs, whether data entries or commands, users should be allowed to edit composed material before requesting computer processing.[AI]
1 oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-4 Immediate Error Correction When the system detects an error in a user input, the user should be allowed to make an i_mmediate correction.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-5 Editing Entries After Error Detection Following error detection, users should be allowed to edit entries by rekeying only those portions that were in error.[ AI]
oK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Prevention / Detection / Correction of Errors Page 2-111 2.7.2 Correction Information/ Command Entries V 2.7.2-6 Explicit Entry of Corrections Users should be required to take an explicit ENTER action for computer processing of error .
co_rrections.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-7 Automated Correction Aid When inappropriate or unrecognized commands are detected, a list should be provided to the user showing permissible commands, anticipating the command intended.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-8 Flexible BACKUP for Error Correction '
Users should be allowed to B ACKUP easily to previous steps in a nansaction ~quv.,ce in order to_ correct an error or make any other desired change.[AI]
g oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-9 Errors in Stacked Commands If an error is detected in a stacked series of command entries, the computer should either consistently execute to the point of error, or else consistently require users to correct errors b_efore executing any command.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 1
2 USER SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Prevention / Detection / Correction cf Errors Page 2-112 2.7.2 Correction Information/ Command Entries 2.7.210 Partial Execution of Stacked Commands if only a portion of a stacked command can be executed, the user should be notified and provided appropriate guidance to permit correction, completion, or cancellation of the stacked command.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.2-11 Replacing Erroneous Commands If a user makes a command entry error, after the error message has been displayed, the user should be allowed to enter a new command.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.212 Correcting Command Entry Errors If a command entry is not recognized, the user should be allowed to revise the command rather t_han rejecting the command outright.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
l O'
2 USER SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Przvention/ Detection / Correction of Errors Page 2-113 2.7.3 Confirming Entries
- l. O lV 2.7.3-1 User Confirmation of Destructive Entries When a control entry will cause any extensive change in stored information, procedures, and/or system operation, and particularly if that change cannot be easily reversed, the user should be notified and confirmation of the action should be required before implementing it.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A l Return > Reason:
1 2.7.3-2 Informing Users of Potential Information Loss
- For conditions which may require special user attention to protect against information loss, an explicit alert and/or advisory message should be provided to prompt appropriate user action.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.3 3 Preventing Data Loss at LOG OFF lc When a user requests LOG-OFF, pending transactions should be checked and if any pending lI I
transaction will not be completed, or if data will be lost, an advisory message requesting user confirmation should be displayed.[AI]
oK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l \
2.7.3-4 Displaying Data to be Changed I If a user requests change (or deletion) of a stored data item that is not currently being displayed, l both the old and new values should be displayed so that the user can confirm or nullify the change b_efore the transaction is cuinpletr4.[iti) oK Comment:
Discrep ancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.7 Pr;vention/ Detection /Ccrrection of Errors Page 2-114 2.7.4 Protecting Data 2.7.41 Protection from Computer Failure A_utomatic measures should be provided to minimize data loss from computer failure.[AI]
UK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.4 2 Protection from Interrupts When a proposed user action will interrupt t. current transaction sequence, automatic means to prevent data loss should be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.4 3 Protection from Data Change When information must not be changed, users should not be permitted to change controlled items.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.4-4 Explicit Action to Select Destructive Modes U_sers should take explicit action to select any operational mode that might result in data loss.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A i
Return > Reason:
j 2.7.4 5 Safe Defaults I
If automatic defaults are provided for control entries, those defaults should protect against data gss, or at least not contribute to the risk of data loss.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l
2.7 Pr vention/ Detection / Correction of Errors Page 2-115 2.7.4 Protecting Data
' Cs
( 2.7.4-6 Protecting Physical Controls l If activation of function keys (and other control devices) may result in data loss, they should be located separately and/or physically protected to reduce the likelihood of accidental activation.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.4 7 Disabling Unneeded Controls When function keys and other devices are not needed for current control entry, and especially when they may have destructive effects, they should be temporarily disabled by the software so that they cannot be activated by a user.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Diverepancy N/A Return > Reawn:
2.7.4 8 Distinctive File Names When data files may be deleted (or overwritten) by name, the names of different files should be distinctive.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.4-9 Feedback for Mode Selection When the result of user actions will be contingent upon prior selection among differently defined operational modes, a continuous indication of the current mode should be provided, particularly when user inputs in that mode might result in data loss.[Af]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.7.4-10 Protection from Interference by Other Users Data should be protected from inadvertent loss caused by the actions of other users.[AI]
oK Comment:
l g Discrepancy i
, Return > Reason:
l l
l 2 USER > SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 !
2.7 Prevention / Detection / Correction of Errors Page 2-116 l 2.7.4 Protecting Data l f
l 2.7.4-11 Segregating Real from Simulated Data j l When simulated data and system functions are displayed or provided (perhaps for user training), I real data should be protected and real system use should be clearly distinguished from simulated operations.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Raeson:
2.7.412 Data Entry / Change Transaction Records In situations where unauthorized data changes may be possible, users (or a system administrator)
I should be able to request a record of data entry / change transactions.[All oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
O l
O
1 l 2 USER-SYSTEMINTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 2.8 System Security Page 2-117 2.8.1 UserIdentification l b 2.8.11 Automated Security Measures 1
When required, automated measures to protect data security should be provided, relying on c_omputer capabilities rather than on more fallible human procedures.[AI]
OK Coenment b8Pa*U N/A l Retura > Reasos:
2.8.12 Notification of Threats to Security Messages or signals should be provided in order to notify users (and system administrators) of potential threats to data security (i.e., of attempted intrusion by unauthorized users).[AI]
OK Coenewet:
l _
- P**U N/A Return > Reasoe:
2.8.13 Auxiliary Tests to Authenticate User Identity When system security requires more stringent user identification than is provided by password entry, auxiliary tests should be devised that authenticate user identity without imposing in) practical demands on the user's memory.
OK Comuseat:
Dwn N/A l Return > Reason:
l 2.8.1-4 Easy LOG-ON The LOG-ON process and procedures for user identification should be as simple as possible, consistent with protecting data from unauthorized use.[AI]
OK Comewet:
l _
N/A Return > Ranson:
2.8.1-5 Private Entry of Passwords When a password must be entered by a user, password entry should not be displayed.[AI]
i OK Comment:
~
1 DWang N/A k Recurs > Rensse:
i e
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.8 System Security Page 2-118 2.8.1 User Identification 2.8.1-6 User Choice of Passwords When passwords are required, users should be allowed to choose their own passwords and to change their passwords as needed.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.1-7 Limiting Unsuccessful LOG-ON Attempts A maximum limit on the number and rate of unsuccessful LOG-ON attempts should be imposed.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.18 Continuous Recognition of User Identity Once a user's identity has been authenticated, any authorized data access / change privileges are for that user should continue throughout a work session.[AI]
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Retsro > Reason:
2.8.1-9 Single Authorization for Data Entry / Change User authorization for data entry / change should be established at initial LOG-ON.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.1-10 LOG-ON When users must LOG-ON to a system, LOG-ON should be t. separate procedure that is co_mpleted before a user may select any operational options.
oK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
l 1
_ _ o + - 4 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.8 System Security Page 2-119 2.8.1 User Identification f}
(/ . 2.8.1-11 LOG-ON Frame ;
The LOG-ON frame should appear as soon as possible on the display with no additional user 1 l involvement.
i l oK Comment:
f Discrepancy i
N/A Return > Reason:
1 2.8.1-12 LOG-ON Delays i LOG-ON delays should be accompanied by an advisory message to tell the user its current status a_nd when the system will become available.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.1-13 Immediate Start of Productive Work After completing the sign-on process, the user should be able to start productive work inunediately.
r, oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I 2.8.1 14 LOG-OFF If there are pending actions and the user requests a LOG-OFF, the system should inform the user that these actions will be lost and allow the user to cancel either the pending actions or the LOG-l OFF.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 2.8.1-15 Saving Open Files in Automatic LOG OFF Where possible,in the event of automatic LOG-OFF, open files should be saved to some defined file name.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2c8 SystemSecurity Page 2-120 l 2.8.1 UserIdentification 2.8.1-16 Automatic LOG OFF Interactive timesharing systems should allow some specified time between keyboard actions before automatic LOG-OFF unless a longer period is requested by the user.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Ranson:
l 2.8.1-17 Audible Signal for Automatic LOG-OFF A_n audible signal should be presented at specified intervals prior to automatic LOG-OFF.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
l 2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 2.8 System Security . Page 2-121 l 2.8.2 Information Access O
2.8.21 Encryption When sensitive data may be exposed to unauthorized access, a capability for encrypting those data should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
) _
D6screPa#U
, N/A !
Return > Reason:
1 2.8.2-2 Ensuring Reversible Encryption i Encrypted data should be protected from any change th:t might prevent successful reversal of j t_ heir encryption.
oK Comment:
Discrepang
< N/A Return > kosmon:
2.8.2-3 Displayed Security Classification When displayed data are classified for security purposes, a prominent indication of security 4
classification should be included in each display.[AI]
- O _
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.2-4 Display Suppression for Security
- When confidential information is displayed at a work station that might be viewed by casual onlookers, the user should be provided with some rapid means of temporarily suppressing a c_urrent display if its privacy is threatened, and then resuming work later.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.2-5 Protecting Printed Data As required for security, procedures to control access to printed data should be established, rather t_han simply prohibiting the printing of sensitive data.[AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2 USER-SYSTEM INTERACTION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 2.8 System Security Page 2-122 2.8.2 Information Access 2.8.2-6 Protecting Display Formats Display formatting features, such as field labels and delimiters, should be protected from accidental change by users.[AI]
- oK Comment:
Discrep*ncy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.2-7 Protecting Displayed Data When protection of displayed data is essential, computer control over the display should be m_aintained.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
2.8.2-8 Indicating " Read Only" Displays When users are not authorized to change displayed data, " read-only" status should be indicated on t_he display.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Rewrn > Reason:
2.8.2 9 Automatic Records of Data Access !
I Men records of data access are necessary, the records should be maintained automatically.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy ,
i N/A l
Return > Reason: 1 0
1 i
I
m'ua 3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.1 Genercl Control Guidelines Page 3-1 3.1.1 Design Principles 3.1.1 1 Appropriate Use ofInput Devices l Input and control devices provided for interacting with the HSI should be appropriate for the u_ser's task requirements.[Arj OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A i
Return > Reason:
3.1.1-2 Input Device Stability -
Input and control devices should be stable during normal usage, i.e., they should not slip or rock, unless such actions are a part of the controller operation.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.1-3 Feedback Visual or auditory feedback should be provided to indicate that a controller input has been registered.[AI]
OK Comment:
( _
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.1-4 Accidental Input or Actuation Prevention The system should be located and designed to prevent the accidental manipulation of control and input devices which could result in changes to the status of the system functions, components, or data.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.1-5 Location Controls should be operable from the location where the operator is most likely to need to interact with the system.
l OK Comment:
Discrepancy y N/A
\'
Return > Reason:
I
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3,1 General Control Guid: lines Page 3-2 3.1.1 Design Principles 3.1.16 Speed l Controls should provide rapid positioning of cursors or selection of choices. I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.17 Accuracy D_evice or method accuracy should be commensurate with the functions to be served. '
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
)
l 3.1.1-8 Displacement C_ontrol design should allow the operator freedom of movement to perform other duties.
OK Comment: I Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.1-9 Adequacy E_ach control should provide a sufficient range of control.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l
N/A Return a- Reason:
3.1.1-10 Economy Each control or input device should be necessary, use minimal space, and be the simplest effective control for the task concerned.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reawn:
O
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3,1 General Control GuideEnes Page 3-3 3.1.1 Design Principles t/ 3.1.1-11 Human Suitability C_ontrols and input devices should be suitable for operator use in a control room environment.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.1 12 Compatibility with Emergency Gear If used while wearing protective equipment (e.g., oxygen masks and protective gloves), controls a_nd input devices should be easy to identify and activate, or use.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.1-13 Durability Controls and input devices should be sufficiently mgged to withstand normal and emergency up.[AI]
oK Comment:
v _
o w e,ancy N/A Return > Reseon:
3.1.1-14 Control Activation C_ontrols and input devices should require distinct or sustained effort for activation.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason-l l
3.1.115 Sequential Activation When a strict sequential activation is necessary, controls should be provided with locks to prevent the controls from passing through a position.[All oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
[ Return > Reason:
(
! L) 1 I
l I -__ _ _ _ _ _ - _ - _ - _ _ _ _ - - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.1 Gen:rr.1 Control Guidelines Page 3-4 3.1.1 Design Principles 1 3.1.1 16 Population Stereotypes T_o minimize operator error, control movements should conform to population stereotypes.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reama:
l l
i 1
i O
O
.. . -. . _~ - ..
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1 Vol. 2 3.1 General Control Guld: lines Page 3-5 n 3.1.2 Codingof Controls t t 3.1.2-1 Consistency De coding system should be uniform throughout the control room.[AI]
l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.2-2 Size Coding Levels No more than three different sizes of controls should be used for discrimination by absolute size.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.2-3 Size Coding Uniformity Controls used for performing the same function on different items of equipment should be the same size.
OK Comment:
'(/ Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i 3.1.2-4 Shape Coding I When possible, controls should be differentiated by shape.[AI]
_ l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.2-5 Color Coding Contrast Be color of the control should contrast with the panel background.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A l Return > Reason:
1 i
?
k l
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICFS NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 3.1 General Control Guidelines Page 3 6 3.1.2 Coding of Controls 3.1.2-6 Color Coding Hetween Control and Display When color coding is used to relate a control to its corresponding display, the same color should be used for both the control and the display.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.2-7 Location Coding by Function j Controls should be located so as to be easily related to functions and functional groupings.[AI]
oK Comment:
('
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.1.2-8 Location Coding Across Panels C_ontrols with similar functions should be in the same location from panel to panel.[AIJ oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
l O
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rey,1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-7 3.2.1 Alphanumeric Keyboards i
V 3.2.1-1 General Keyboard Layout A_n ANSI standard (QWERTY) layout should be used for the typing keyboard.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy '
N/A l Return > Reason:
l 3.2.12 Numeric Keypad l When users must enter numeric data, keyboards should be equipped with a numeric keypad.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1-3 Numeric Keypad Layout Keypads used for numeric entry should be consistently designed.[AI) oK Comment:
Discrepancy
/% ~
[ N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1-4 Cursor Control Capability Horizontal and vertical cursor control keys should be provided for text processing applications.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1-5 Cursor Key Layout Cursor control keys should be arranged in a two-dimensional layout so that their orientation is co_mpatible with the cursor motion they produce.[ AI) oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-8 3.2.1 Alphanumeric Keyboards l 3.2.1-6 Overlays
- M_echanical overlays, such as coverings over the keyboard, should be not used.
l OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.17 Keyboard Surfaces A_ matte finish should be used for keyboard surfaces.[AI]
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.18 Keyboard Thickness The thickness of the keyboard, i.e., base to the home row of keys, should be less than 2 inches (50 mm); 1.25 inches (30 mm) or less is preferred.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1-9 Keyboard Slope Adjustment Be slope of the keyboard should be adjustable by the operator.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.110 Standard Keyboard Placement De operator should be able to reposition the standard keyboard on the worksurface.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 32 Input Devices Page 3-9 3.2.1 Alphanumeric Keyboards
/-
i i l N 3.2.1 11 Keytop Size The minimum horizontal strike surface of the keytop should be at least 0.47 inches (12 mm)in i
width.[AI]
OK Comment: I Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1 12 Key Symbol Size and Contrast Nomenclature for the primary symbols on the keys should be a minimum of 0.1 inches (2.5 mm) in Iteight and has a contrast ratio of 3:1.[AI]
l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1-13 Keytop Symbol Marking K_ey symbols should be etched (to resist wear) and colored with high contrast lettering.[AI]
/' OK Comment:
- k _
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1 14 Key Spacing Center line distances between adjacent keys should be between 0.71 and 0.75 inches (18 and 19 mm) horizontally and between 0.71 and 0.82 inches (18 and 21 mm) vertically.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A ,
1 Return > Reason:
3.2.1-15 Key lleight Key height for alphanumeric keyboards should be between 0.35 and 0.5 inches (10 and 13 mm). l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
[)
E s
u
3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3,2 Input Devices Page 3-10 3.2.1 Alphanumeric Keyboards 3.2.1 16 Key Force The maximum force required to depress keys should be between 0.9 and 5.4 ounces (0.25 and I l_.5 N); a key force of between 1.8 and 2.2 ounces (0.5 and 0.6 N) is preferred.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > $tesson:
3.2.1 17 Key Displacement l Keys should have a maximum vertical displacement between 0.05 and 0.25 inches (1.5 mm and 6J mm); the preferred displacement is between 0.1 and 0.15 inches (2.0 and 4.0 mm).[ AI]
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1-18 Keying Feedback Hie actuation of a key should be accompanied by tactile or auditory feedback or both.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.1 19 Repeat Capability A_ repeat capability for alphanumeric, symbol character, and cursor keys should be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.120 Multiple-Key Rollover ,
M_ultiple-key (N-key) rollover capability should be provided for the reduction of keying errors. !
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
1 3 PROCESS CONTROL & INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-11 l 3.2.1 Alphanumeric Keyboards _
b l i
lV 3.2.121 Keystroke Commands I When it is necessary to distinguish command entries from text input, a specially designated key I sh_ould be one of the keys used for keystroke commands.
OK Comment:
hePaan i N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.122 Simultaneous Keystrokes :
Keystroke commands should require the user to press both keys simultaneously, not in close I temporal sequence.[AI]
OK Comment:
! Discrepson N/A Return > Reason:
- 3.2.123 Inadvertent Operation
- K_eys with major or fatal effects should be located so that inadvertent operation is unlikely.
OK Comment:
\ we, N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.124 Alternate Key Definitions When the keyboard is redefined, a display of the attemate characters and their locations should be available to the operator.
OK Comment:
Discrepson N/A Return > Reason:
f G'
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-12 3.2.2 Function Keys 3.2.2-1 Availability Fixed function keys should be available to control functions that are often utilized and continuously available.[AI]
OK Comnwnt:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.2-2 Inactive Function Keys Unneeded function keys, either fixed or programmable, should be disabled so that no other action occurs upon their depression except an advisory message.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.2-3 Inactive Keys Non-active fixed function keys should not be present on the keyboard.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.2-4 Grouping Fixed function keys should be logically grouped and placed in distinctive locations on the keyboard.[AI]
OK Con..nent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.2-5 Function Labels Key assignments should be displayed at all times, preferably through direct marking.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3,2 Input Devices Page 3-13 3.2.2 Function Keys c0 4
y/ 3.2.2-6 Consistency F_ixed function keys should be used consistently throughout the system.
OK Comment:
Discrepar cy N/A l l
Return > Reason:
3.2.2-7 Actuation Fixed function keys should require only a single actuation to accomplish their function.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.2-8 Repeat for Special Functions Function keys (except for the delete key) should not repeat upon prolonged depression.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy f N/A i
( Return > Reason:
3.2.2-9 Status Display When the effect of a function key varies, the status of the key should be displayed.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.2-10 Easy Return to Initial Functions Where the functions assigned to a set of function keys change as a result of user selection, the user should be given an easy means to return to the initial functions.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy 4
N/A Return > Reason:
.C
(
1 1
, 1
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-14 3.2.2 Function Keys 3.2.211 Reprogrammable or Inactive Default Functions When keys with labeled default functions are reprogrammed or turned off, a visual indication should alert the user that the standard function is not currently accessible via that key.
OK Comment:
Discrepency N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.2-12 Shifted Characters S_hift keys should be not required to operate variable function keys.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O 1
l l
l l
l O ,
I
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG 0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 32 Input Devices Page 3-15 1
3.2.3 Trackballs, Joysticks, and Mice 3.2.31 Dynamic Characteristics The controller should be able to produce any combination of x-and y-axis output values.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3-2 Positive Centering If there is a "home position," the capability for an automatic return to that point should be r
provided.
oK Comment:
D krepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3-3 Single Monitor / Single Controller Cursor Travel Limits In a single monitor / single controller environment, movement of the controller should drive the fo_llower to the edge of the screen only and not off the screen.
oK Comment:
. Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3-4 Separation of Selectable Screen Items Selectable screen items or regions should be separated from each other by a sufficient distance to minimize inadvertent a.:tivation of adjacent items or regions.
OK Cr mment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3 5 Selectable Tracking Speed The controller tracking speed (control-display ratio) should be user selectable from a predefined list of alternatives; there should be a moderate default speed.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i
N/A Return > Reason:
v
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-16 3.2.3 Trackballs, Joysticks,and Mice 3.23-6 Selectable Inter-Click Interval If multiple clicks are required on a selection button, the user should be able to select the inter-clj.ck interval from a predefined list of alternatives. There should be a moderate default setting.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3-7 Limb Support for Trackballs and Mice When trackballs and mice are used to make precise or continuous adjustments, hand, wrist, or a_rm supports should be provided.
oX Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3-8 Mouse Shape De mouse should have no sharp edges but should be shaped roughly as a rectangular solid.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.23-9 Use of Mouse by Either IIand He controller should be operable with either the left or right hand.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.310 Appropriate Use of Displacement (Isotonic) Joysticks Displacementjoysticks are preferred over force joysticks when positioning accuracy is more critical than positioning speed.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-17 3.2.3 Trackballs, Joysticks, and Mice C 3.2.3-11 Appropriate Use of Force (Isometric) Joysticks Force joysticks are preferred over displacement joysticks when precise or continuous control in two or more related dimensions is required.[AI]
oK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3-12 Force Joysticks Dynamic Characteristics The output of the force joystick should be proportional to and in the same direction as the user's perceived applied force. Maximum force for full output should not exceed 271b (118N).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A I
Return > Reason:
I 3.2.313 Displacement Joystick Dynamic Characteristics The output of the displacementjoystick should be proportional to and in the same direction as the displacement of the joystick from the center. Movement should not exceed 45 degrees from the
- center position.[AI]
oK Comment: l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.3-14 Iland-Operated Joysticks Dimensions and Clearance The hand grip length should be between 4.25 to 7 inches (110 to 180 mm). The grip diameter should not exceed 2 inches (50 mm). Clearances of 4 inches (100 mm) to the side and 2 inches (50 mm) to the rear should be provided to allow for hand movement.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3 2 Input Devica Page 3-18 3.2A Touch Screens, Lig'st Pens, and Graphic Tablets 3.2.41 Appropriate Use of Touch Screens Touch screens are not recommended if the task requires holding arm up to the screen for long p.eriods of time.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.4-2 Appropriate Use of a Light Pen A light pen may be used for non-critical input when precise positioning is not required; it should not be used when the task would require holding the pen up to the screen for long periods of time.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 3.2.4-3 Appropriate Use of a Graphics Tablet l Grid and stylus devices may be used for data pickoff from a display and entry of points on a l display.[Alj OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 3.2.4-4 Activation l L_ight pens and graphics tablets should be equipped with an actuating /deactuation mechanism.[ AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.4-5 Feedback Two forms of feedback should be provided: (1) feedback concerning the position of the follower, an_d (2) feedback that the pointer has actuated and the input has been received by the system.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 1 Reason:
_ Return >
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices '
Page 3-19 3.2.4 Touch Screens, Light Pens, and Graphic Tablets
/
( 3.2.4-6 Dynamic Characteristics When used as a two-axis controller, movement of the pointer m any direction on the surface of thy screen or tablet should result in smooth movement of the follower in the same direction.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1
- 3.2.4-7 Follower Visibility For touch screens and light pens, the follower should be visible on screen while the pointer is touching the screen.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
J 3.2.4-8 Serial Command Response The system should accept only one command at a time.
~
oK Comment:
lo(j D*"Pancy
! N/A Return > Reason:
< 3.2.4-9 Feedback for Multiple Workstations l Discriminable audible beeps (used to supply feedback) should be used when more than one touch sc_reen, light pen, or graphics tablet is employed.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A '
Return > Reason:
3.2.4-10 Dimensions and Separation of Touch Zones To allow for finger size and parallax inaccuracy, the dimensions of response areas of touch screens should be a maximum height and width of 1.5 inches (40 mm) and a minimum height and width of 0.6 inches (15 mm), with a maximum separation distance of 0.25 inches (6 mm) and minimum of 0.1 inches (3 mm).
oK Comment:
Discrepancy E
N/A Return > Reason:
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-20 3.2.4 Touch Screens, Light Pens, and Graphic Tablets 3.2.411 Touch Screen Resistance Force required to operate force-t.ctuated touch screens should be a maximum of 5.3 ounces Q.5 N) arid minimum of 0.9 ounces (0.25 N).
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.412 NeutralTint of Touch Overlays T_ ouch screen overlays should have a neutral tint to avoid alteration of color codes.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.4-13 Touch Screen Luminance Transmission Touch screen displays should have sufficient luminance transmission to allow the display with touch screen installed to be clearly readable in the intended environment.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.2.414 Light Pen Dimensions and Mounting The light pen should be between 4.75 to 7 inches (120 to 180 mm) long with a diameter of 0.3 to 0.75 inches (7 to 20 mm). A conveniently located clip should be provided to hold the pen when not in use.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
, 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
) 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-21 3.2.4 Touch Screens, Light Pens, and Graphic Tablets k 3.2.415 Graphic Tablet Size and Orientation 4
Transparent grids which are used as display overlays should conform to the size of the display.
Grids which are displaced from the display should approximate the display size and should be mounted below the display in an orientation to preserve directional relationships to the maximum i extent.[AI]
OK Comment:
Deserepancy N/A 4
RHurn > Reason:
i r
4 l
!(
J 4
i i
i O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.2 Input Devices Page 3-22 3.2.5 Speech Input Devices Guidelines for speech input devices are included in Section 6.2, Speech-Based Communication.
l l
O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Convention:1 Control Devices Page 3-23 33.1 Pushbutton Controls (xI 33.1.1 General i 1.
(d j 3.3.1.11 Position Pushbuttons in a row or matrix should be positioned in a logical order, or in an order related to th_e procedural sequence.
7 OK Comment:
Descrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 3.3.1.1-2 Indication of Activation To ensure that the operator knows that a pushbutton has been pressed far enough for activation, a
. Esitive indication should be provided.[Af]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 33.1.1-3 Pushbutton Surface I
("% The surface of a pushbutton should offer slip resistance or be concave.
, OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i l
V
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.3 Conventionsi Control Devices Page 3-24 33.1 Pushbutton Controls 3.3.1.2 Round Pushbuttons 33.1.2-1 Dimensions and Resistance Round pushbuttons should conform to the dimensions given in Figure 3.4. Resistance should be 10 to 40 ounces (2.8 to 11.1 N) for fingertip operation and 10 to 80 ounces (2.8 to 22.2 N)for thumb or palm operation.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I O
O
. 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-25 )
33.1 Pushbutton Controls !
- 3.3.1.2 Round Pushbuttons
.Q
)
i l l
! l i
j s
4 i
! --* D +-- )
i
- ,.... _ .j w a
- I i
j Diameter (D) Displacommt(A)
- (W) (inches) i
! Thumb or
, Palm i
i Minimum 0.375* 0.75 0.125 I Medmum 1.0 1.5
- Minimum diameter for guarded or recessed
- pushbumons should be 0.75 inch.
I i
Figure 3.4 Recommended dimensions for unguarded and non recessed pushbuttons
- (finger or hand operated) i
)
i i
k i
1 (
4
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-26 3.3.1 Pushbutton Controls 33.13 Legend Pushbuttons 33.13-1 Discriminability 1 Legend pushbuttons should be readily distinguishable from legend lights.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l
N/A Return > Reason:
l 3.3.13 2 Legend De legend should be readable under all environmental conditions.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy I N/A Returs > Reason:
33.13-3 Lamp Failure Agrovision should be made for lamp failure.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.13-4 Barriers 1 1
B_arriers should be used when legend pushbuttons are contiguous.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy
_ i N/A Return > Reason:
l 33.1.3-5 Dimensions and Resistance Legend pushbuttons should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.5. Resistance should be l l_0 to 60 ounces (2.8 to 16.7 N).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l
)
N/A l
Return > Reason:
O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 I 3.3 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-27 3.3.1 Pushbutton Controls l O 3.3.1.3 Legend Pushbuttons I
V Sd i
As f
.- #g
- / ,
I A, % !. 7
, 4-- B d
/
l $:
\ ' :
~
1
. i ;
i Q
Bw 3x r
Size (S) Displacement (A) Barriers (inches) (inches) (inches)
B, Bd Minimum 0.75" 0.125" 0.125 0.188 Maximum 1.5 0.250 0.250 0.250 )
- 0.625 inches when switch is not depressed beyond the panel surface. l
" 0.188 inches for switches having positive indication of activation.
, Figure 3.5 Recommended dimensions oflegend pushbuttons Y
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Convention:1 Control Devices Page 3-28 33.2 Rotary Controls 33.2.1 General 33.2.1-1 Direction of Activation R_otary control settings should increase in value with a clockwise rotation.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.2.1-2 Rotary Control Shape Coding Shape coding should be employed if rotary controls used for widely different functions are placed on the same panel.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.2.1-3 Coding Specifications Shape-coded rotary controls should be visually and tactually identifiable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.2.14 Rotating Knob Shape Options Rotating knob controls for different types of control actions should be distinguishable by sight and touch and not easily confused with each other.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: I i
l 3.3.2.15 Rotary Action Control !
Rotary action controls should be used in situations where linear or pushbutton controls would be subject to inadvertent activation and fixed protective structures are impractical or inappropriate.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-29 33.2 Rotary Controls f' 33.2.2 J Handles 4
s, 33.2.21 Dimensions and Resistance High toryne J-handles should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.9. Resistance should be 6 to 12 inch-pounds (0.7 to .14 N-m).
I OK Comment: I Discrepancy j N/A Return > Reason:
33.2.2 2 Low-Torque Designs When using smaller scale J-handles, the handle ponion usually has a flattened or flared tip for j finger placement, and the clearance between handle and panel surface can be less.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A j Return > Reason:
f j e l I.; ' l l
i
't 4
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-30 3.3.2 Rotary Controls 33.2.2 J Handles A"
Ch
-h s 'A
- ...: g s e .. ., s, L : ,
's,
.,. % /
(h $. , y:.ol@y e
c Mi V I *W+
Length (L) Clearance (C) Width (W) Displacement (A)
Onches) Onches) (inches) (degrees)
Minimum 3.75 1.25 0.625 24 Maximum 6.0 2.0 1.0 60
- Figure 3.9 High torque J-handle dimensions i
i t
l
(
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-31 33.2 Rotary Controls 33.2.3 Key-Operated Controls
~
3.3.23-1 Use Key-operated controls should be used when system requirements dictate that the function being co_ntrolled should be secured against activation by unauthorized personnel.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.2.3-2 Teeth: Single Row Keys with a single row of teeth should be inserted into the lock with the teeth pointing up or forward.
oK Comment: j Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
33.2.3 3 Teeth: Double Row l K_eys with teeth on both edges should fit the lock with either side up or forward. ,
{ _
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.2.3-4 Off Orientation Locks should be oriented so that the OFF or S AFE state is in effect when the key is in the vertical position.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.2.3 5 Key Removal Operators should not normally be able to remove the key from the lock unless the switch is turned to_the OFF or S AFE position.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy s N/A
( Return > Reason:
m
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-32 3.3.2 Rotary Controls 33.2.3 Key-Operated Controls 33.2.3-6 Labeling C_ontrol positions should be labeled.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.23 7 Actuation of Key Switch Actuation of an item by a key operated switch should be accomplished by turning the key clockwise from the vertical OFF (i.e., upright) position.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.2.3 8 Dimensions and Resistance Key-operated control dimensions should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.10.
R_esistance should be 1 to 6 inch-pounds.
OK Comment:
DL$crepancy N/A Return > ,
Reason:
O
- .. -= . .
1 J
~
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 3.3 Conventionil Control Devices Page 3-33
", 3.3.2 Rotary Controls 3.3.2.3 Key-Operated Controls E
i J
s
! \
I j '
i 4 i' l
4
- 3 l A i '
i ;
/
+
' /
! . l.
4
~, -
a j ,' s I -
in < . A !
- .- l.
H 3
! l 0
l l "
Displacement (A) Height (H)
(degrees) Onches)
, Minimum 80 0.5 Maximum 90 3.0 4
i i Figure 3.10 Key-operated control dimensions 4
S l
j l l
l
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-34 3.3.2 Rotary Controls 3.3.2.4 Continuous Adjustment Controls 3.3.2.41 Knobs l Knobs for continuous adjustment controls should be round in shape, with knurled or serrated ;
ed JCs.
OK Comment:
Discrepang NA Return > Reason:
3.3.zA-2 Position Indication When an indication of position is desirable, it should allow the user to easily recognize the
[Losition.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang MA Return > Reason:
3.3.2.4 3 Knob Dimensions Fingertip grasp knobs should be between 0.5 and 1 inch (13 and 25 mm) in height and between 0.375 and 4 inches (10 and 100 mm) in diameter. Thumb and forefinger encircled knobs should be between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 75 mm)in diameter.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang MA Return > Reason:
3.3.2.4-4 Torque Knob torque should be within the range of 4.5 to 6.0 inch-ounces.
OK Comment:
Discrepang MA Return > Reason:
33.2.4 5 Dimensions of Knobs with Skirts Knobs with skirts should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.11.
OK Comment:
Discrepang NA Return > Reason:
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-35 2
33.2 Rotary Controls b 33.2.4 Continuous Adjustment Controls I i
i 1
I I
4 4 : Da
- / +-- og --+
+-
lDk ,,
Hg 1 (n) v FINGER STOP N ,":
'g' /
m s$ $ j'; N "
Hs Hg I
KNOB SKIRT i
i Knob (k) F-Stop (f) Skirt (s)
Diameter (D) 0.75 1.25 2.0 i
?
Combined l 4
Height (H) 0.75 0.25 s Figure 3.11 Minimum dimensions for rotary controls with finger stops and skirts I (in inches) 1 V
l 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 j 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-36 1 3.3.2 Rotary Controls 3.3.2.5 Rotary Selector Controls 1
33.2.5-1 Selection l
' Rotary selector controls should be used when three or more detented positions are required. and may also be used for two-detented position operation.
oK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
3.3.2.5-2 Positioning Detents should be provided at each control position to ensure proper positioning of a discrete ro_tary control.[AI]
OK Comment:
i DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.2.5-3 Readability Rotary controls should have a moving pointer and fixed position settings to maximize readability.
oK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 3.3.2.5-4 Position Indication Position indication should be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
l DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.2.5 5 Dimensions and Resistance Rotary selector controls should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.12. Resistance sh_ould be I to 6 inch-pounds.
oK Comment:
DLwrepancy
_ l N/A Return > Reason:
l
4 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
- 3.3 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-37 l_ 3.3.2 Rotary Controls
! 3.3.2.5 Rotary Selector Controls 1
h
)
e i
n l
f i'l,j ,,
/
l- _.______.._.%..
r . _ . _ . ._
l , Lp ( /._ , 7lc/
1 s-
/ 'l
, . o / :
i / I f +- H -+
- W -*
3 i
! Length (L) Width (W) Depth (H) Displacement (A)
(inches) (inches) (inches)
Dispdegrees)(lacement (A)(For special i i requirements)*
1 Minimum 1.0 -
0.625 15 30 Maximum 4.0 1.0 3.0 40 90
- When special engineering requirements (such as protective clothingj or when tactually (" blind")
positioned controls demand brge separation, i
Figure 3.12 Recommended dimensions for rotary selector switches j O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-38 33.2 Rotary Controls 3.3.2.5 Rotary Selector Controls 33.2.5-6 Momentary Contact Rotary Selector Controls Knobs for spring-loaded momentary contact rotary selector controls should be large enough to be easily held against the spring torque, without fatigue, for as long as necessary to accomplish the control action.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O' O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-39 33.3 Other Controls 33.3.1 Thumbwheels
[_
333.1-1 Via;bility To minimize error, thumbwheel readouts should be visible from the thumbwheel operating position.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.3.1-2 Coding If the thumbwheel is used as an input device, the OFF, zero, or normal position should be coded to_ facilitate visual recognition of status.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.3.1-3 Continuous AdjustmentThumbwheels p Continuous adjustment thumbwheels should conform to ergonomic recommendations.[AI]
oK
\ Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
33.3.14 Dimensions and Resistance Discrete thumbwheel controls should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.13.
R_esistance should be 6 to 20 ounces (1.7 to 5.6 N).
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-40 333 Other Controls 33.3.1 Thumbwheels i
1 e
i i
f
-+ W*-
f '. . . ' =. a l
D g e,/ 9 7 H
FRONT PANEL- I,,... .,
SURFACE o
-* L + *- S -*
Diameter (D) Disa Width (W) Depth (H) Separation (S)
(L)
(inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)
(inches)
Minimum 1.125 0.45 0.125 0.125 0.45 l Maximum 3.0 0.75 0.5 Figure 3.13 Recommended dimensions for discrete thumbwheel controls O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
, 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-41
~
3.3.3 Other Controls (9
y/
33.3.2 Slide Switches
, 33.3.2-1 Surface 3
The surface of slide switches should be serrated or knurled.
- OK Comment
Discrepancy )
N/A j Return > Reason: 4 l
3.33.2-2 Detents D_etents should be provided for each slide switch setting.[AI]
OK Comment: 1 Discrepancy
~
1 N'^
)
Return > Reason:
j 333.2-3 Accidental Actuation
. Channel guards or other preventive features should be provided when accidental actuation would have undesirable consequences. ,
OK Comment: l 4
.4 (" -
Discrepancy N/A
}
Return > Reason:
i 3.33.2-4 Orientation Slide switches should be vertically oriented.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.33.2-5 Positive Indication Slide switches involving more than two positions should be designed to provide positive in_dication of the control setting, preferably a pointer located on the left side of 6e slide handle.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 x 4
k
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.3 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-42 33.3 Other Controls 333.2 Slide Switches 333.2-6 Dimensions of Slide Switches Slide switches should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.14.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
O
- 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l- 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-43 33.3 Other Controls
! 333.2 Slide Switches 3
i 2
i i j i
i i l 4
1 i
1 i
l <
E l 1
i ON
- 9.-
i i TH t i j
l ' A- 1 L 2-l l: =l 4
i OFF Height (H) 0.25 ,
1 Length (L) 1.0
)
Figure 3.14 Recommended dimensions for slide switches (in inches)
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-44 33.3 Other Controls 33.3.3 Toggle Switches 3.33.3-1 Positioning To minimize the possibility of inadvertent activation or setting between control positions, toggle switches should have an elastic resistance that increases as the control is moved and drops as the switch snaps into position.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.3.3-2 Feedbaek Toggle switches should emit an audible click, or provide some other source of feedback on activation.
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.3.3.3-3 Dimensions and Resistance Toggle switches should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.15. Resistance should be 10 to 16 ounces (2.8 to 4.4 N) for small switches and 10 to 40 ounces (2.8 to 11.1 N) for large s_ witches.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev. I, Vol. 2
- 3.3 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-45 l 3.3.3 Other Controls 3.3.3.3 Toggle Switches
?
.i i
4 1
4 1
a 4
i A'
i i L
- I i
\W fb .
i 4
b i
j Arm Length (L) Vp Diameter (D) Displacement (A)
(inches) (inches) (degrees)
- a Two Position Three Poshion l
Minimum 0.5 1.5 0.125 30 17 l
4 Maximum 2.0 - 2.0 1.0 80 40 t
j Desired - - - -
25 i
- Use by Bare Finger
" Used by Gloved Finger i
1 I
4 i Figure 3.15 Recommended dimensions for toggle switches i
s I
4 4
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-46 3.33 Other Controls 33.3.4 Rocker Switches 3.33.4-1 Orientation R_ocker switches should ordinarily be oriented vertically.[AI]
oK Comr ent:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
333.4 2 Indication of Activation Aptivation should be indicated by a snap feel, an audible click, or an integral light.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Rr* urn > Reason:
333.4-3 Resistance Control resistance should gradually increase, then drop to zero when the control snaps into position.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
3.33.4-4 Inadvertent Activation if it controls a critical function, the switch should be protected by channel guards or other means to prevent inadvertent activation.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
33.3.4 5 Dimensions and Resistance Rocker switches should conform to the dimensions shown in Figure 3.16. Resistance should be 10 0 to 40 ounces (2.8 to 11.1 N).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
4
- 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
- 33 Conventional Control Devices Page 3-47 33.3 Other Controls 33.3.4 Rocker Switches ;
i l
l I
, 4 1
i a
4 i
HW%
i a
- , ' A l i -
1 o' - '
l2 l= =l 3
< )
l 1 :
Width (W) Leach (L) l (inches) (inches)
Minimum 0.25 0.50 J
Maximum 1.5 0.75 Displacement (A)
(degrees) 2-Position 3-Position Minimum 30 18 l
Optimum -
25 Figure 3.16 Recommended dimensions for rocker switches
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.4 Control-Displ:y Integr tie., Page 3-48 3.4.1 Control Display Relationships 3.4.1.1 General 3.4.1.1 1 Prox.imity A visual display that wi!! be monitored during control manipulation should be located sufficiently close that an operator can read it clearly and without parallax from a normal operating posture.
oK Como.e::t.
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.1.1-2 Obscuration Controls and displays should be located so that displays are not obscured during control operation.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.1.1-3 Association R_ elated controls and displays should be easily identified as being associated.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
3 I'ROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 3.4' Control-Displ y Integrction Page 3-49 s 3.4.1 Control Display Relationships 3.4.1.2 Multiple Controls, Single Display l ~
l 3.4.1.~ 2 -1 Controls Mounted Below Display l Multiple controls should be mounted below the single display.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
i Return > Reason:
l 3.4.1.2-2 Alternative Control Position If it is not feasible to mount multiple controls directly below the single display, controls should be mounted to the right of the display.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.1.2 3 Controls Centered on Display M_ultiple controls should be centered on the single display.
oK Comment:
J
. ep..,
N/A Return > Reason:
1 i
3.4.1.2-4 Grouping of Controls 1 Multiple controls should be grouped in a line or matrix.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
3.4.1.2-5 Arrangemerii of Controls Where there is a 3ormrd order of use, multiple controls should be arrangest for use in left-to-right, top-to-bottem, or other natural sequence.
OK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A l
! Return > Rse on:
I l
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.4 Control Dispiry Integr: tion Page 3-50 3.4.1 Control-Display Relationships 3.4.I.2 Multiple Controls, Single Display 3.4.1.2-6 Enhancement of Control Layout Layout enhancement techniques should be employed where the above techniques cannot apply, or w here for other reasons the relationships are not readily apparent.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
. . - -. - . . = - . - -- - . . . . . .. -
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i
3.4 Control Dispisy Integr: tion Page 3-51 3.4.1 Control Display Relationships 3.4.13 Single Control, Multiple Displays 3.4.13-1 Displays Located Above Control M_ultiple displays should be located above the single control.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy I
N/A j Return > Reason:
3.4.13-2 Alternative Position for Displays if it is not feasible to mount multiple displays above the single control, they should be mounted to >
the left of the control.
oK Comment:
Diecrepancy j N/A 4
Return > Reason:
3.4.1.3-3 Control Centered Lelow Displays The single control should be placed as near as possible to the display, and preferably underneath
~ the center of the display array.
( OK Commet t:
Discrepancy ,
N/A
- Return > Reason
, 3.4.13-4 Grouping of Displays Mu tiple displays should be arranged horizontally or in a matrix.
i ., K Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.13-5 Arrangement of Displays Where there is normal order of use, multiple displays should read from left-to-right, top-to-b_ottom, or in other natural sequence.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
U
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.4 Control-Displ:yIntegr tion Page 3-52 3.4.1 Control-Display Relationships 3.4.1.3 Single Control, Multiple Displays 3.4.1.3-6 Visibility During Control Manipulation M_ultiple displays should not be obscured during control manipulation.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.1.3-7 Enhancement of Display Layout Layout enhancement techniques should be employed where the above techniques cannot apply, or where for other reasons the control-display relationship is not clearly apparent.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.1.3-8 Display Selector Motion The display selector control should move clockwise from OFF (if appropriate) through settings 1, 22 3...n.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.1.3-9 Display Selector Sequence Be display selector control position sequence should conform to the display sequence.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.1.3 10 Display Selector Labeling Display selector control position indications should correspond with display labels.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
i
! 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 3.4 Control Displ y Integrction Page 3-53 3.4.1 Control Display Relationships j
3.4.1.3 Single Control, Multiple Displays 3.4.1.3-11 Display Selectors Scale Displays should read off scale, not zero, when not selected, especially if zero is a possible j parameter displayed.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i i
1
- l 1
i' 0
i a
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev. I, Vol. 2 3.4 Control-DisplIyIntegration Page 3-54 3.4.2 Groups of Controls and Displays !
3.4.2-1 FunctionalIntegrity M_ultiple controls or displays related to the same function should be grouped together.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 1
Return > Reason:
I a
3.4.2-2 Sequence of Use Sequence of use should be as follows: (1)left to right, (2) top to bottom, or (3) the above combined (normal reading order).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A ,
1
, Return > Reason:
1
- 1 3.4.2-3 Display Above Each Control 1 The preferred configuration is with the display above each control.[AI]
OK Comment:
a Discrepancy N/A i Return > Reason:
l 3.4.2-4 Controls and Displays in Rows Displays may be arrayed in rows as the upper portion of a panel, matched to controls arrayed in s_imilar rows below.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.2-5 Multi-Row Displays with Single-kow Controls T_wo or more rows of displays may be arranged above a single row of controls.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l O
l
i 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.4 Control-Displ y Integration Page 3-55
,_ 3.4.2 Groups of Controls and Displays 3.4.2-6 Consistent Practice i Arrangements of functionally similar controls and displays should conform to the same convention t_hroughout the control room.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason: l l
I 3.4.2-7 Control / Display Packages Modules should be selected and arranged to achieve maximum conformity with the principles )
described above.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
3.4.2-8 Separated Controls and Displays Where displays are on separated panels, they should be on the adjacent upper panel from their q associated controls.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy 1
NA Return > Reason:
3.4.2-9 Facing Panels R_ elated controls and displays should not be located on separate panels that face each other. ,
l OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
t
3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 3.4 Control-DisplayIntegrction Page 3-56 3.4.3 Dynamic Control Display Relationships 3.4.3-1 Rotary Controls '
i Rotary controls should turn clockwise to cause an increase in parameter value. Associated display movements should be: (1) Linear scales, up or to the right; (2) Digital displays, incre in value; (3) Strings of indicator lights, bottom-to-top or left-to-right; and (4) Circular meter pointers, clockwise.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A !
3 Return > Reason:
)
3.4.3-2 Linear Controls Linear controls should move up or to the right to cause an increase in parameter value. The associated display relationships should be: (1) Linear scales, up or to the right; (2) Digital displays, increasing in value; and (3) Strings ofindicator lights, bottom-to-top or left-to-right.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.3-3 Display Response Time Lag When there is a time lag between control actuation and ultimate system state, there should be an i_mmediate feedback indication of the process and direction of parameter change.[AI) oK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
3.4.3-4 Controls Controls should provide a capability to affect the parameter controlled easily, with the required level of precision.[AI]
l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
)
. - . _ . - . -- .. . . . - - . ~ . - ..
I 3 PROCESS CONTROL AND INPUT DEVICES NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
. 3.4 Control-DisplayIntegr tion Page 3-57 3.4.3 Dynamic Control Display Relationships
() 3.4.3-5 Displays Displays should provide a capability to distinguish significant levels of the system parameter controlled.
< OK Conseneet:
Descrepancy l N/A
$ Return > Reasoe:
3.4.3-6 Excess Precision ,
De precision of displays and controls should not greatly exceed that required.
)
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A
{
. Return > Reasos:
i
! 3.4.3-7 Feedback
) Feedback from the display should be apparent for any deliberate movement of a control.
OK Comenent:
Discrepancy I N/A l Return > Reason:
i I
, i J
i 1
1
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.1 Gen:ral Guidelines Page 4-1 4.1-1 VDU Alarm Message Lists s The alarm system should:
.
- Alert the operator to the fact that a system or process deviation exists;
- Inform the operator about the priority and the nature of the deviation; ,
+ Guide the operator's initial response to the deviation; and I
_ Confirm, in a timely manner, whether the operator's response corrected the deviation.[AI]
i OK Comment: i Discrepancy N/A 4
Return > Reason:
4.1-2 Alarm System Upgrade Functionality A new alarm system that is installed into an existing control room should support all of the operator functions that the old system supported, in addition to satisfying the functional !
. requirements of the SAR and various other functional criteria (such as those listed m )
Section 4.2).[AI] !
i oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: j t'
4.1-3 Consistency with the Main HSI The alarm system HS1 should be consistent with the standards and conventions used for the HSIs ;
i for other displays and controls in the control room.[AI]
OK Comment: )
Discrepancy 2
- N/A i
Return > Reason:
2 4.1-4 Conformance to HSI Design Review Guidelines Alarm system elements (e.g., displays and controls) should conform to general HSI guidance as
, well as alarm system guidelines.[AI]
1 oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
t
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.1 General Guidelines Page 4-2 4.1-5 Alarm System Validation The effectiveness of the alarm system should be validated through real-time, dynamic simulation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
, 4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
? 42 Altrm Definition Page 4-3 ,
lt# \
4.2-1 Alarm Selection The following criteria should be included in the basis for selecting alarm conditions: l e Monitoring critical safety functions and key parameters, :
e Preventing personnel hazards, e
Avoiding significant damage to equipment having a safety function, l 3
e Assuring that technical specifications are met, and j l _ Monitoring emergency procedure decision points.[AI]
e l
I oK Comment:
Discrepancy
]
N/A Return > Reason:
4.2-2 Timely Warning l Alarm set points should be determined to ensure that the operating crew can monitor and take appropriate action for each category of alarms, e.g., respond to out-of-tolerance conditions,in a timely manner.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l
N/A Return > Reason:
O 4.2-3 Nuisance Alarm Avoidance The determination of alarm setpoints should consider the trade-off between the timely alerting of an operator to off-normal conditions and the creation of nuisance alarms caused by establishing setpoints so close to the " normal" operating values that occasional excursions of no real consequence are to be expected.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.2 4 Darkboard Configuration Candidate alarms and setpoints should be chosen so that no alarms are active for the normal oyerating conditions of the plant.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 43 Al;rm Processing end Reduction Page 4-4 43-1 Assured Functionality Under High Alarm Conditions The alarm processing system should ensure that alarms which require immediate operator action or indicate a threat to plant critical safety functions are presented in a manner that supports rapid detection and understanding by the operator under all alarm loading conditions.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dhicrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
43-2 Alarm Reduction The number of alarm messages presented to the crew during off-normal conditions should be reduced by alarm processing techniques (from a no-processing baseline) to support the crew's ability to detect, understand, and act upon all alarms that are important to the plant condition within the necessary time.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
43-3 Alarm Signal Validation Sensor and other input signals should be validated to ensure that spurious alarms are not presented to plant personnel, due to sensor or processing system failure.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
43-4 Time Delay Processing The alarm system should incorporate the capability to apply time filtering and/or time delay to the al_ arm inputs to allow filtering of noise signals and to eliminate unneeded momentary alarms.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
l 4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i 43 Al rm Processing cnd Reduction Page 4-5 4
O 43-5 Alarm Status Separation V Status indications, messages that indicate the status of plant systems but are not intended to alert the operator to the need to take action, generally should not be presented via the alarm system display because they increase the demands on the operators for reading and evaluating alarm system messages.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
NA Return > Reason:
43-6 First-Out Processing As an aid to diagnostic procedures and root cause analysis, provision should be made for identifying the initiating event associated with automatic plant trips through the use of first-out
- alarms.[AI]
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1, f 43-7 Mode Dependence Processing
.i ( If a component's status or parameter value represents a fault in some plant modes and not others,
, k iyhould be alarrned only in the appropriate modes.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
1 43-8 System Configuration Processing l If a component's status or parameter value represents a fault in some system configurations and I
not others, it should be alarmed only in the appropriate configurations.[AI]
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy l NA Return > Reason: i i
l
}
!l
/
O j 1
i i
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 43 Alarm Processing cnd Reduction Page 4-6 43 9 Logical Consequences Processing If a single event invariably leads to subsequent alarmed events that are the direct consequence of this event, only the alarm message associated with the main event may be presented and the other alarm messages suppressed, so long as this does not interfere with the operators' use of alarm l information.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
43-10 Exceptions to Expected Alarm Patterns The system should notify the operator when " unexpected" alarms occur, if the alarm processing
)
logic can support such an analysis.[AI] j oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
43-11 Absence of Expected Alarm Patterns The system should notify the operator when " expected" alarms do not occur, if the alarm pr_ocessing logic can support such an analysis.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.3-12 Intelligibility of Processed Alarm Information Processing methods should not be so complex that operators have difficulty evaluating the meaning or validity of the resulting alarm messages.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.3-13 Access to Inputs Operators should have the capability of viewing inputs to the alarm processing system (e.g.,
s_ensor data).[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 n i 4.4 Alirm Prioritization end Avail:bility Page 4-7 fi 4.4-1 Prioritization Criteria b Alarm messages should be presented to the operators in prioritized form based on one or more prioritization dimensions to indicate immediacy of required operator action and challenges to
, plant safety.[AI]
OK Comment:
j Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 4.4-2 Number of Priority Levels
- De number of priority levels within a dimension should be no greater than four.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A i Return > Reason:
5 4.4-3 Access to Suppressed Alarms When alarm suppression is used, the operator should be able to access the alarm information that is_not displayed.[AI]
i oK Comment:
\ Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- _ 4.4-4 Filtered Alarms i Alarm filtering should only be employed where alarm messages have no current operational
{ significance to the crew's monitoring, diagnosis, decision making, procedure execution, and alarm
- response activities.[AI] .
oK Comment:
- Discrepancy 3
N/A Return > Reason:
A
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 D W h y Page 4-8 4.5.1 General Alarm Display Guidelines 4.5.1-1 Display Functions The alarm display should support the operator's ability to rapidly discem:
Priority (e.g., urgency for operator action and importance to plant safety);
- Distinct alarm states: new, acknowledged, and cleared;
- The first-out alarms for reactor trip; The need to access other displays to verify or clarify the alarm state; and
- The difference between alarms which can be canceled through ongoing corrective actions (i.e.,
_ by operations personnel) and alarms that require significant maintenance intervention.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.1-2 Coordination of Alarm Alerting and Informing Functions When alarm alerts are displayed separately from detailed alarm information, the design should support the operator in making rapid transitions between alerts and detailed information.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.1-3 Presentation of Alarm Priority with Detailed Alarm Information When alarm alerts are displayed separately from detailed alarm information, the detailed alarm information display should provide an indication of the priority and status of the alarm condition.[AI]
OK Comment: l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.14 Use of Spatially-Dedicated, Continuously Visible Displays Spatially-dedicated, continuously-visible (SDCV) alarm displays should be considered for:
Regulatory Guide 1.97 Category 1 parameters,
- Alarms that require short-term response by the operators, Main alarms used by operators in diagnosing and responding to plant upsets, and
_ Main alarms used by operators to maintain an overview of plant and system status.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- - -. = - - - _ - - , _.-
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1 4.5 Display Page 4-9 l 4.5.1 General Alarm Display Guidelines V 4.5.1-5 Alarm Graphics The graphics related to alarm presentation should be designed such that the display is fully contained in one VDU screen.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A
_ _ _ l Return > Reason:
)
4.5.1-6 Alarm Coding Consistency Coding (e.g., flash-rate, intensity, and color coding) conventions should be consistently applied
- t_hroughout alarm displays (e.g., on tiles and on VDUs).
)
oK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
N/A 1
, Return > Reason:
1
)
4.5.17 Multi Unit Alarms Alarms for any shared systems in multiple-unit plants should be duplicated in all control
(
(
rooms.[AI]
oK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i i
t 4
1 1
I
1 4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Dispt:y Page 4-10 4.5.2 Display of High-Priority Alarms 4.5.21 Importance/ Significance Be display of important alarms should override the display of alarms of lower importance.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Resan:
4.5.2-2 Simultaneous Display of High Priority Alarms For non-spatially dedicated alarm presentations such as VDU message lists, sufficient display area sh_ould be provided for the simultaneous viewing of all high-priority alarms.[AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A ;
1 Return > Reason:
4.5.2-3 Coding of Alarr.: Priority A_ method of coding the visual signals for the various priority levels should be employed.[AI] !
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: l l
l l
I 1
l l
O
- . _ . .-m . _ _m.. . . . . ~ .- m. , _ .- _ - . . . m. m . . . .
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 j 4.5 D';piry Page 4-il l 4.5.3 Display of Alarm Status )
[ T
- V 4.5.3-1 Indication of Alarm Status New, acknowledged, and cleared alarm states should have unique presentations to support the operators' ability to rapidly distinguish them.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.3 2 New Alarms hiew alarms should be indicated both by visual (e.g., flashing) and audible means.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 4.5.3-3 Notice of Undisplayed New Alarms If the operator is not currently viewing the VDU display where new, unacknowledged alarm messages appear, the alarm system should notify the operator that a new alarm message is p
g available, the priority of the alarm message, and the location where the alarm message can be fo_und.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.3-4 Acknowledged Alarms After the operator has acknowledged an alarm (e.g., pressed the acknowledge button), the alarm display should change to a visually distinct acknowledged state and the alerting function (e.g.,
audible tone) should cease.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I
]
I
(
l i
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Displ y Page 4-12 4.5.3 Display of Alarm Status 4.5.3 5 Clearing Alarms /Ringback if the operator is required to take action when an alarm clears (i.e., the parameter retums to the normal range from an abnormal range), the return to normal conditions should be indicated by visual and audible means.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
1 0
~
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 D'. play Page 4-13
- fs 4.5.4 Display of Shared Alarms l I 4.5.4-1 Minimize Shared Alarms Alarms with inputs from more than one plant parameter (shared alarms) should be minimized.[AI]
a OK Comment:
1 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
~
4.5.4 2 Shared Alarm Identification Operators should have the capability to access the individual alarm information when a shared a_larm activates.[AI]
j OK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A 1
i Return > Reason:
1 4
4.5.4-3 Shared Alarm Reflash l If a new parameter deviation has occurred before a preceding alarm has cleared, the shared alarm should return to the new alarm state (e.g., flashing).[AI]
] (s OK Comment:
i i j Descrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i
{
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 43 Displ y Page 4-14 4.5.5 Alarm Messages .
4.5.5.1 Content 4.5.5.1-1 Alarm Information Content The alarm should provide the following information: I
= Alarm title or legend; Alarm source,i.e., the particular sensor or group of sensors supplying the signal;
- Alarm priority;
= Setpoint and parameter values; e
Required immediate operator actions; and
_ Reference to procedure for more detailed follow-up actions.[AI]
OK Comment:
_ D'screpancy N/A l Return > Reason: l 4.5.5.1-2 Alarm Text / Legend Alarm text should be clearly understandable, use standard terminology, and address conditions specifically.[AI]
l OK Comment:
Discrepancy
' N/A Return > Reason:
l 4.5.5.1-3 Alarm Source The content of each message should provide information that identifies the alarm source.[AI]
I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.5.1-4 Alarm Priority Each alarm message should indicate its priodty.
OK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i
4 4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
) 43 Dispby Page 4-15 4.5.5 Alarm Messages
. 4.5.5.1 Content 4.5.5.1-5 Setpoint Values If an alarm condition requires verification before action is taken, the relevant setpoint limits sh_ould be included in the alarm message.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dlscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.5.1-6 Parameter Values Deviant parameter values should be included in the alarm message when alarm information is gesented on VDU or printer displays.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.5.1-7 Required Immediate Operator Actions p immediate operator actions should be presented or made available directly upon operator request
( when alarm information is presented on VDU or printer displays.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.5.1-8 Reference to Procedures When alarm information is presented on VDU or printer displays, references to alorm response gocedures should be provided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.5.1-9 Reference to Other Panels Alarms which refer the operator to another, more detailed display located outside the primary operating area should be minimized.[AI]
OK Comment:
r% Discrepancy
( N/A Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Displ+y Page 4-16 4.5.5 Alarm Messages 4.5.5.2 Format 4.5.5.2-1 Format for Tile Displays De format of messages on alarm tiles or tile-like displays should be consistent for all alarms.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.5.2 2 Format of VDU and Printer Messages De alarm message format should be consistent for VDU and printer message displays.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Display Page 4-17 4.5.6 Coding Methods
[-
s 4.5.6.1 General 4.5.6.11 Coding Effectiveness The coding scheme used by the alarm system should assure rapid detection and interpretation by
, the operators under all control room operating conditions.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
N/A Return > Reason:
l 4.5.6.12 Coding Dimension Discriminability -
Each level of a coding dimension should be easily and readily distinguishable from the other levels.[AI]
OK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i
! 4.5.6.13 Unique Coding Dimensions p For coding techniques being used to support detection and recognition of status within an alarm dimension, each coding technique should represent one dimension of alarm classification.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 4.5.6.1-4 Coding Complexity The number of different coding techniques should be kept to a minimum, so that the overall i coding system does not become difficult to understand.
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
/
\
L
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 43 Displ y Pac 4-18 4.5.6 Coding Methods 4.5.6.2 Visual 4.5.6.2-1 Visual Signal for Important Alarms A_ flashing visual signal should be included for all important alarms.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.2-2 Redundant Coding Dimensions Redundant codes (e.g., fast flashing or bright) should be used for alarms that require rapid operator action.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.2-3 Flash Rate Flash rates should be fn .a :hree to five flashes per second with approximately equal on and off ti_mes.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.2-4 Brightness Levab for Transilluminated Displays For transilluminated distjays, such as lighted alarm tiles, the brightest state should be no more than 300 percent brigl.Ler than the inactivated state, and the dim state should be at least 10 gercent brighter than toe inactivated state.[AI]
OK Commenu Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.2-5 Brightness Levels for VDU Displays For VDU displays, the bright state should be at least 100 percent brighter than the inactivated s_ tate.[AI]
OK Comment:
C &*M'Cy N/A Return > Reason:
l, 4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Dispisy Page 4-19 4.5.6 Coding Methods w s) 4.5.6.2 Visual 4.5.6.2-6 Color Detectability Low-intensity indications (e.g., dark red) in the periphery of the visual field should be avoided where color coding is used, since they may not be readily detected.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
i 4.5.6.2 7 Spatial Coding i Spatial coding may be used to indicate alarm importance.[AI]
oK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 j 4.5.6.2-8 Suppressed Visual Codes If the visual coding used to indicate alarm status is automatically suppressed or delayed during
' p
- high alarm volume conditions or the presence of more important alarms, they should be automatically presented after the more important alarms have been addressed.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
! N/A
- Return > Reason
4 h
1 f~ %
U
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Dpby Page 4-20 4.5.6 Coding Methods 4.5.63 Audible Codes 4.5.63-1 Audio Signet forImportant Alarms An auditory signal should be used to alert the operator to the existence of a new alarm, or any oJer condition of which the operator must be made immediately aware.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.63-2 Auditory Coding of Remote Alarms Auditory coding techniques should be used when the operator workstation associated with the alarm is not in the primary operating area.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.63-3 Distinguishable Auditory Signals The auditory signal associated with a SDCV alarm should be easily distinguishable from the j auditory signal associated with an alarm message displayed by other means (e.g., on a VDU message display).
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
4.5.63-4 Audible Signals for Alarm States The tones used for incoming alarms should be separate and distinct from tones used to signify
" clearing" alarms, which should be momentary or "self-silencing."
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 43 D2piry Page 4-21 4.5.6 Coding Methods 4.5.63 Audible Codes 4.5.63-5 Reminder Audible Signals if the tone to indicate an unacknowledged alarm automatically turns off after an interval of time, a reminder tone should be presented to alert the operator to the continued presence of an u_nacknowledged alarm.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
4.5.63 6 Reset of Auditory Alert The auditory alert mechanism should automatically reset when it has been silenced.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
4.5.63-7 Interference Among Signals s A_udio alarm signals should not conflict with other auditory codes or signals.[AI]
( OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
4.5.63-8 Readily Identifiable Source The operator should be able to quickly determine where to direct attention (e.g., which functional area of the plant or which station) from the characteristics of the auditory alert and/or the source fr_om which the auditory alert originated.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
4.5.63-9 Signal Level The signal intensity should be such that operators can reliably discem the signal above the ambient control room noise.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy t MA Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 D.'; play Page 4-22 4.5.6 Coding Methods 4.5.6.3 Audible Codes 4.5.6.3 10 Avoid Startle The signal should capture the operator's attention but should not cause irritation or a startle reaction.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.3-11 Manual Disable / Adjustment of Signal Intensity M_anual disable or adjustment of auditory signal intensity (loudness) should be avoided.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.3-12 Sound Sources The number and placement of loudspeakers should be such that auditory signals are free of di_stortion and are equally audible at any operator work station in the primary operating area.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
4.5.6.3-13 Auditory Signal Discriminability Each audio signal should be unambiguous and easily distinguishable from every other tone in the control room.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.3-14 Number of Tonal Signals When information is coded by the pitch of narrow-band signals (i.e., tones), no more than three frequencies should be used.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 D.':pl3y Page 4-23 4.5.6 Coding Methods
[-
\
4.5.6.3 Audible Codes 4.5.6.3-15 Frequency of Tonal Signals Center frequencies should be widely spaced within a range of from 500 to 3,000 Hz, although a wider range of from 200 to 5,000 Hz may be acceptable.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 5 Return > Reason:
4.5.6.3 16 Pulse Codes t N_o more than three pulse repetition rates should be used for coding purposes.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.3-17 Number of Frequency Modulated Signals N_o more than three modulated frequency codes for audible alarms should be used.[ Al]
] p oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
, Return > Reason:
i 4.5.6.3-18 Center Frequency of Frequency Modulated Signals If modulation of frequency (Hz) of a signal is used to denote information, the center frequencies
- should be between 500 and 1000 Hz.
I OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A 4 Return > Reason:
4.5.6.3 19 Audio Pattern Codes If sequences of tones are used to represent information, the patterns should be easily recogniz-able.[AI]
l OK Comment: !
Discrepancy ,
N/A Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Display Page 4-24 4.5.6 Coding Methods 4.5.6.3 Audible Codes 4.5.6.3 20 Compound Codes A_ maximum of nine auditory signals should be used when coded in two or more dimensions.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
_ )
N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.6.3-21 Intensity Coding C_oding of auditory signals by intensity (loudness) should not be used.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
l l
l t
l O
l l
1 I. -
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 Dispiry Page 4-25
- 4.5.7 Organization of Alarms C'
\
4.5.7.1 Spatially Dedicated, Continuously Visible Alarm Displays 4.5.7.1-1 Functional Grouping of Alarms Alarms within a display should be grouped by function, system, or other logical organization.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 4.5.7.12 Separation of Functional Groups Alarm functional groups should be visually distinct from one another.
OK Comment:
, Discrepancy
', N/A 1
Return > Reason:
4.5.7.1-3 Group Labels System / functional groups should be clearly delineated and labeled such that the operating crew y can easily determine which systems have alarms that have not yet cleared and which system is affected by a particular incoming alarm.
- OK Comment
5 Discrepancy 4
N/A
- Re' urn > Reason
4.5.7.1-4 Coordinate Designation Identifiers l 4 If alarm displays are organized in matrices, the vertical and horizontal axes of the displays should b_e labeled with alphanumerics for ready coordinate designation of a particular visual element.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
l 4.5.7.15 Density of Alarm Elements An alarm tile display matrix should contain a maximum of 50 alarms per matrix.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.5 D2piry Page 4-26 4.5.7 Organization of Alarms 4.5.7.1 Spatially Dedicated, Continuously Visible Alarm Displays 4.5.7.1-6 Logical Arrangement of Alarms Alarms should be ordered to depict naturally occurring relationships.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.7.17 Consistent Ordering Alarm parameters (e.g., level, flow, pressure, and temperature) arranged in one order on one gnel should be arranged in the same order on other panels.[AI]
OK Coinment:
~
l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.5.7.1-8 Alarm Display Identification Label E_ach group of alarm displays should be identifieri by a label above the display.[AI]
OK Commem:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
i l
l l
l 9
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 ,
I 4.5 Dispisy Page 4-27
~ m 4.5.7 Organization of Alarms 4.5.7.2 Alarm Message Lists 1 4.5.7.2-1 Listing by Priority Lists of alarm messages should be segregated by alarm priority with highest priority alarms being listed first.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reamn:
4 4.5.7.2-2 Message Listing Options l In addition to priority grouping, operators should have the capability to group alarm messages l according to operationally relevant categories, such as function, chronological order, and status (unacknowledged, acknowledged / active, cleared).[AI] l OK Comment: )
Discr pancy N/A Return > Reason:
(' '
s 4.5.7.2-3 Blank Lines Alphanumeric alarm lists should have a separation (blank row) every four or five alphanumeric I
messages.
OK Comment:
~
l Discrepancy N/A i Return > Reason:
i 4.5.7.2-4 Scrolling of Message List The method of adding alarm messages to the list should preclude message scrolling.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A i
Return > Reason:
4 4.5.7.2 5 Message Overflow l Alphanumeric alarm messages that overflow the first page of alarm messages should be kept on subsequent alarm pages.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4 6 Control Page 4-28 4.6.1 General Alarm Control Guidelines 4.6.1 1 Provisions for Control Functions Separate controls should be provided for silence, acknowledgment, reset (acknowledging an alarm that has cleared and retuming it to normal), and testing.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang NA Return > Reason:
4.6.1-2 Distinct Coding of Control Functions Alarm system controls should be distinctively coded for easy recognition.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang MA Return > Reason:
4.6.13 Consistent Layout of Control Group Each set of alarm system controls should have the functions in the same relative locations.[AI] ;
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
4.6.1-4 Separate Controls forTile and VDU Alarms If the alarm system contains both alarm tiles and VDU alarm displays, each should have its own se_t of operator controls.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang MA Return > Reason:
4.6.15 Defeating Controls A_larm system control designs should not allow the operator to defeat the control.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
O
- 4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
- 4.6 Control Page 4-29 l 4.6.1 General Alarm Control Guidelines
't .
I 4.6.1-6 Access to New Undisplayed Alarms A VDU-based alarm system should provide rapid access to any new alarm messages that are not j shown on the current display.[AI] l l -
ox comm.ni: l 2
i i Dinnpancy ;
1
- N/A l I
i Retura > Reason: )
1
)
I i
i i
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.6 Control Page 4-30 4.6.2 Silence Controls 4.6.2-1 Global Silence Capability It should be possible to silence an auditory alert signal from any set of alarm system controls in the primary operating area.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.6.2-2 Manual Silencing Auditory signals should be silenced manually by the operators unless this interferes with other more critical operator actions.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
l l
l l
0
- 4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.C Control Page 4-31 4.tb Acknowledge Controls N 4.6.3-1 Effect of Acknowledge Control An alarm acknowledgement control should terminate the flashing of an alarm and have it continue 1.
at steady illumination until the alarm is cleared.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy 1
l N/A
' Return > Reason:
4.6.3-2 Acknowledgement Locations Acknowledgement should be possible only from locanons where the alarm message can be read.[Al]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A e Return > Reason:
4.6.3-3 Acknowledgement of Alarm Messages i
Non-SDCV alarms should only be acknowledged when the alarm message is on the screen.[AI]
[ -
OK Comment:
( Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 l
J 4
l I /
V
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4 6 Control Page 4-32 4.6.4 Reset Controls 4.6.4-1 Effect of Reset Control The reset control should place the alarm system in an unalarmed state after an alarm has cleared.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
4.6.4 2 Appropriate Use of Manual Reset A manual reset sequence should be used where it is important to explicitly inform operators of a cleared condition that had once been deviant.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
4.6.4-3 Appropriate Use of Automatic Reset l An nutomat c reset sequence should be available where operators have to respond to numerous a_larms or where it is essential to quicidy reset the system.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
4.6.4-4 Reset Control Location The reset control should be effective only from locations at which plant personnel know which a_larm they are resetting.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
O
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.7 Automated, Dynamic, and Modifir.ble Char:cteristics Page 4-33 4.71 Automated Alarm System Configuration d if the alarm system automatically changes operational configurations under some alarm situations, then these configuration changes should be coupled with an alert to the operator and an indication that the configuration has changed.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.7-2 Operator-Selectable Alarm System Configuration If the alarm system provides operator-selectable operational configurations, then these co_nfiguration changes should be coupled with an indication of the present configuration.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.7-3 Acknowledgement of Alarm System Configuration Changes Operator acknowled.gement (or confirmation) should be required if a significant alarm system l
/m configuration change is to be made either automatically or by operator selection.[AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reeson:
4.7-4 Operator Defined Alarms /Setpoints The alarm system may provide temporary, operator-defined alarms and operator-defined set points for specific conditions where such alarms are determined to be of assistance to the operators in selected evolutions (e.g., temporary alarms to support increased monitoring of a problem component, or at other times when the operator wants to know of a parameter trend that is_ approaching a limit).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
n-
l 1
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.7 Automat:d, Dynamic,and Modifi;ble Characteristics Page 4-34 4.7-5 Interference of Operator-Defined Alarms /Setpoints with Existing Alarms Operator-defined alarms and setpoints should not override or interfere with the existing alarms and setpoints.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.7-6 Control of Operator-Defined Alarms /Setpoints The alarm system should provide clear indication of operator defined alarms and setpoints as distinct from the alarm /setpoints designed into the system.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 4.7-7 Automatic Mode-Defined Setpoints If an alarm system provides automatic adjustment of setpoints for different plant modes or condi-tions,it should be evaluated whether operator acknowledgement / confirmation of the significant changes is necessary.[Al]
oK Comment:
Dlscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.8 Reliability, Test, Mrintenance,and Feilure Indication Page 4-35 l 4.8.1 Reliability Q 4.8.1-1 Design for Reliability The alarm system should be designed so that no single failure will result in the loss of a large number of alarms.
oK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- 4.8.12 VDU Reliability Where alarms are presented on a VDU as the primary display, operators should be able to access the alarms from more than one VDU.[AI]
i oK Comment:
Dbcrepancy
_ )
N/A Return > Reawn:
4.8.1-3 Dual Light Bulbs Annunciator tile-type displays should be designed with dual light bulbs so that a single bulb failure p will not interfere with the operator's detection of the alarm condition.[AI]
I oK Comment:
} Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 4.8.14 Flasher Failure Mode 1 I
In case of flasher failure of an active alarm element, the element should assume a highly salient state such as a high flash rate or a steady on (e.g., illuminated) state rather than a less salient state
, such as off.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
i
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4,8 Relir.bility, Test, Maintenance, and Feilure Indice. tion Page 4-36 4.8.2 Test 4.8.2-1 Test Availability Test controls should be available to initiate operational test conditions for all essential aspects of t_he alarm system (including processing logic, audible alarms, and visual alarm indications).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.8.2 2 Testing Requirement Periodic testing of the alarm system should be required and controlled by administrative procedure.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.8 Reliability, Test, M:intenance, end Failure Indication Page 4-37 4.8.3 Maintenance
- j
\ 4.8.31 Design for Maintainability i The alarm system should be designed so that maintenance activities can be performed with l minimal interference with the activities of the operators.[AI]
oK Comment:
{
Discrepang
~
1 N/A j Return > Reason:
4.8.3 2 Tagged-Out Alarms Tagging out an alarm (taking it out of service) should require disabling of the associated visual and audio signals.[AI]
oK Comment:
l Discrepancy 1 N/A Return > Reason:
4.8.3-3 Out-of Service Alarm Indication Cues for prompt recognition of an out-of-service alarm should be designed into the system.[AI]
. oK Comment:
k Discrrpancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 4.8.3-4 Extended Duration Illumination l If an alarm tile must be "ON" for an extended period during normal operations because of equipment repair or replacement,it should be (1) distinctively coded for positive recognition dying this period, and (2) controlled by administrative procedures.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.8.3-5 Tile Cover Replacement if a lamp replacement requires legend tile removal, there should be a way to ensure that the tile is reJ laced in the correct location.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
,b} Return > Reason:
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4 8 Rtliability, Test, Mrintenance, cnd Fellure Indication Page 4-38 4.8.3 Maintenance 4.8.3-6 Hazard Avoidance Lamp replacement should not pose an electrical shock hazard.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.8.3 7 Operator Aids for Lamp Replacement O_prator aids should be provided if needed for lamp replacement.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.8 Reli:bility, Test, Mrintenance, cnd Feilure Indication Page 4-39 l 4.8.4 Failure Indication I 4.8.41 Alarm System Failure Indication Operators should be given prompt indication of a failure of the alarm system or its major j subcomponents.
I OK Comment:
_ Discrepancy
- N/A j Return > Reason:
i i
4 ALARMS NUREG 0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.9 Alarm Response Procedures (ARPs) Page 4-40 4.9-1 ARP Scope ARPs should be available for alarm conditions that require an operator response which affects the plant process control system or plant equipment.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: _
4.9-2 ARP Access Operators should have immediate access to ARPs from the location at which the alarm messages a_re read.[AI)
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.9-3 ARP Content ARPs should contain the following information:
The system / functional groep to which the alarm belongs,
- The exact alarm text or legend.
- The alarm source (i.e., sensor (s) sending the signal, including processing or signal validation logic, and the actuating device (s) for the alarm with a reference to a schematic diagram on which such devices can be found), I
= Alarm setpoints, I
- Priority,
- Potential underlying causes for the alarm (e.g., low water level-- feed flow deficient in the long term),
a Required immediate operator actions, including actions the operator can take to confirm the existence of the alarm condition, I
+
Actions which occur automatically when the alarm occurs (and which the operator should verify as having taken place),
- Followup actions, and
+
_ Pertinent references.
OK comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4.9 Alarm Response Procedures (ARPs) Page 4-41
^ 4.9-4 Consistency Information in ARPs should be consistent with information on control boards,in the alarm system, in I&C procedures used to calibrate alarm setpoints, in controlling documents that determine setpoints (e.g., Technical Specifications and accident analyses), in P& ids, and in other plant procedures.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.9-5 ARP Format The ARP format should:
Highlight the ARP identifier on each page of the procedure,
- Highlight important items, Locate information categories in the same position on each page, Consistently present information throughout the ARP, and
_ Minimize the need for operators to page back and forth to obtain the information.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
o -
I 1
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 410 Control-Dispt:y Integration end Layout Page 4-42 4.10-1 Display and Line of Sight Visible alarm indications should be located within about 60 degrees on either side of the direct line of sight of the operator's normal work position.
oK Comment:
Discrepaucy N/A Return > Reason:
4.10 2 Interference from Nearby Indicators Indicator lights used to present information about the state of equipment should not be located near unilluminated display elements used to represent acceptable plant conditions.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.10-3 Location of Alarm System Displays and Controls Alarm displays and controls should be located in close proximity so that the display can be read ,
while operating the controls.[AI]
l 1
OK Comment: '
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.10-4 Location of First Out Alarms First-out displays should be located at the main workstation for the system and/or at a plant overview display visible to the crew.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4.10-5 Consistent Ordering The ordering (e.g., left-to-right positioning) of displayed alarm groups should be consistent with t_he ordering of displays and controls of related plant systems and components.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- . - . - . _-. -_. . = - . . _ . . .. - . - - - ..
4 ALARMS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4,10 Control Displ:y Integr: tion cnd Layout Page 4-43 (m 4.10-6 Location for Prompt Response Alarm displays and controls should be arranged and located such that the operating crew
- member (s) who must respond to an alarm can access the alarm information in sufficient time to respond adequately.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- 4.10-7 Location for Access to Process Controls and Displays ;
Visual alarm panels should be located near the controls and displays which are required for !
corrective or diagnostic action in response to the alarm.[AI]
t OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Ruson:
a, v I l(
{
i i
1 s
a-4--OMAu--4 MAMA-4A-9 ---AoB5--3en~-AMA,*, o4 ASw A1b omL&LA aMe ~AmA"M KH-mL**-%^^A *GMe&-0M-mMMM&-W4M434MM"*Me4 MM---*"4--M M4eM44a-^wn""'- "M-M-mA-M^3'M*,
') i l
1 9
l f
l i
4 0
1 1
l l
1 l
t I
d i
J s i l
i e
1 O
l f
f 9
l 5 ANALYSIS AND DECISION AIDS NUREG-0700, Rey 1, Vol. 2
5.1 Knowledge-B
sed Systems (KBS) Page 5-1 5.1-1 Consistency with User Task Requirements
\ The support provided by the KBS should be consistent in content and format with the cognitive sgategies and mental models employed by the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
5.1-2 Consistency with General HSI The KBS should be fully integrated with and consistent with the rest of the HSI.[AI]
l I
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
5.13 Interaction With Ongoing Tasks U_se of the KBS should riot require canceling ongoing tasks.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy f NA Retu. m > Reason:
I 5.1-4 CriticalInformation Alert if critical information becomes available during KBS utilization, the system should alert the user to_the critical information.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
5.1-5 Minimize Querying of Use_-
KBS querying of the user for information should be minimized.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
v
5 ANALYSIS AND DECISION AIDS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
, 5.1 Knowledge-Bised Systems (KBS) Page 5-2 5.16 DialogueSequencing Flexibility The user-KBS dialogue should be flexible in terms of the type and sequencing of user input the K_BS will accept.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy 1 N/A Return > Reason:
5.1-7 Strategy Planning Capability The KBS should provide the capability to plan a strategy for addressing a problem.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
5.1-8 User Supported Strategy Selection When the KBS is capable of a range of problem-solving strategies, it should be capable of accepting direction from the user in terms of which strategy to employ.
OK Comn.ent:
Dhcrepancy N/A I R urn > Reason:
5.I.9 Simulation Mode Command and Identification If the KBS be : timulation mode, entering the simulation mode should require an explicit command armi result in a distinguishable change in system orpt.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dberepancy N/A Return > Esason:
5.1-10 Explanation Capability The KBS should be capable ofinteractively explaining its rules, knowledge base, and problem so_lutions at any point during a user-KBS transaction.[AI] !
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
h
\
l l
l
5 ANALYSIS AND DECISION AIDS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 ,
5.1 Knowl:dg:-BLsed Systems (KBS) Page 5-3
[m 5.1-11 User Control of Explanation Detail D) The level of detail ofinformation presented as part of an explanation orjustification should be under the control of the user.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
5.1-12 Indication of Certainty The KBS should represent its certainty in the correctness of analyses and provide the rationale i underlying the certainty estimation.[AI]
$ OK Comment:
Discrepancy 3
N/A Return > Reason:
5.1-13 Inadequate Knowledge Alert The KBS should alert the user when a problem or situation is beyond its capabilities.[AI]
OK Comment: l Discrepancy 1 (_/ N/A Return > Reason:
, 5.1-14 Graphic Representation of Rules The KBS should be able to graphically represent system relationships,its rules network, and reasoning process.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
5.1-15 Highlight of Status Changes After KBS Utilization At the completion of a user-KBS session, the KBS should update and highlight changes in the status of important system information.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A _
Return > Reason:
5 ANALYSIS AND DECISION AIDS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 5.1 Knowledge B: sed Systems (KBS) Page 5-4 5.1 16 Post Hoc Rule-Event Recall The KBS explanation facility should have the capability to recall each invoked rule and associate it_with a specific event (i.e., question or conclusion ) to explain the rationale for the event.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
j 5.1-17 Rapid Interaction Retrieval The system should permit rapid retrieval of previous exchanges between the user and the KBS.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
5.1-18 liardcopy of KBS Utilization The user should be capable of requesting a hardcopy of data including screen displays (text or graphics), data employed during a consultation, summaries of consultations, lists of rules / facts invoked during a consultation, and summaries of hypotheses tested.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.1 Gen:ral Communication Guidelines Page 6-1 6.1-1 Accessibility 5 U Communications functions and/or equipment should be accessible from the user's normal working l_ocation.[AI]
OK Comment: ;
o-e .n, l
] N/A Return > Reason:
6.1-2 Instructions
- Instructions should be provided for use of each communication system, including suggested ;
alternatives if a system becomes inoperable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.1-3 Outgoing Emergency Messages Priority procedures should be established for the transmission of emergency messages from the co_ntrol room by any of the communication systems, g OK Comment:
1 Discrepancy N/A Return > Roewn:
6.1-4 Incoming Emergency Messages Procedures should be established for handling communications during an emergency, and these ,
procedures must be known by all operators.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l 1
Return > Reason: l 6.15 Minimal User .ictions C_ommunication procedures should be designed to minimae required user actions.[AI]
OK Comment: I Discrepancy N/A 1 l
Return > Reason: I
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.1 G:neral Communication Guidelines Page 6-2 6.16 Communication Flexibility Users should have flexibility in communications methods.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
I 0;
1
l 6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 6,2 Speech Based Communication Page 6-3 I 6.2.1 General Requirements j 6.2.11 Comfort C_ommunication equipment to be worn should be designed to preclude discomfort.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Di screpancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.1-2 Hands Free Operation C_ommunication equipment should be designed to permit hands-free operation.[AI] ,
oK Comment:
Discrepancy I N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.1-3 Frequency Response Microphones and associated amplification equipment should be designed to respond optimally to that part of the speech spectrum most essential to speech intelligibility (i.e.,200 to 6,100 Hz).[AI]
OK Comment:
h,)
i
(,./
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.1-4 Microphone Dynamic Range The dynamic range of a microp;ione used with a selected amplifier should be great enough to admit variations in signal input of at least 50 dB.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason: !
6.2.15 Microphone Noise Shields When ambient noise is high (85 dB(A) or greater), the microphone should be put in a noise s_hield.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
- O i
O l l
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4 62 Speech Based Communication Page 6-4 6.2.1 General Requirements 6.2.1-6 Noise Canceling Microphones In very loud, low frequency noise environments (100 dB overall), noise canceling microphones sh_ould be used.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Ressue:
6.2.1-7 Signal Processing If the environment or the speech transmission equipment are such that the signal-to-noise ratio of the speech is degraded, signal processing techniques should be used to maintain speech i_ntelligibility.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.1-8 Speaker Frequency Range Loudspeakers, carpieces, and headphone elements should respond uniformly (plus or minus 5 dB) over the range 100 to 4,800 Hz.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.19 Binaural IIeadsets For High Noise Environments l
l If listeners will be working in high ambient noise (85 dB(A) or above), binaural headsets should
. be provided rather than monaural headsets.[AI]
l ^
OK Comment:
\
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O I
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.2 Speech-Based Communication Page 6-5 6.2.1 General Requirements 6.2.1-10 Loudspeakers for Multi Channel Monitoring When several channels are to be monitored simultaneously by means of loudspeakers, the speakers should be mounted at least 10 degrees apart in the horizontal plane frontal quadrant, ranging radially from 45 degrees left to 45 degrees right of the operator's normal forward facing position.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.1-11 Volume Controls Accessible volume or gain controls should be provided for each communication receiving channel (e.g., loudspeakers or headphones) with sufficient electrical power to drive sound pressure level to_at least 100 dB overall when using two earphones.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
( 6.2.1-12 Squelch Control When communication channels are to be continuously monitored, each channel should be provided with a signal-activated switching device (squelch control) to suppress channel noise d_uring no-signal periods.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.1-13 Periodic Maintenance Tests Periodic tests should be performed on all communication systems to ensure that messages remain in_telligible under changes in ambient noise levels that may have occurred since the last check.
oK Comn' ent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
bI
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.2 Speech Hased Communication Page 6-6 6.2.2 Conventional Telephone Systems 6.2.21 Ilandset Size and Shape The size and shape of handsets should be compatible with operator's hand size and mouth-ear distance (standard telephone dimensions are acceptable).
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.2-2 IIandset Design Handset earpieces should maintain firm ear contact while the transmitter is positioned in front of the mouth.
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.2-3 Retractable IIandset Cords C_ords should be of nonkink or self-retracting type.
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.2-4 IIandset Cord Length C_ords should be of sufficient length to permit reasonable operator mobility.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.2-5 IIandset Cord Position Cords should be positioned so as to avoid entangling critial controls or endangering passing traffic.
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i 63 Speech Based Communication Page 6-7 1 6.2.2 Conventional Telephone Systems 6.2.2-6 Handset Cradles Vertically mounted handset cradles should be designed and located to prevent the hr.ndset from being knocked out of the cradle by passing traffic. I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.2-7 Multiple Instruments Where multiple telephone instruments are located close together (e.g., on a single desk), they should be coded to indicate circuit or function.
OK Comment:
, Discrvpancy N/A Return > Reason:
i 6.2.2-8 Press-to-Talk Button If a press-to-talk button is used, the button should be convenient to both left-and right-hand
, operation.
OK Comment:
\
, Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.2-9 Switching Mechanism Switching should be designed and/or programmed to minimize delay in making desired connections under both normal and emergency conditions.[AI]
OK Comrnent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.2-10 Telephone Ringing De volume of ringing should be adjustable at the individual telephone instrument.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A g Return > Reason:
\
\
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.2 Speech Hased CommunicStion Page 6-8 6.2.2 Conventional Telephone Systems 6.2.2-11 Announcing Use The transmitter should be compatible with the rest of the announcing system when used as the microphone input to the announcing system.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
l l
l l
l 1
0
i 6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.2 Speech Based Communication Page 6-9 l 6.2.3 Sound Powered Telephone Systems i G l 6.2.31 Feedback I Within engineering constraints imposed by sound-powering, the system should provide in-phase i feedback to the user.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.3 2 Headsets Headsets should reflect the following design requirements: (1) Earphone cushioning to provide comfort for extended periods of wear, (2) Earphones should cover the outer ear without causing uncomfortable pressure., (3) The earpiece should be held firmly in place, yet be easy to remove, and (4) A well-marked and accessible place should be provided for headset stowage.
OK Cosiment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.3 3 Ringing
/O If ringing is not installed, the user should be able to directly switch the sound-powered transmitter b to the paging system so that a desired party can be called to the line.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.3-4 Jack Provisions Plug-in jacks for the sound-powered system should be provided within the, ontrol room.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.3-5 Switching When used, patch panels should be conspicuously marked and located in reasonably accessible l places.[AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
\
Return > Reason:
i l
1 l
6 INTERoPERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.2 Speech Hased Communication Page 6-10 6.2.4 Portable Radio Transceivers 6.2.41 Appropriate Use Walkie-talkies should be used in both emergency and normal operations for two-way communications beyond the range ofinstalled telephone connections or as a convenient alternative to the sound-powered telephone.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.4-2 Sound Quality Walkie-talkies should realize the same quality desired throughout all of the communications systems within the engineering constraints imposed by radio frequency spectrum availability and by design for easy portability.
oK Comment:
Discrepance N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.4-3 Area Coverage Modulation and a radio frequency should be chosen, as FCC regulations permit, to provide broad-a_rea walkie-talkie communication to the control room.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dkscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.4-4 Packaging To the extent permitted by design for effective electrical / radio frequency function, walkie-talkies should be small, light, and easy to carry. The microphone should be integrated into the t_ransceiver package.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
9
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i' 6.2 Speech Based Communication Page 6-11 6.2.4 Portable Radio Transceivers 6.2.4-5 Party Identification !
Procedures should provide for unambiguous identification of the speaker when there are more than two parties on a channel operating at separate locations.
l oK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I 6.2.4 6 Battery Replenishment .
l A_ supply of fresh replacement batteries should be stowed in an accessible, well-marked space.[AI]
oK Comment:
- Discrepancy N/A 9
Return > Reason:
i i
j j U s
I 1
1 1
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.'1, Vol. 2 6.2 Speech-Based Communication Page 6-12 6.2.5 Announcing Systems 6.2.5-1 Intelligibility and Coverage The system should provide rapidly intelligible messages to all areas where personnel subject to a page may be located.(AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.5 2 Microphone Characteristics If the powered telephone system is used to provide microphone input to the announcing system, the relephone system should contain transmitters of quality compatible with that of the announcing system.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.5-3 Loudspeaker Location Speakers should be provided in the control room and other areas where control room personnel operations might be (e.g., restrooms, eating areas, and locker rooms).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.5-4 Speech Clarity Since proper speech over an announcing system differs from normal conversation, operators sh_ould be familiarized with the proper way to speak on the announcing system.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
)
l Return > Reason:
6.2.5-5 Loudspeaker Volume Speaker volume should be adjusted to ensure that speaker communications will not prevent de_tection of auditory alarms.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
s j 6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 j 6.2 Speech Based Communication Page 6-13
- , 6.2.5 Announcing Systems
, 6.2.5-6 Priority i Control room inputs to the plant announcing system should have priority over any other ,
l input.[AI] )
3 OK Comment: l 1
- Discrepency !
~
l
- ^
} Return > Reason:
1 1
a i
1 i
d I
t l
1 i
i a
$ l d
4 l
l l
l l
l l
l
, ~ -- - ,-
6 INTERcPERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.2 Speech Based Communication Page 6-14 6.2.6 Other Communications Systems 6.2.61 Fixed-Base UlIF Transceivers A fixed-base UHF transceiver may be used for normal emergency communications between the control room and the following locations similarly equipped with fixed-base transceivers:
Dispatcher, Security, and Utility Headquarters (if within UHF range).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.6-2 Point-to-Point Intercom Systems Intercom systems should be provided to interconnect the control room with important plant areas and other areas where control room or operating personnel might be.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
l 9
I 6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 6.2 Speech Based Communication Page 6-15 6.2.7 Emergency Communications
- 6.2.7-1 Backup Equipment Provisions should be made to assure complete intemal and external communications capabilities during emergencies.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
N/A Return > Reason:
6.2.7-2 Equipment Usability Communications equipment should be usable by personnel wearing protective gear without !
- impediment to their tasks.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
! Return > Reason:
6.2.7-3 Voice Communications with Masks Emergency face masks should be equipped with diaphragms that are specially designed to transmit
.f 'N s2eech [AI]
OK Comment: ;
q Discrepancy N/A I Return > Reason:
i s'
t v
6 INTER. PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 63 Ccmputer Based Communication Page 6-16 6.3.1 General 6.3.1-1 Interactive Communication Users should be able to communicate interactively with other users who are currently using the same system.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.12 Interaction With OngoingTasks U_sers should be able to communicate with each other without canceling ongoing tasks.
oK Comment:
Ducrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.1-3 FunctionalIntegration Computer-based communications should be integrated with other information handling functions within a system.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.1-4 Consistent Procedures Procedures for sending and receiving messages should be consistent from one transaction to another.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.3.15 Control by Explicit User Action B_oth sending and receiving messages should be accomplished by explicit user action.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 63 Computer-Based Communic tion Page 6-17 O 63.1 General 63.16 Automatic Queuing The computer should provide automatic queuing of outgoing messages pending confirmation of t_ransmission, and incoming messages pending their review and disposition.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.1-7 Interrupt Users should be able to interrupt message preparation, review, or cisposition, and then resume a_ny of those tasks from the point ofinterruption.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.18 Message Highlighting Software capabilities should be provided to annotate transmitted data with appropriate
,O highlighting to emphasize alarm / alert conditions, priority indicators, or other significant ,
( in_ formation that could affect message handling.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.1-9 Automatic Record Keeping A_ log of data transmissions should be automatically maintained.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
[h
(
x
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.3 Computer. Based Communication Page 6-18 63.2 Preparing Messages 63.2-1 Automatic Message Formatting When message formats should conform to a defined standard or structure, prestored formats sjiould be provided to aid users in message preparation.[AI]
OK Comment: l Discrepancy I N/A )
l Return > Reason: j 6.3.2-2 Message Composition Compatible with Data Entry Procedures for composing messages should be compatible with general data entry procedures, especially those for text editing.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.3.2-3 Variable Message Length U_sers should be able to prepare messages of any length.[ AIJ OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.3.2-4 Incorporate Existing Files Users should be able to incorporate an existing data file in a message, or to combine several files into a single message for transmission.[Af]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.3.2 5 Message Editing U_seu should be able to save and edit messages prior to transmission.[ AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6 INTER-PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev,1, Vol. 2 63 Computer-Based Communication Page 619 633 Sending Messages 633-1 Destination Selection U_sers should be able to specify the destination (s) to which messages will be transmitted.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l NA Return > Reason:
i 63.3-2 Address Directory Users should be provided wi'h a directory showing all acceptable forms of message addressing for ea_ch destination in the system, and for links to extemal systems.[AI] l oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA l l
Return > Reason: I I
63.3-3 Aids for Directory Search Computer aids should be provided so that a user can search an address directory by specifying a co_mplete or partial name.[AI]
oK Comment:
i Discrepancy NA j Return > Reason:
633-4 Extracting Directory Addresses Users should be able to extract selected addresses from a directory or select a distribution list for d_irect insertion into a header in order to specify the destination (s) for a message.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
633 5 Automatic Addressing of Reply De appropriate address (es) should be provided automatically for users responding to messages.
oK Comment:
Dhcrepancy NA Return > Reason:
/
tu
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG 0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6.3 Ccmputer-Based Communication Page 6-20 633 Sending Messages 6.3.3 6 Assignment of Priority When messages will have different degrees of urgency, the sender of a message should be allowed to_ designate its relative priority.
OK Cosement:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
' l 63.3-7 Information About Communication Status Users should be allowed access to status information concerning the identity of other system users ;
currently on-line, and the availability of communication with external systems.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.3.3-8 SenderIdentification When a message is sent, the computer should show the sender's address, and the date and time of message creation and/or transmission.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
6.33-9 Deferring Message for Automatic Transmission Users should be able to defer the transmission of prepared messages, to be released by a later action.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.310 Automatic Feedbacit Automatic feedback for data transmission confirming that messages have been sent or indicating transmission failures should be provided to permit effective user participation in message handling.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I 1
6 LNTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 63 C:mputer-Bam) Communication Page 6-21 633 Sending Messages (O) 63.311 Saving Undelivered Messages If message transmission is not successful, automatic storage of undelivered messages should be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA-Return > Reason:
63.312 Message Cancellation Users should be able to recall any message whose transmission has been initiated, if it has not yet
, b_een received by its addressee (s).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
63.3-13 User Review of Data Before Transmission When human judgment may be required to determine whether data are appropriate for transmission, users (or a system administrator) should be provided some means to review f
\
outgoing messages and confirm their release before transmission.[AI]
OK Comment:
I Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
63.314 Saving Transmitted Data Until Receipt is Confirmed A copy of any transmitted message should be saved automatically until correct receipt has been confirmed.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
s 4
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 63 Computer-Based Communication Page 6-22 63.4 Receiving Messages 63.4-1 Message Notification at LOG-ON When users log on to a system, they should be notified of any transmissions received since their last use of the system.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: ,
l 1
63.4 2 Display of Messages The display of messages from other users should be visually and spatially distinct from the display of system messages.
i oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~
Return > ~ Reasoni~
63.4-3 Nondisruptive Message Notification N_otification of incoming messages should be nondisruptive.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
l
! 63.4-4 Indicating Priority of Received Messages Where incoming messages will have different degrees of urgency, recipients should be notified of message priority and/or other pertinent information.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
63.4-5 Filters for Message Notification Users should be able to specify " filters" based on message source, type, or content, that will i control what notification is provided for incoming messages.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l' l - - . _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ._____-___________!
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 63 C:mputer Based Communicction Page 6-23 63.4 Receiving Messages
('3 i') 63.4-6 Time-Stamp Messages Messages should be time-stamped.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A l
- Return > Reason
63.4-7 bdicate Message Size Some indication of message size should be included at the beginning of each message.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason: i
- ~ 63.4 8 Notification ofIncomplete Message l Be user should be informed when a message extends beyond the area provided.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy
\ Return > Reason:
j 63.4-9 Message Storage and Retrieval l M_essages should be stored in a message queue that is available to the user.[AI] )
OK Comment: I j Dberepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.4-10 Information about Queued Messages !
- Users should be able to review summary information about the type, source, priority, and size of l queued incoming messages.[Af]
4 OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
f 4
- U I
6 INTER PERSONNEL COMMUNICATION NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 6J Computer-Based Communication Page 6-24 63.4 Receiving Messages 63.4-11 User Selection of Messages The user should be allowed to select any message from an ordered queue with a single action.
OK Corement:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.4-12 Annotating Received Messages Users should be able to append notes to a received message, and ensure that the annotation will be displayed so that it will be distinct from the message itself.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
63.413 Specifying Device Destination Users should be able to choose the method of receipt, i.e., what device (file, display, printer) will be the local destination. If a specified receiving device is not operable, such as a printer that is not turned on, the user should be advised.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l O
e m ,W- 2 4J_ - A 5-7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
-7.1 Workstation Configurction L Page 7-1 l 7.1.1 Stand-Up Console Dimensions 4~
g 7.1.1 1 Console Height to See Over i Console height (with or without annunciator panels) should not exceed 58 inches when it is necessary for a standing operator to see over its top. ,
oK Comnwet:
i Discrepancy N/A
( Return > Reason:
! 7.1.12 Control Height The highest control on a stand-up console should be within the highest reach of the 5th perotntile l female without stretching or using a stoci or ladder, while the lowest control should be' within the j lowest reach of the 95th percentile male without bending or stooping, as shown in Table 7.1.[AI]
oK Comment:
>~
- Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
t
- 7.1.1-3 Benchboard Slope
{ The benchboard slope, in conjunction with its depth, should result in all controls being within the j reach radius of the 5th percentile female, as shown in Table 7.1 and illustrated in Figure 7.1.
- t -
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
! N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.14 Control Distance from the Front Edge of the Console Controls should be set back a minimum of 3 inchee from the front edge to protect against accidental activation.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > henson:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7-2 7.1.1 Stand Up Consok Dimensions O
Table 7.1 Anthropometric data used to set limits for equipment dimensions Bounding Measurements (inches)
Standing 5th percentile 95th perk;entile (without shoes) Adult Female Adult Male' Stature 60.0 73.5 l
} Eye height from floor 55.5 68.6 Shoulder height 48.4 60.8 Elbow height 37.4 46.8 i Fingertip height2 24.2 28.8 Functional reach' 25.2 35.0 Extended functional reach' 28.9 39.0 l
Distance from central axis of body to leading edge of console5 5.0 5.3 Eye distance forward of central axis to body 5 3.0 3.4 l l
1 (Source: MIL-STD.1472D, Section 5.6, see Note 2, Vol.1, p. 427. Also, where indicated, Seminara et al., see Note 3 Vol.1, p. 427.) l MIL-STD-1472D gives separate values for male troops and aviators. 'the two were averaged for presentation here. l 8
Data for male aviators only. 5th and 95th percentiles. i 5
Measured from wall to tip of right index finger, with right arm extended horizontal to floor, both shoulders against wall.
Measured as stated in note 3, except right shoulder extended out from wall as far as possible with left shoulder against wall s
These ir-u,m cc,ts are not given in MIL-STD-1472D. Values provided in Semmara et al. are presented although they are based on measures of a different population. Differences in other measurements between the MIL-STD population and the EPRI population are smaU enough that these EPRI values should provide reawnable approximations.
O l
l l
1 4 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev,1, Vol. 2 l 7.1 W:rkstation Configuration Page 7-3 l 7.1.1 Stand Up Console Dimensions d
Table 7.1 Anthropometric data used to set limits for equipment dimensions (cont'd)
- Bounding Measurements (inches)
Seated 5th percentile 95th percentile Adult Female Adult Male'
- Popliteal height (bend at back of knee) 15.0 19.2
- Sitting height above seat surface
- Erect 31.1 38.5 l - Relaxed 30.5 37.6 26.6 Eye height above seat, sitting erect 33.6
> Shoulder height above seat surface 19.6 25.8
! Elbow height above seat surface 6.4 11.3 i b) 4 Functional reach 25.2 35.0 Extended functional reach 28.9 39.0 i
Thigh clearance height 4.1 7.4 Buttock-popliteal length 17.1 21.5 Knee height 18.5 23.6 5
Distance from central axis of body to leading edge of console 5.0 5.3 )
5 Eye distance forward of central axis of body 3.0 3.4 (Source: MIL-STD-1472D, Section 5.6, see Note 2, Vol.1. p. 427. Also, where indicated, Seminara et al., see Note 3, Vol.1, p. 427.) )
' MIL-STD.1472D gives separate values for male troops and aviators. The two were averaged for presentation here. l 8
Data for male aviators only,5th and 95th percentiles. l 3
Measured from wa!! to tip of right index finger, with right arm extended horizontal to floor, both shoulders against wall.
- Measured as stated in note 3, except right shoulder extended out fmm wall as far as possible with left shoulder against wall 8
'!hese measurements are not given in MIL-STD-1472D. Values provided in Semmara et al. are presented although they are based on measures of a different population. Differences in other measurements between the MIL-S'ID population and the EPRI population are small enough that these EPRI values should provide reasonable approximations.
(m
l l
1 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 7.1 Workstation Configuretion Page 7-4 7.1.1 Stand Up Console Dimensions ecues a--
>$g s, SHOULDER f6 N' u-- -
'h; ..
Ho w 4, s
. ,h.(.:. 4 runenm uurrs oN n-
.6TH REACH i
', CoNTnoL s,7,".
en's i.i ::
. y: s '
renceu,r,u,-
un - _ . _.'s.-c.
s 4,..-. -
senwr
- "' ~-. , . - - - - ; . y..+de ;.g.
turrs ow cournoL
\
. !saa.
.m ~"-
renceuru
- g-j <,I
(
o-
--5'--.NQ!!;f E
- {* u reue ,,. g. te
- ~~
.,i:.5 4..G..gL,. , .
, .y.__ g . .:. . .. ,, ,
, MIN. MIN-s ..
l 12 --
I l
o- - = .
Figure 7.1 Reach capabilities and control height for two stand-up consoles (the console on the right includes a keyboard surface)
O
l 1
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configurrtion Page 7-5
,e 7.1.1 Stand-Up Console Dimensions 4
l
- l l
l i
4 5
J e
f s
UPPER LMT OF VISUAL FIELD
, INCHES
,e 1M --
- 76*
c 6TH 8 ge - 96TH '
- 8 s PERCENTILE - .
PERCENTILE FEMALE Rfl
i
~
, MALE ,
ou
.> . u-- '
o le
- 8 . . . EYE I'
15 0' .4 HEIGHT *
- 'Nb
- ll e,',,, s :
. . n-- se ea'
- Un vilk EYE ,, ,x g '
'N HEIGHT
- p ,#,# :Hl3R82GifMi : i t, stN . ,mx.s' f f; AT *~~ ',
66L f'_ _ _ _ { 'l .,
i , - :
i e-- ', s s
', g, ,s .s.
,.c n , i 3 '
i
^
f s' 4
$ 4 6
24 -- < %
s . ,
12 --
e Is j on. -- ,nt Q Anai. .ouio t. ioo .,n.n so, ..o.my it o pi., ..,. .ouni.e on v., tic.i . ort.c.
Figure 7.2 Display height and orientation relative to standing operator line of sight f~~
k
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1 7.1 Wcrkstation Configuration Page 7-6 7.1.1 Stand-Up Console Dimensions 7.1.1-5 Display Height and Orientation ,
All displays, including alarm indicators, shouki be within the upper limit of the visual field (75 degrees above the horizontalline of sight) of the 5th percentile female (see Table 7.1), and should be mounted so that the angle from the line of sight to the display face is 45 degrees or greater (see Figure i 7.2).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.1-6 Location of Frequently Monitored Display Video displays which require frequent cr continuous monitoring, or which may display important (e.g., alarm) information, should be located not more than 35 degrees to the left or right of the operator's straight-ahead LOS, and not more than 35 degrees above and 25 degrees below the operator's horizontal LOS, measured from the normal operator work station (see Figure 7.2).
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.1-7 Location ofInfrequently Monitored Display Video displays which do not require frequent or continuous monitoring, and which will not display important (e.g., alarm) information, should be located not more than 95 degrees to the left or right of the operator's straight-ahead LOS, as measured from normal operator work stations which permit full operator head and eye rotation.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.1-8 Lateral Spread of Controls and Displays i The maximum lateral spread of controls and displays at a single-operator work station should not i exceed 72 inches.[AI]
oK Comme i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7-7 7.1.1 Stand-Up Console Dimensions l 1
7.1.19 Foot Room l Enough foot room should be provided to allow the operator to get close to the board without leaning.[AI] l OK Comment:
h*Pancy l l
N/A l Return > Reason:
I
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Works'.ation Configuration Page 7-8 7.1.2 Sit.Down Console Dimensions 7.1.21 Console IIcight to See Over The console height should be no more than approximately 27 inches above the seat to accommodate the 5th p scentile adult female when the seated operator must see over the console. Assuming seat height is adjusted to 18 inches, maximum console height therefore should be 45 inches above the floor.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.2-2 Controllieight All controls on a sit-down console should be within the reach radius of the 5th percentile female, as shown in Table 7.1 and illustrated in Figure 7.3.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.2-3 Benchboard Slope The benchboard slope, in conjunction with its depth, should be such that all controls are within the functional reach radius of the 5th percentile female (as shown in Table 7.1 and illustrated in Figure 7.3) and all displays and markings can be read.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.2-4 Control Distance from the Front Edge of the Console Controls shouki be set back a minimum of 3 inches from the front edge to protect against accidental l activation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
l
1 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rey,1, Vol. 2
- 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7 9 ,
7.1.2 Sit Down Console Dimensions ;
i 1
e j
i i
a I
i !
1 l
' l l
i i \
! l 1
1, '
)
1 4
J l
< l 4
l 95TH PERCENTILE MALE - .
I l
FUNCTIONAL REACH N'N
'g INCHES 80 STH PERCENTILE FEMALE - -
N rg-<c i
i SHOULDER HEIGHT: \ ';
.. , _ .n s. _ .' _'.. .I ' ,',
j ;
se 34.r _ o.__ .HJ. / '-
- + > 1 ,f' -
- :<
i / , < _ 24
- L'/ , >
I '
s' /* '
- 12
, ,./*y
'l,, \ )
j';
Figure 73 Reach capabilities for sit down consoles
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Wcrkstation Configuration Page 7-10 7.1.2 Sit-Down Console Dimensions 7.1.2-5 Display Height and Orientation All displays, including alarm indicators, shouki be within the upper limit of the visual field (75 degrees above the horizontalline of sight) of the 5th percentile female (see Table 7.1) and should be mounted so that the angle from the line of sight to the display face is 45 degrees or greater (see Figure 7,4).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
7,L2-6 Location of Frequently Monitored Display Video displays which require frequent or continuous monitoring, or which may display important (e.g., alarm) information, should be located not more than 35 degrees to the left or rigat of the operator's straight-ahead LOS, and not more than 20 degrees above and 40 degrees below the l
operator's horizontal LOS, as measured from the normal operator work station (see Figure 7.4).
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A l
Return > Reason:
1 l 7.1.2-7 Location ofInfrequently Monitored Display Video displays which do not require frequent or continuous monitoring, and which will not display important (e.g., alarm)information, should be located not more than 95 degrees to the left or right of the operator's straight-ahead LOS, as measured from normal operator work stations which permit full operator head and eye rotation.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 7.1.2-8 VDU Viewing Distance The minimum design viewing distance should be equal to or greater than 12 inches (30 centimeters).[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
! 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7 7- 7.1.2 Sit-Down Console Dimensions 4
l 1
l 1
I i
l l
UPPER LNff OF l UPPER UMfT OF VISUR PED VISUAL FIELD -
l INCHES ,%
sm ,
lg e4 --
esm ,l"Q ,
vu
( PERCENTILE FEuALE
,()5.'.; n-- uaE PERC& mLE 8 l ,,7 ,
,# , . i o , ,, -
j ,
,4
- --EYE HEIGHT *s',,', #,-t ,
, , ,- g.c 'f, -
EYE HEIGHT' # , #, ', , e g-- ] ": ~me
- *r *.<-
- E ,,"t.____ un,e; 7,'s i
, y.
, ,__ i, s, ~
\
i 24 -~
> 12 --
o,.w - wn .
Q Anm. m w w.ei= % no. uwd.eo == sin m um p. m me woment.eL Figure 7.4 Display height and orientation relative to seated operator line of sight
\
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7cl W@rkstation Configuration Page 7-12 7.1.2 Sit Down Console Dimensions 7.1.2-9 Lateral Spread of Controls and Displays For control and monitoring actions that must occur in sequence, all necessary controls and displays should be within the maxunum extended reach and viewing range of the seated operator from a single reference point, as shown in Table 7.1 and illustrated in Figure 7.5.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.2-10 Leg and Foot Room Sufficient leg and foot room should be provided to enable seated operators to avoid awkward and uncomfortable positions. Figure 7.6 shows the dimensions involved and gives minimums and ranges necessary to accommodate the 5th to 95th percentiles (defined in Table 7.1).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.211 Writing Space on Consoles If writing space is needed by operators working at consoles, an area at least 16 inches deep and 24 inches wide shouki be provided, where these dimensions in the total configuration would fit operator reach capabilities.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.212 Use of Procedures and Other Reference Materials at Consoles Provision should be made so that the procedures, manuals, and other reference materials can be consulted easily while task sequences are performed at the consoles.[AF)
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A f Return > Reason:
O l
1
1 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7-13 7.1.2 Sit-Down Console Dimensions m
l 1
j i
i l
4 I i i INCHES
, 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 i....
....i....i.............i../.>....,
40 -
MAXIMUM LATERAL MAXIMUM REACH; 40 l
- VIEWING ZONE (WITH BODY :
~
BENDING) 2 w
~
1 x
$ [ . $
h20 ? CONTROLS -- i .
20g 3 : REACHED (WITHOt.TT ' 4 W : E 4
g i - BODY BENDING) 2,~r g _
i 10 _
( s\
10
,Y
- MM&?? h 0-
' / * ' g,;,
s- P <
) ,r EYE OlNT3 0
k g 128 inches forwerd of the eye point is the maximum distance for displays when viewing is Bmited by reach (control display reismonship). Viewing distance may be extended provided display le property designed. Greater lateral spread of displays would require a wraperound panel, a Based on 5th percenille male deta; less for 5th percentue females.
8 Console edge approxirnately 4' to 8' forward of eye point for 5th-95th percentile, j
l Figure 7.5 Reach and visual range related to lateral and forward distance from center point s
\
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1 Vol. 2 7,1 Workstation Configuretion Page 7-14 7.1.2 Sit Down Console Dimensions O
wr ;me
'hkb dj:jk
-4 n :<m.: $@f KNEE ROOM * '
18' MR :.m., y j 3 THIGH CLEARANCE g" E
~
f-- I 7.5" MIN.
'E t e '
l 7 gh::,
vm=-, i:HEIGHTWR SURFACE)
Y ! 26* MIN.i
~ ~ ' ~
SEAT HEIGHT 'n 16"-20.5" ....
,, 4" g >; e ,
4 FOOTROOM 4' MIN.
Figure 7.6 Leg and foot room dimensions O
l l
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7-15 7.1.3 Sit-Stand Work Stations O
. h 7.1.3-1 Appropriate Use Sit-stand combinations shouki be used when operators need mobility to monitor large panel areas but l also need the stability of seated operation for precise task sequences.[AI]
OK Comment:
D6screpancy
, N/A Return > Reason:
) 7.1.3-2 Control and Display Positioning The height and lateral limits for controls and displays should conform to the guidelines given for i stand-up consoles (see Section 7.1.1).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.3-3 Chair Height The operator shouki be provided with a high chair so that the seated eye height is approximately the i
, same as standing eye height.
j OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
1 3 7.1.3-4 Knee Room i Knee room and comfortable foot support should be provided.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l i
k i
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 701 Workstation Configuration Page 7-16 7.1.4 Vertical Panels 7.1.4-1 Control Height Controls should be placed in an area between 34 inches and 70 inches above the floor. Cortrols rec,uiring precise or frequent operation and emergency controls should be placed in an area be. ween 34 inches and 53 inches above the floor.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.4 2 Display Height Displays shouki be placed in an area between 41 inches and 70 inches above the floor. Displays that must be read frequently or precisely should be placed in an area between 50 inches and 65 inches i above the floor.
1 OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
l l
t 9
_ . _ _ _ . . . _ - _ . _ _ _ _ . ~ . . . . _ _ _ . . _.. _-_ _.. ~..._.__._.__ __.._ _.._
o
- 7 -WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2
! 7.1 Wcrkstation Configuration Page 7-17 ,
l 7.1.5 Desk Dimensions '
j 7.1.5-1 Working Space
- Desks should provide enough clear working space for all materials required for task performance.
oK' Comment:
Discreeng N/A -
Return > Reason:
7.1.5 2 Chair Positions The desk should allow for different chair positions as required, with adequate knee space.
oK Comment:
Diuropancy N/A Return > Reason: I I
7.1.5 3 Operator Comfort The relationships of working surface height and area, knee room, and chair height should allow operators to work comfortably.
OK Comment:
\ Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- 7.1.5-4 Dimensions Desk dimensions should conform with those shown in Figure 7.7.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7-18 7.1.5 Desk Dimensions O
t- .) n a >.,s ,,
E )# %-
< 1, 25" MIN. , s J ', 26"-31" KNEE ROOM ',
DESK SURFACE HEIGHT ,/' ~> ' ' ' ' HEIGHT v ,
r, f,
, r
/,
,5, '
sf s ?
O',
qp
~ ~ "
20" MIN.
MINIMUM USEFUL KNEE ROOM WIDTH WRITING AREA g, , ,
I t N
i I s t i
y------. - ,
I t h1
~
~ 'l*
,,- s, ~',t
- , t
't'~ ,
I s s '< ,,,
',, 1 g, ' , ',' ,
p, 18" MIN. ;M ), < a ,y, '
KNEE ROOM WIDTH 1
,I
$16" <
t
.g, s' g
i
't
. (
o , -- u-e -
t 24"-30" :
Figure 7.7 Recommended desk dimensions 0
1 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7-19
. 7.1.6 Chairs 7.1.6-1 Mobility )
Chairs should pivot so that operators can readily adjust position.[AI] !
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return d _
Reason:
7.1.6-2 Hackrests Chairs should support at least the lower back curvature (lumbosacral region).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.6-3 Armrests Where personnel may remain seated for relatively long periods, chairs with armrests should be provided.[AI]
OK Comment:
V Discrepancy N/A Return > Reasos:
7.1.6-4 Cushioning The seat and backrest should be cushioned with at least 1 inch of compressible material, enough so that some resilience remains when the chair is occupied.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.1.6-5 Seat Area The thighs and the backs of the knees shouki not be compressed so as to cause fatigue and circulation problems.[AI] l OK Comment:
Discrepancy
,7 N/A i
Return > Reason:
l l
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.1 Workstation Configuration Page 7-20 7.1.6 Chairs 7.1.6-6 Seat Adjustability For chairs at sit-down stations, seat height should generally be adjustable from 16 to 20.5 inches. For chairs at sit-stand stations, seat height should be adjustable from 26 to 32 inches.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Retura > Reason:
7.1.6 7 Footrests An adjustable footrest or heel catch should be provided to support the feet at a level no more than Ib inches below the seat surface.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O l
9
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-21 3 ,e 7.2.1 Accessibility ofInstrumentation/ Equipment 4
( 7.2.1 1 Present in the Control Room
- Control room instrumentation and equipment should include all controls and displays needed for (1) detection of abnormal conditions, and (2) bringing the plant to a safe shutdown condition.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 7.2.1-2 Arranged to Facilitate Coverage Operators should not have to leave the primary operating area to attend to control room
- instrumentation on back panels during operational sequences in which continuous monitoring or the timing of control actions may be critical.
4 OK Comment:
Discrepancy
+
NA i i
Return > Reason:
d '
)
i 4
a l
I
(
i G 4
4
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-22 7.2.2 Consistency of Staffing with Equipment Layout 7.2.2-1 Coverage Control room staffing and task assignments should ensure complete and timely coverage of controls, displays, and other equipment required during all modes of operation.
oK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.2-2 Utilization of Additional Personnel When additional onsite or offsite personnel are needed to augment the normal crew complement under certain conditions (e.g., refueling), activities and task assignments should be planned to ensure proper coordination.[AI]
oK Comment:
Dhcre pancy l N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.2-3 Nonessential Personnel Provision shouki be made to limit the access and movement of nonessential but authorized personnel to prescribed areas within the control room.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
O 1
4 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-23 7.2.3 Furniture and Equipment Layout
' (d 7.2.31 Viewing Desks and consoles placed in the primary operating area should permit operators at those desks and
- consoles full view of all control and display panels (including alarm displays) in the primary operating area.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 7.2.3 2 Communications Desk arxl console placement should facilitate voice communications from operators seated at those work stations to any point in the primary operating area.
OK Commeet:
Discrepancy
, N/A Return > Reason:
- 7.2.3-3 Operator Access
(')'N
( Operators should be able to get to any work station without having to overcome obstacles such as tripping hazards, poorly positioned filing cabinets or storage racks, and maintenance equipment.[ AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.3-4 Circulation Patterns The control room arrangement should facilitate efficient, unobstructed movement and communication.[AI]
I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 t
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7c2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-24 7.2.3 Furniture and Equipment Layout 7.23-5 Operator Maneuvering Space Adequate space should be allowed between the back (operator's position) of desk / consoles and any surface or fixed object behind the operator for the operator to get into and out of a chair freely or to turn in the chair to view the equipment behind.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.3-6 Equipment to-Opposing-Surface Distance Enough spaw .hould be allowed so that personnel can perform all required tasks.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.23-7 Openings Panels should be laid out and maintained, and equipment enclosures designed, so that there are no unguarded openings through which unwanted objects can be introduced.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
. 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-25 g)
\
V 7.2.4 Document Organization and Storage 7.2.41 Accessibility j
All procedures and other documents that may be needed for ready reference should be kept in the 1
control room in places where they are easy to locate and extract for use.[AI]
OK Coma,ent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.4 2 Location Aids Clearly visible title labels should be provided to identify specific documents. Labels should distinguish 4 documents as much as possible.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.4 3 Convenience of Use Documents should not be fixed in racks; it should be possible to remove documents for use.
(
L OK Comment:
Discrepancy h/A Returu > .t esson:
l 7.2.4-4 Bound Documents -
I Documents should be bound so that they can be opened fully and will remain open at the desired place without holding.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.4 5 Protection Documents should be protected from wear so that they do not become dog-eared, dirty, loose, torn, and difficult to read.
OK Comment:
Dlscrepancy
~
s
( N/A Return > Reason:
2
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-26
_ _ _ -7.2.4-Document Organization and Storage - - - - - - - - - - -
7.2.4-6 Dedicated Sets of Procedures Sets of procedures should be stored separately for each unit in a multiunit control room.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
k O
O
< 1
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 ,
7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-27 7.2.5_ Spare Parts, Operating Expendables, and Tools (3
V 7.2.5-1 Supply l There should be an adequate supply of expendables and spare parts (e.g., fuses, bulbs, ink and inking l pens, recorder charts and printer paper).[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
7.2.5-2 Accessibility Expendables and spare parts should be readily accessible.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.5-3 Tools All necessary or special replacement tools should be available to install expendables and spare parts.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
/ _
N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.5-4 Storage Space There should be adequate storage space for expendables and spare parts.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l l
N/A Return > Reason:
)
i 7.2.5-5 Coding When different types, sizes, or styles of expendables and spare parts are required, they should be l clearly and distinctively marked to avoid misapplication. l OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
o i
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 72 Control Room Configuration Page 7-28 7.2.5 Spare Parts, Operating Expendables, and Tools 7.2.5 6 Inventory Records should be kept as to the status of expendables and spare parts.
OK Coniment:
Discrepancy N/A l l
Return > Reason:
l 1
)
l l l
9
+ 9
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.2 Control Room Configuration t Page 7-29 i 7.2.6 Supervisor Access ,
(~^
' 7.2.6-1 Access The shift supervisor's office should be located so as to permit prompt physical access to the control room under all conditions, including control room isolation.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A f
! Return > Reason:
i j 7.2.6-2 Communications l Dedicated communications links between the primary operating area and the shift supervisor's office 4
when the shift supervisor's office is not within the control room boundary should be provided.
oK Comment:
1 Discrepancy I N/A i
Return > Reason:
j l 1
1 l
- 1 i
i i
3 J
4 i
(
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 72 Control Room Configuration Page 7-30 7.2.7 Multiunit Control Rooms 7.2.7-1 Equipment Arrangement Equipment should be arranged with movement and communication patterns in mind so that unit operations do not interfere with each other.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.7-2 Senior Operator Station Senior operators who supervise and assist operations of more than ene unit should be stationed so that they can communicate effectively with operators in each unit and have an unobstructed visual path to the control boards of each unit.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.7-3 Sharing of Personnel Where operators may assist those of another unit, potential task loading should be ovaluated to assure that each unit can be covered adequately in all situations.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.7 4 Sharing of Procedures Each unit shouki have its own set of procedures and other reference documents as required to make sure that references are easily available to personnel in each unit, and to avoid conflicting needs for the same reference.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
l 9
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-31 7'7 ""i""i' C "t' ' * ~'
~^
(d 7.2.7 5 Shared Equipment When control of some plant equipment is shared by the control rooms of multiple-unit nuclear power plants, care must be taken to ensure that status and availability data for this equipment are available in each control room, and that equipment operation from the control room for one unit will not affect other unit operations.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
a 4
7.2.7 6 Dedicated Crews When mirror image control rooi.is exist, operational crews should be committed to one or the other unit and should not be allowed to altemate between the two mirrored units.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
r-(x) 7.2.7-7 Accentuate Differences The distinction between the mirrored units shouki be heightened as much as possible so that there will be no confusion about where one unit ends and the other begins.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l I
i V
l l
I
i 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 74 Control Room Configuration Page 7-32 7.2.8 Emergency Equipment 7.2.81 Types of Equipment Protective equipment should include protective clothing and breathing apparatus.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.8-2 Anthropometry Protective clothing and breathing equipment shouki be compatible with operator body sizes and tasks to provide adequate tactile sensitivity and ability to see, reach, move, communicate, and hear.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.8-3 Periodic Checks Operator protective equipment shouki be periodically checked to determine if it is in good condition.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.8 4 Quantity There should be protective equipment available in sufficient quantities and sizes for the required number of operators.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.8-5 Marking Protective clothing sizes should be clearly identifiable.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 ,
j 7.2 Control Room Configurction Page 7-33 -l 7.2.8 Emergency Equipment
\ 7.2.8-6 Expendables There should be an adequate supply of personal protection equipment expendables, such as filters.
OK Comment:
4 Dhcrepang N/A Return > Reason:
j 7.2.8 7 Accessibility
, All protective equipment should be easily and readily accessible.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
(
) 7.2.8-8 Training Operators should be well practiced in donning protective equipment.
t OK Comment:
) /l.
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
! 7.2.8-9 Procedures Instructions for donning, doffing, and controlling personal protective equipment should be provided.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.8-10 Periodic Checks All equipment should be periodically checked to determine ifit is in good condition.
OK Com.nent:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
V
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7<2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-34 7.2.8 Emergency Equipment 7.2.8-11 Accessibility All equipment should be easily and readily accessible.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.8-12 Training Operators should be trained in the use of all emergency equipment.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.8-13 Procedures There should be a written, administratively approved procedure for each type of emergency or combination of emergencies.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l Return > Reason:
1 7.2.8-14 Automatic Warning System There should be an automatic fire warning system for control room fires.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.2.815 ProperStorage 1 Provision should be made for the orderly storage in the control room of emergency equipment that is needed by control room personnel.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 7.2 Control Room Configuration Page 7-35 7.2.8 Emergency Equipment
\ 7.2.816 Storage Locations l The storage location (s) may be away from the primary operating area but should be accessible, clearly marked, and known to all personnel.
OK Comment:
N i
MA Return > Reanos:
4 4
}
(
l 4
i i
l l
- 1
! l I
J 4
0 i
)
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 73 Environment Page 7-36 73.1 Temperature and Humidity 73.11 Comfort Zone The climate control system should be capable of maintaining a temperature between 65 and 85 degrees, with a range of 70 to 80 degrees preferred, and a relative humidity between 20 percent and 60 percent.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
73.12 Temperature Differential Air temperature at floor level and at head level should not differ by more than 10 degrees (F).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l l
O
3 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 73 Environment Page 7-37 7.3.2 Ventilation 1
N 7.3.2-1 Air Quantity The ventilation system should be capable ofintroducing outdoor air into the control room at a rate
- of at least 15 cubic feet per minute per occupant.
OK Coniment:
Discrepeney N/A j Return > Rena.n:
}
l 73.2-2 Air Velocity 1 Air velocities in the primary operating area should not exceed 45 feet per minute measured at operator head level and should not produce a noticeable draft.
)
OK Comment:
i Discrepancy WA j Return > R ason:
i i
t L
\
I i
I 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 73 Environment Page 7-38 73.3 Illumination 7.3.31 Levels ne illumination levels should conform with those listed in Table 7.2.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy WA Return > Reason:
733-2 Uniformity The level ofillumination should not vary greatly over a given work station.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
733-3 Supplemental Light Supplementallighting should be provided for personnel performing specialized visual tasks in areas where fixed illumination is not adequate.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Renan:
73.3-4 Task Area Luminance Ratios To ensure effective visual performance, the task area luminance ratios in Table 7.3 should not be
- exceeded.[AI]
l _
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
~-
I NA Return > Reruon:
I l
7.33-5 Shadowing To reduce operator fatigue and eyestrain, shadows should be avoided.[A1]
OK Comment:
=
Discrepaa y NA Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG+Ua o 2 73 Environment >ag. 1 m 7.3.3 Illumination 4
s Table 7.2 Illumination leveis
. Work Area or Task Illuminance, footcandles Type of Tash Minimum Recommended Maximum Panels, primary operating area 20 30 50 i
Auxiliary panels 20 30 50 Scale indicator reading 20 30 50 Seated operator stations 50 75 100 Reading:
- handwritten (pencil) 50 75 100
- printed or typed 20 30 50 s Writing and data recording 50 75 100 Maintenance and writing areas 20 30 50 ,
Emergeacy operating lighting 10 As above for area / task j i
l (Source: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, see Note 4, Volume 1, p. 427.)
4 Table 7.3 Maximum task area luminance ratios _
, Luminance Areas Ratio Task area versus adjacent darker surroundings 3:1 Task area versus adjacent lighter surroundings 1:3 ,
- l Task area versus more remote darker surfaces 10
- 1 i Task area versus more remote lighter surfaces 1:10 Luminaires versus surfaces adjacent to them 20:1 Anywhere within normal field of view 40:1
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 73 Environment Page 7-40 7.33 Illumination 733 6 Glare Glare should not interfere with the readability of displays, labels, or indicators.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
733-7 Renectance Reflectance should conform to the recommendations shown in Table 7.4.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
733-8 Colcr Surface colors should be recognizable under both normal and emergency lighting conditions.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Retura > Reason:
733-9 Ambient Illumination and VDUs The ambient illumination in the VDU area that is necessary for other visual functions (e.g., setting controls, reading instruments) should not degrade the visibility of signals on the VDU.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
73310 Useof Colored AmbientIllumination Colored ambient illumination should not be used if color coding is used in the workplace.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Rosson:
O
_ . . _ _ _ _ . . . _ . _ _ _ - . . _ _ . _ _ . _ . . . _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ - . . _._ ___.m.._..-. -
4 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 73 Environment Page 7-41 73.3 Illumination i
.I i
i i
1 i
1 4 1
- l. i
- 1
} Table 7.4 Recommended workplace reflectance levels -
l l Reflectances
)
! Surface '
!, Preferred Permissible :
i Ceiling' 80 % 60-95 %'
1 J Upper Wall 50 % 40-60 %
Lower Wall 15-20 %
l Instruments / Displays80-100 % l 4 l l Cabinets / Consoles 20-40 % 1 l
! Floor 30 % 15-30 %
i j Fumiture 35 % 25-45 %
i l
- Recommended reflectances are for finish only. .Overall average j reflectance of acoustic materials may be somewhat lower. The upper i walls (one to two feet below the ceiling) may be painted with the same i paint as is used on the ceiling. l 4
?
1 i
l 1
i i
I k
4
-?
- . . ... .~
1 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1 73 Environment Page 7-42 1 733 Illumination 7.33-11 Illuminance of Areas Immediately Surrounding VDUs There should be no light source (direct or reflected)in the immediate sunounding area of the VDU that is of greater luminance than the VDU.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
l 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i 73 Environment Page 7-43 73.4 Emergency Lighting j 73.4-1 Automatic Action
! A control room emergency lighting system should be automatically activated and immediately available upon failure of the normal control room lighting system.[AI] .
oK Cossomet-i k gancy j N/A
! Reture > Reason:
i t
l 73.4 2 Operability Failure of the normal control room lighting system should not degrade operability of the emergency j lighting system.
1
- i. oK Comewet:
j _
h waner N/A l
! Return > Reason:
! 73.4-3 Lighting Levels j The control room emergency illumination system should be designed to provide a minimum illumination level of 10 footcandles at all work stations in the primary operating area. )
oK Commeet:
) _
- =>
j N/A Rewra > Reason:
)
l l
O
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN ,
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 73 Environment Page 7-44 73.5 Auditory Environment 73.5-1 General The acoustic design of the control room shouki ensure that verbal communications between operators are not impaired; auditory signals are readily detected; and auditory distraction, irritation, and fatigue of operators are minimized.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
73.5 2 Background Noise Background noise should not impair verbal communication between any two points in the primary operating area.[AI]
oK Comment:
D6screpancy N/A Return > Reason:
73.5-3 Background Noise Level Background noise levels should not exceed 65 dB(A).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Eeason:
73.5-4 Further Reductions Where communications between the primary operating area and other control room locations are necessary, and voice transmission systems are not provided, further reductions in background noise should be implemented.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
73.5-5 Noise Distractions Noise distractions generated either inside or outside the control room should be minimized.
oK Commenu Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
l
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NURES-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 4 7.3 Environment Page 7-45 7.3.5 Auditory Environment
!s 7.3.5 6 Reverberation Time and Sound Absorption The acoustical treatment of the control room should limit reverberation time to 1 second or less.
l oK comuseet.
., N/A 1
- Retura > Reason
1 i
1 l i
i
+
i 4
I e
n i
.a i
4 s
(- -,-- ,
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.3 Environment Page 7-46 7.3.6 PersonalStorage 7.3.6-1 Storage Locations There should be a suitable, out-of-the-way, but secure place in which control room personnel may keep their coats and other personal belongings.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.3.6-2 Storage Suitability if lockers are provided, they should be large enough to hold the items that might reasonably be expected to require storage.
oK Comment:
Discrepanc; N/A Returo > Reason:
I O
1 1
0
1 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.3 Environment Page 7-47 7.3.7 Ambience and Comfort 73.7-1 Decor Decor should create a pleasant working environment for control room operators.[AI] i OK Comment:
[ _
Discrepancy N/A 1
Return > Reason: !
l 73.7 2 Restroom and Eating Facilities )
, A restroom and kitchen or eating area should be provided within (preferably) or near the control l l room isolation boundary.[AI]
I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l i
- Return > Reason
a 73.7-3 Rest Area / Lounge Consideration shouki be given to providing a rest area (possibly in conjunction with the eating area)
,q conducive to relaxation and revitalization, especially where shifts are long.
k OK Comment:
Discrepancy 4
N/A 4
Return > Reason:
O -
V i
1 l
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700. Rev.1, Vol. 2 7c4 Panel Layout Page 7-48 7.4.1 General Pane! Layout 7.4.1 1 Grouping by Task Sequence Controls and displays should be assigned to work stations based on the tasks the operator must carry out.[AI}
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.1-2 Grouping by System Function Within the constraints of grouping by task sequence, controls and displays should be assigned to panels in functional groups related to system structure.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.1-3 Grouping by Importance and Frequency of Use Controls and displays should be assigned to panels depending on their importance and frequency of use, within the constraints of grouping by task sequence and system function.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.14 Secondary Controls / Displays Controls or displays which are neither important to plant safety nor frequently used should be installed in secondary panellocations.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.1-5 Spacing Spacing between groups shouki be at least the width of a typical control or display in the group.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.4 Panel Layout Page 7-49 7.4.1 General Panet Layout 7.4.16 Color Shading When color shading is used, colors should provide adequate contrast and should be consistent with I
other color coding in the control room.
l _
OK Comment:
~
Discrepancy 4
N/A Return > Reason:
4 4
7.4.1-7 Emergency Controls Distinctive enhancement techniques should be used for emergency controls.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O U
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.4 Panel Layout Page 7-50 7.4.2 Layout Arrangement Factors 7.4.2-1 Sequence Controls and displays should be grouped together when they are observed / operated in a specified sequence.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.2 2 Frequency of Use Frequently used controls and displays should be near the center of the preferred visual and manual areas.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A t
Return > Reason:
7.4.2-3 Functional Considerations Functionally related controls and displays should be grouped together when they are used together to perform tasks related to a specific function or are identical in purpose.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
7.4.2-4 Order and Labeling l Components should be arranged left-to-right and/or top-to-bottom and identified in alphabetic or numeric sequence.
OK Comment: ,
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.2-5 Other Expectations l Components shouki be arranged to match other operator expectations when these can be identified.
OK Comment:
l Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.4 Panel Layout Page 7-51 nU 7 .4.2 Layout Arrangement Factors 7.4.2-6 Inter- and Intra-Panel Consistency The location of arrangement of recurring functianal groups and individual components of those l groups should be similar from panel to panel or within a panel.
oK Comment:
DLwrepancy NA Return > Reason: l 7.4.2-7 Repeated Functions The layout of identical control or display sets should be consistent at all locations.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
l 7.4.2-8 Mirror-Imaging Layouts of repeated functions should not be mirror-imaged.
oK Comment:
V _
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
7.4.2-9 Panel to-Panel Standardization should be maintained where similar functions or panels are located at several work stations or units and must be used by the same personnel.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
7.4.210 Simulator to Control Room Standardization Standardization should be maintained where simulator or procedures trainers are used that simulate the actual operational equipment.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy
/ NA k
\ Return > Reason:
.1
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.4 Panel Layout Page 7-52 7.4.3 Specific Panel Layout Design 7.4.31 Access Control access should not be impeded by any position of an adjacent control. Recommended minimum separation distances for controls are shown in Table 7.6 and Figure 7.11.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.3-2 Inadvertent Actuation Control actuation should not result in inadvertent actuation of an adjacent control.
OK Comment:
Dlscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.3-3 Simultaneous Actuation It should be possible to simultaneously actuate adjacent controls (where required).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.3-4 Orientation Horizontal rows of displays should be used rather than vertical columns.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.4.3-5 String Length Strings of similar small displays should not exceed 20 inches on the control board.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
i i
Tatde 7.6 Minimient separation distances for controls (see Figure 7.11)
^" +
nemimu m f , (inches)
Iagend SEde j Centrets Plush- Switches, Switches, Thumb-wheels, Retary Cemetensus J. J- t Key. Pushbedeems huseem lagend Rocker Tende "nusumb-wheel Sdector Retary um Is m Operated (met in an Switdi Array Switches Switches Arrays Switches Centrets Garge) (smaE)
Centrais array) Arrays 0.5 1.5 1.0 0.75 035 0.5 .75 35 5.0 2.0 Key-Operated 1.0 Centrek !
05 0.5 0.5 il:.0 - 3.0 ,
0.5 0.5 2A 2D 0.5 0.5 Pemhh-m=== (
(met in an array) r 1.5 24 2D 64 3.0 t W 1.5 2.0 2.0 2h 1.5 1.5 r Arrays' 1.5 2.0 2E 6.0 3.0 legend Sw asch.=, 1.0 2D 22 2.0 1.5 1.5 l Swhcit Arrays8 1.5 0.5 0.75 05 0.5 0.5 5h 2A Sude Switches, 0.75 0.5 1.5 Rocher SwWin.= l 0.75 0.75 0.5 0.75 0.75 6.0 3.0 Tagde Switches' O.75 0.5 1.5 1.5 ;
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.75 5.0 2.0 Disashwksses, 0.50 05 1.5 1.5 WJ Arrays :
0.5 0.75 0.75 1.0 la 5.0 2.0 l Retary La e - 0.75 0.5 2.0 2.0 Switches 0.5 0.75 0.75 1.0 th 5.0 2.0 1 Camelemeus 0.75 0.5 2.0 2.0 RM Sh 3.0 5.0 21
-a -
m.= Gary) 5.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 54 5.0 J-la i
2.0 2.0 5.0 1.0 30 J-Hamdies 2D 3D 3.0 3.0 24 3.0 2.0 E
(smimE) u- !
g .~ !
a< i 3
2 Pushbutaans wishin an array,0.75 inches center-a> censer legends swieches within an array, no wriinimern distance, but shouki he separased by a barrier. Bamer diould be at least 0.125 inches wide,0.183 inches hig 9 j
,%w N rounded edges.1.cgend switches enanufacaual as elements of a rnodule or rnodular array rnay be mounced as closely as engineenng considerarians permit.
It Toggle swindies arrayed in a banaonent line. 0.75 inches asser-to-cesser i
i L
t LEGDC PUDBUmMS N StRLM WEXE fwrcu actosuns "wrcu s *"uttf uoo E *M s
b e
r EBE l l
+'g l l -
4
_d-r
_d-
_d_ _d_
,t_.-=o.y-o
- 1 F-e d
/ __
i e d d d
r I
, i SELECTOR SMTQ1 2
WITH ARAMED C f poexu m aR y
C '
b i R
r I
??
o < .
Figure 7.11 Measurement of minimum separation between controls ye ,
(distances d shown in Table 7.6) TL '
e . _ _ _
G S
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.4 Pcnel Layout Page 7-55 g 7.4.3 Specific Panel Layout Design 7.4.3-6 Number of Components No more than 5 similar components should be laid out in an unbroken row or column.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Retura > Reason:
7.4.3-7 Coordinate Axes for Matrices Large matrices of similar components should have the coordinate axes labeled for identification of any single component within the grid.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I 7.4.3-8 Labeling Large Matrices The left and top sides of large matrices should be used for labeling.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 1 l
Return > Reason:
7.4.3-9 Demarcation of Large Matrices Large matrices should be subdivided by appropriate demarcation. i 1
OK Comment: l Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I l
l 1
1 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 Pcnel Labeling Page 7-56 7.5.1 Labeling Principles 7.5.1 1 Need for Labeling Controls, displays, and other equipment items that must be located, identified, or manipulated should be appropriately and clearly labeled to permit rapid and accurate human perfomiance.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.I-2 II.ierarchical Scheme A hierarchical labeling scheme should be used to reduce confusion, operator search time, and redundancy.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.13 Content ofIlierarchical Labels Major labels should be used to identify major systems or operator work stations, subordinate labels should be used to identify subsystems or functional groups, and component labels should be used to identify each discrete panel or console element.[AI]
OK Comment:
Dbcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.1-4 Letter Size in Hierarchical Labels labels should be graduated in letter size such that system / work station labels are about 25 percent larger than subsystent' functional group labels, subsysterr/ functional group labels are about 25 percent larger than component labels, and component labels are about 25 percent larger than control position labels.
OK Comment:
Dhcrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1 O
l l
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 Panel Labeting Page 7-57 p 7.5.2 Label Location 7.5.2-1 Normal Placement Labels should be placed above the panel element (s) they describe.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A ,
l Return > Reason:
7.5.2-2 Panel Labeling l The placement oflabels on control panels should conform to the guidance according to the principles i in Section 7.5.1.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.2 3 Visibility Enhancement Labels for elements located above eye level should be positioned to ensure label visibility.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.S.2-4 Proximity Labels should be placed close to the panel element.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.2 5 Labels on Controls Labels should not appear on the control itself when an adjustment or manipulation is required that causes the operator's hand to obscure the label for an extended, time period.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
v l
l 1
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 Panel Labeling Page 7-58 7.5.2 Label Location 7.5.2-6 Adjacent Labels Adjacent labels should be separated by sufficient space so that they are not read as one continuous label.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.2-7 Integrity Labels should be mounted in such a way as to preclude accidental removal.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.2-8 Surface Labels should be mounted on a flat surface.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy t N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.2-9 IIorizontal Orientation Labels should be oriented horizontally so that they may be read quickly and easily from left to njht.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.2-10 Curved Patterns Curved pattems oflabeling should be avoided.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 P;nel Labeling Page 7-59 7.5.2 Label Location 7.5.2-11 Other Information Sources Labels should not cover any other information source or detract from or obscure figures or scales which must be read by the operator.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy i MA i Return > Reason:
7.5.2-12 Concealment Labels should not be covered or obscured by other units in the equipment assembly.
4 oK Comment:
- Discrepancy NA Return > Reason
7.5.2-13 Controls Labels should be visible to the operator during control actuation.
oK
](p -
Comment:
Discrepancy
) (
4 MA
- Return > Reason
- ,
7.5.2-14 Cleaning Administrative procedures should be in place for the periodic cleaning of labels.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
U :
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 Panel Labeling Page 7-60 7.53 Label Content
> 7.53-1 Primary Function Labels should describe the function of equipment items.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.53-2 Wording ofInstruction Labels The label should briefly and simply express the intended action.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
( Return > Reason:
7.53-3 Commonly Used Terms and Symbols Terms, abbreviations, and symbols used on panellabels should have commonly accepted meanings for allintended users.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Retern > Reason:
7.53-4 Distinguishability Symbols should be unique and distinguishable from each other.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.53-5 Consistency Labels shouki be consistent within and across panels in their use of words, acronyms, abbreviations, and part/ system numbers.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A l Return > Reason:
l
__. . _ __ . . ~
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 Pcnel Labeling Page 7-61 7.5,3 Label Content O
(j 7.5.3-6 Agreement with Procedures There should be no mismatch between nomenclature used in procedures and that printed on the labels.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.3-7 Administrative Control A list of standard names, acronyms, abbreviations, and part/ system numbers should be in place and administratively controlled.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.3-8 Label Similarity Words and abbreviations of similar appearance should be avoided where an error in interpretation could result.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 7.5.3-9 Functional Relationship Labels should be used to identify functionally grouped controls or displays.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.3-10 Label Location Labels should be hwated above the functional groups they identify,
~
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
( Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 Panel Labeling Page 7-62 7.5.3 Label Content 7.5.3-11 Control Position Labels All discrete functional control positions should be identified.
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.312 Direction Direction of motion (increase, decrease) should be identified for continuous motion rotary controls.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.3-13 Visibility Control position information should be visible to the operator during operation of the control.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.3-14 Access Opening Labeling Each access opening used by control room operators should be labeled to identify the function of items accessible through it.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.3-15 Danger, Warning, and Safety Instruction Labels All danger, warning, and safety instruction labels should be in accordance with appropriate safety
- standards.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
- 1.5 Panel Labeling Page 7-63 7.5.4 Use and Control of Temporary Labels
( ,/ 7.5.41 Necessity Temporary labels should be used only when necessary.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reeson:
)
7.5.4-2 Visibility Temporary labels should not obscure prior permanent labels unless the old label is to be replaced.
1 oK Comment:
, Discrepancy N/A l Return >
Reason:
7.5.4 3 Identification Tag-out labels should clearly identify out-of-service components and equipment.
i oK Comment:
i Discrepancy f
I N N/A Return >
Reason:
i 7.5.4-4 Mounting Tag-outs should be securely affixed.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
I Return > Reason: I 7.5.4-5 Obscuration
, Tag-outs should not obscure the label associated with the non-operable device.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
1
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 7.5 Pznel Labeling Page 7-64 7.5.4 Use and Control of Temporary Labels 7.5.4 6 Activation Tag-outs should be designed to physically prevent actuation of a control.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
- 7.5.4 7 Adjacent Devices Tag-outs should not obscure any adjacent devices or their associated labels.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 7.5.4-8 Administrative Procedures 3e use of temporary labels should be administratively controlled.
OK Comment:
Dlscrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.4-9 Review Procedures pe use and control of temporary labels should be periodically reviewed.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepency N/A Return > Reason:
O
.. .. - . . . - - . -~ .. ..
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 !
7.5 Pznel Labeling _ Page 7-65 1 7.5.5 Location Aids i
'IO
} '\j 7.5.5-1 Use I
Lines of demarcation can be used to: (1) enclose functionally related controls and displays, and group
, related controls and displays.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A 1
Return > l Reason:
_ l l
7.5.5-2 Contrast Lines of demarcation should be visually distinctive from the panel background.
oK Comment:
4 Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.5-3 Permanence Ifnes of demarcation should be permanently attached. '
/~
oK Comment:
,{ !
( _
Discrepancy N/A j Return > Reason:
j 7.5.F-4 Consistency j The color coding scheme should be used consistently throughout the control room.[AI]
j oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A e Return > Reason:
7.5.5 5 User Expectations l Color should be dedicated to specific functions or conditions thro thout the control room in order for the code to elicit the expected operator response.[AI]
l _
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
x 1
l 7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 '
7.5 Panel Labeling Page 7-66 7.5.6 Label Lettering 7.5.6-1 Character Height O, l Character height shouki subtend a visual angle of 15 minutes (the viewing distance multiplied by .004) as a minimum; a visual angle of 20 minutes (the viewing distance multiplied by .006) is preferred.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Ressen:
1 7.5.6 2 Contrast Colors should be chosen for maxinmm contrast agi.nst the label background.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.6-3 Character Selection Labels should be prepared in capital letters with letters and numerals without flourishes or serifs.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy '
N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.6-4 Character Width Letter width-to-height ratio should be between 1:1 and 3:5. Numeral width-to-height ratio should be 3:5 except for the numeral "4," which should be one stroke width wider, and the numeral "1,"
which should be one stroke in width.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
7.5.6-5 Stroke Width Stroke width-to-character height ratio should be between 1:6 and 1:8.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A I Return > Reason:
. . - . . _ . _ . __ _ _ _ . . _ . _ = . _ ._ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .. _ __..._ ..
7 WORKPLACE DESIGN NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 j' 7.5 Pznel Labeling Page 7-67 7.5.6 Label Lettering
- (\
- 7.5.6-6 Spacing j The minimum space between characters should be one stroke width. The minimum space between j words should be one character width. The minimum space between lines should be one-half of the j character height.
j OK Comment:
~
$ SEQ j N/A j l Return > Reason:
4 h
i l
i i
\
I
?
4 1
i i
i l
i i
1 1
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8.8 Labeling Page 81 8.1.1 Placement of Labels O
8.1.1-1 Labeling of Equipment labels should appear on all components and systems with which operators may interact.
'OK Coasment:
Discrepucy WA Return > Reason:
8.1.1-2 Replacement of Labels
)
i When labels are affixed, earlier markings (such as labels applied during construction or l- acceptance, or informal labels) should be removed.
OK Comment:
D6screpancy 4
- WA Return > Romeon
4 8.1.1-3 Viewing Direction When equipment may be approached from more than one direction, labels should be placed on j surfaces so that they are visible from each direction.
- OK Comment
d _
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
8.1.1-4 Label Visibility Identifying labels should be placed so that they are readily visible at typical viewing distances and o_rientations.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
8.1.1-5 Locator Labels Readily visible markings should be placed nearby to indicate the location and identity of components that are partially blocked from view.[AI)
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
(
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 Sol Labeling _
Page 8-2 8.1.1 Placement of Labels 8.1.16 Label Orientation Labels should be designed and mounted so that text is oriented horizontally for ease of reading.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.1-7 Label Positioning Labels should be attached or positioned so as to unambiguously indicate the item being identified.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.1-8 Redundant Labels When labels are placed on the doors of equipment cabinets, redundant labels should be placed inside so that they are visible when the door is open.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.19 Label Placement Conventions Specific conventions for label placement should be employed for each type of equipment (e.g.,
valves, motors).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.1-10 Label Mounting Tags should be attached to components so as not to cause damage or interfere with operation.[Al]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy MIA Return > Reason:
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS ' NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
. 8.1 Libeling Page 8-3 8.1.1 Placement of Labels t
5
' 8.1.1-11 Label Replacement after Maintenance Maintenance procedures should require personnel to check that labels are in place after components are reassembled or replaced.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.1-12 Means of Label Attachment Labels and tags should be securely attach.d in a manner appropriate to the equipment and environmental condidons.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O e
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8,1 Labeling Page 8-4 8.1.2 Label Design 8.1.2-1 Label Material The material from which labels and tags are made should be appropriate to the equipment and environmental conditions.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.2 2 Label Contrast Lettering and background colors should provide high contrast and high legibility.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.2-3 Charecter IIeight Characters used on labels should be sized to take into account viewing distances and illumination conditions.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.2-4 Stenciled Labels Stenciled labels should not be used.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l
Return > Reason:
8.1.2-5 Label Reflectance S_urfaces of labels should have a non-reflective (i e., matte) finish.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
l 8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8.1 L beling Page 8 5 8.1.3 Label Content 7
t
\
8.1.31 LabelInformation l Labels should contain concise, descriptive noun names along with alphanumeric system and 1 component identification codes.[AI] !
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Ranson:
8.1.3-2 Labeling Conventions Labeling conventions should be employed to ensure consistency of plant labeling with drawings and procedures.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.1.3-3 Standard Label Format De format of presentation (e.g., order, position) of information should be consistent on all labels.
oK Comment:
, ) -
V _
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reseoo:
8.1.3-4 Abbreviations A_bbreviations used on labels should be standardized and easily recognized.
oK Connement:
Discrepancy N/A Returo > Reason:
1 l
l l
'f a V
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 I 8.2 Indicction' Page 8-6 8.2.1 Gauges / Meters
- 8.2.1 1 Design T_lle design of gauges and meters should conform to the relevant portions of Section 1.5.5.
OK Comment:
DLwrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
l 8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i 8.2 Indication Page 8-7
- 8.2.2 CRT Displays l -' 8.2.2-1 Design If_CRT displays are employed, they should conform to the relevant portions of Section 1. I i OK Comment
1
~ l hqasny
. N/A l -.
- Reture > Ruson
I i
i J
4 b
l i
s e
f l
t l
s :
i l i
l l
l '
I e
i t
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8,2 Indic tion Page 8-8 8.2.3 Valve Position Indication 8.2.3-1 Alignment Marks Alignment marks should be used to indicate open and closed status of important manual valves.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.2.3 2 Visibility of Position Indication The location and size of the alignment marks should reflect the normal viewing distance, location, and ambientlighting.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.2.3 3 Indication of Full Open/ Closed Positions Alignment marks should show both the valve's fully open and fully closed positions.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.2.3 4 Design of Position Indication A_lignment marks should be located to minimize parallax error.[AI]
^
OK Comment:
l l Discrepancy l
N/A Return > Reason:
8.2.3-5 Indication of Direction of Rotation The direction of rotation for opening and closing of a valve control wheel should be indicated in cases where the direction is not obvious.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8.2 Indic tion Page 8-9 8.2.3 Valve Position Indication
, O k 8.2.3-6 Precision ofIndication Alignment marks should be precise enough that the observers can tell when a valve is fully opened or closed, i
OK Comment:
4 Discrepancy
, N/A 1
- Return > Rossor.
- '
8.2.3-7 Alternate Means of Local Position Indication Indicators that are activated by valve limit controls should be used for those valves when a_lignment marks would not be appropriate.
I OK Comment:
me....,
N/A -
l Return > Reason:
i e
!V 1
1 l
l l
I s
e
- t 2
1
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 83 Control Page 8-10 83.1 General 83.1-1 Design of Controls The design and operation of controls should conform to the guidance in Section 3.
OK Comment:
D6screpancy N/A Return > Reason:
83.12 Inadvertent Activation '
C_ontrols should be protected against inadvertent actuation.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
83.1-3 Suitability for Operator Use The operation of controls should be compatible with the use of protective clothing, if it may be rguired.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O' I
1 1
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
'83 Control Page 8-11 g 83.2 Manual Valves
- 83.2-1 Operating Labels Handwheels should be provided with double-ended arrows showing the direction of operations and labeled at each end to indicate the functional result (i.e., open and close).
! OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A
$ Return > Reason:
I 83.2-2 Turning Aids l Knurling, indentation, high-friction covering, or a combination of these should be built into the handwheel to allow the application of maximum torque. ;
r ,
4 OK Comment:
! Discrepancy -
N/A 4
Return > Reason:
l C j 1 ( '
.i I
a J
4 a
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8 4 Communication Page 8-12 8.4.1 Loudspeakers 8.4.1 1 Range of Coverage of Loudspeakers Loudspeaker coverage should be such that members of the work force can be alerted under all plant conditions.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
8.4.12 Coverage Areas of Loudspeakers Loudspeaker coverage should be provided in all areas where the work force may be.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
8.4.1-3 Locations and Amplitudes of Loudspeakers Speakers should be placed within a space so that their number, location, and volume provide an i_ntelligible signal to all workers therein.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy MA Return > Reason:
8.4.1-4 Echoes Loudspeaker systems should not echo.[AI]
oK Comment:
- Discrepancy MA Return > Reason
t 9
l 8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8.4 Communication Page 8-13 8.4.2 Public Address /Pager Stations t
I\
8.4.2-1 Locations of Page Stations Page stations should be located so that time required for access by personnel does not exceed 30 s_econds.
OK Comment:
, Dbcrepancy
! MA Return > Reason:
8.4.2 2 Shielding of Page Stations Sound shielding should be provided where ambient noise levels exceed 90 dB(A).
OK Comment:
. Dhcrepancy l MA Return > Reason:
. 8.4.2-3 Control of Page System Design features or administrative controls should limit unauthorized or excessive paging.
OK Comment:
'()) _
oucne.nci WA Return > Reason:
! 8.4.2-4 Variable Amplitude Speakers A means of varying speaker amplitude should be provided when ambient noise levels may vary by
, m_ ore than 20dB.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy NA Return > Reason:
i 1
w
8 LOCALCONTROLSTATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8c4 CommunicClion Page 8-14 8.4.3 High Noise Areas 8.4.3-1 High Noise Environments Communications equipment should conform to guidance in Section 6.2.1 relevant to high noise environments (i.e, Guidelines 6.2.1-5,6.2.1-7,6.2.1-9).
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.4.3-2 Portable Alerting Devices '
Personal page devices should be provided and should be suitable for high-noise or remote areas.
OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
O O
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8.4 Communication Page 8-15 8.4.4 Two-Way Communication Systems Design Guidance O
8.4.4-1 Capacity Requirements -
A minimum of five communicatiens channels should be provided to avoid excessive waiting for a free cl.annel.
oK- Commsst:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.4.4 2 Dedicated Emergency Circuits D_edicated lines should be provided for frequent or emergency communications.[AI]
- OK Comment
Discrepancy N/A f
Return > R uson:
I 8.4.4-3 Signal Characteristics De signal transmission characteristics of the system should support good intelligibility.
OK Comment:
, Discrepancy
/ N/A I
Return > Reason:
8.4.4 4 System Access Locatior,s System stations should be located so that time and effort required for access by personnel is not i
excessive and so that stations are in areas of relative quiet.
, oK Comment:
5 Discrepancy
.. N/A l Return > Reason:
8.4.4-5 Portable Communication Devices P_ortable systems should be available to supplement installed systems.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A
- l Return > Reason
.. V
l 1
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8c4 Communication Page 8-16 ;
l 8.4.4 Two-Way Communication Systems Design Guidance 8.4.4-6 Radio Coverage !
Surveys should be conducted to identify areas in which radio communication is not possible, e.g., I
" dead spots" or areas near sensitive equipment.[AI] )
OK Comment:
Discrepancy l N/A Return > Reason:
8.4.4-7 Radio Repeaters Radio repeaters should be installed to eliminate " dead spots" if radio communication with operators is relied upon. I OK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.4.4-8 Use with Special Garments C_ommunicatiori capability should be provided for personnel wearing protective clothing.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy
{
] N/A l ~ l Retarn > Reason:
O
?
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8 4 Commu ication Page 8-17
', 7, 8.4.5 Administrative Considerations 2( 8.4.5-1 Training in Communications Practices l Communications training should be provided as a cost effective method of improving efficiency a_nd reliability of communications. {
l i
OK Comment:
Discrepang N/A l
Return > Reason:
1 1
8.4.5 2 Periodic Surveillance Programs Administrative programs should provide for periodic system surveillance.
)
OK Comment:
i Discrepang N/A Return > Reason:
8.4.5-3 Intelligibility Tests Determinations of speech intelligibility should be conducted for activities involving critical communications.
'[ _
OK Comment:
- Discrepang I
N/A Return > Reason:
8.4.5-4 Page System Capacity Upgrading Multiplexing should be added where needed to expand the number of page-party channels.
oK Comment:
Discrepang N/A I Return > Reason:
l
\
8 LOCAL CONTROI, STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8.5 Environment Page 8-18 8.5.1 Temperature /Ilumidity 8.5.1 1 Outdoor Equipment Eguipment located outdoors should be sheltered from the elements as much as possible.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Meturn > Reasco:
8.5.1-2 Heat Stress The level of physical activity and required protective clothing, as well as temperature and humidity, should be considered when assessing the danger of heat exposure posed to operators.[AI] k-oK Comment: ._
Disciepancy N/A Return > Reason: - - -
8.5.1-3 Engineering Controls
=
Engineering controls should be applied where heat may impair the effectiveness or threaten the well-being of operators.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy . .
N/A Return > Reason:
8.5.1-4 Work Practices Work practices should be adopted to minimize risk due to heat exposure which cannot be eliminated by engineering controls.[AI]
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.5.15 Water Replacement Water should be readily available in areas where the potential for heat stress exists.[AI]
OK Comment: .., ..
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 8.5 Environment Page 8-19 8.5.2 Noise 8.5.2-1 Hearing Protection Ear protection devices should be available and required to be worn in areas where noise levels are 85 dB or more.
OK Comewat:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
8.5.2 2 Sound Attenuating Enclosures
! When operators may be required to remain in high noise areas for extended periods of time, apropriate sound attenuating enclosures should be provided.
oK Comewet: l Discrepancy N/A
)
Return > Reason:
)
i 8.5.2-3 Auditory Capabilities of Users '
De hearing sensitivity of the work force should be monitored.[AI] l l
OK Comm t:
\ '
Descrerancy N!A
\
Return > Reason:
8.5.2-4 Communications and Hearing Protection Communication equipment in high noise areas should be compatible with ear protection devices.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
I
8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 8.5 Environment Page 8-20
- 8.5.3 Lighting 8.5.31 Portable Lighting Easily used, portable lighting devices should be readily available nearby when permanent lighting
- (normal or emergency) may be inadequate.
j OK Comment:
i Discrepancy N/A Return > Reason:
4 O
O
1 8 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 83 Environment Page 8-21 8.5.4 Accessibility m
8.5.41 Permanent Means of Access Permanent means of access to equipment requiring recurrent or emergency operation should be provided when it is beyond the normal standing reach of operators.[AI]
OK Comment:
Discrepancy i N/A Return > Reason:
, 8.5.4 2 Temporary Means of Access I' Temporary or movable access platforms to equipment should be available when the equipment is located beyond the normal standing reach of operators and permanent access provision is not feasible.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A l l
Return > Reason:
- l i
i 8.5.4 3 Formal Means of Access I i Catwalks, ladders, and other formal means should be ^orovided for operators to reach equipment.[AI]
j OK Comment:
! Discrepancy j 1
N/A Return > R uson:
)
- 8.5.4-4 Sufficient Clearance . l l Sufficient clearance should be provided in the vicinity of equipment in coritaminated or high i temperature areas to allow operators easy access despite the use of protective garments and
, associated gear.
oK Comment:
Discrepancy N/A j Return > Reason:
i 4
8.5.4 5 Impediments to Access A_ccess to equipment to be operated should not be impeded by structural elements.[AI] l 3
oK Comment:
l Discrepancy N/A
- Return > Reason:
_ - . _ - . . _ . - - - . _ - . ~ - . - . - . .. . -
[' _
J 4
GLOSSARY Abbreviation: A shortened form of a word or phrase used for brevity. ,
$ Acknowledged alarm: An alarm is considered to be acknowledged when the operator has made some type of input to the alarm system (such as pressing a button) to indicate receipt of the alert or message provided by the l
- alarm system. 'Ihe act of acknowledging an alarm typically causes the attention-getting characteristics of its
! display to cease or decrease (e.g., the sound stops and the flashing display changes to a steady illumination).
Acknowledgment: Providing feedback to the sender that a message has been received.
Acronym: A word formed from the initial letter (s) of each of the successive or major parts of a compound term.
Activated alarm:1he condition in which a monitored parameter exceeds a specified limit (setpoint), the deviation is evaluated by the processing portion of the alarm system, and a message is conveyed to the operator i 1
via the display portion of the alarm system (e.g., annunciators).
Active window: 'Ihe wmdow in which user is currently interacting with the system. Typically, this means that an active window (a) is currently receiving input from the user, (b) has last received input from the user, or (c) has been readied for input through the user's explicit action. "Ihe user is generally said to be "workingin" the active wmdow (such as processing a document, controlling a system, entering data). (See also inactive and closed windows).
Additive color process: Presentation of color images by the simultaneous selective projection of red, green, and I blue light on a screen.
Addressing messages: Preparing header information to specify the destination for transmitting data. ]
Advanced alarm system: A primarily digital alarm system employing alarm processing logic and advanced control (e.g., on-screen controls) and display (e.g., VDU) technology. ('Ihis is in contrast to conventional alarm systems, which are largely based on analog instrument and control technologies.)
Advanced control room (ACR): A control room that is primarily based on digital technology. ACRs typically allow the pnmary operator to interact with the plant via computer-based interfaces, such as video display units.
This is in contrast to " conventional" control rooms, which provide interaction via analog interfaces, such as gauges.
Alarm: 'Ihe term alarm is used in the broad sense, i.e., a plant parameter, component, system, or function that is in a state requiring the attention of plant personnel. The alann may be the result of exceeding a setpoint or value, or may result from the alarm processing system as in the case of alarm generation. .As used here alarms contrast with annunciators in that they require the operator's attention. In a narrow sense, the term alarm is used to mean an attention-cliciting message given to plant personnel about an unspecified or potentially adverse deviation of a plant parameter, component, system, or function from its expected value or performance.
Alarm availability:'Ihe display processing method by which the results of alarm processing are made available to the operating crew. This relates to whkh alarms are made available to the operator rather than how they are Glossary G-1 NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2
presented (which is referred to as alarm display). Three techniques are identified: filtering, suppression, prioritizadon.
Alarm display: He method (s) by which alarm coding and messages are presented to plant personnel.
Alarm generation pn> cessing: A class of alarm processing which includes techniques that analyze the existing alarms and, then based upon this, generate alarm messages which (1) give the operator higher level or combined information,(2) notify the operator when " unexpected" alarms occur, or (3) notify the operator when " expected" alarms do not occur.
A! arm message:Information presented to the operator by the auditory, visual, and other display devices of the alarm system in response to an alarm condition.
Alarm processing techniques: He rules or algorithms that are used to analyze plant sensor data to determine their importance, validity, and relevance, and determme whether an alarm message should be presented to the operator.
Alarm signal processing: Re process by which signals from plant sensors are automatically evaluated. Tids process, which includes signal validation and other techniques, determines whether an alarm condition exists.
Alarm system: An automated system consisting of processing and display hardware and software, which processes or analyzes signals from plant sensors and alerts the operator via visual and/or auditory displays when monitored parameters deviate from specified limits (setpoints).
Alphabetic: Pertaining to a character set that contains letters and other symbols, excluding numbers.
Alphanumeric code: A set of letters and/or numbers used to identify a group of data (e.g., in a table).
l Alphanumeric: Pertaining to a character set that contains letters, digits, and usually other symbols, such as punctuation marks.
Annunciator: An indicator of the status of a plant parameter, component, system, or function that does not necessarily require the attention of plant personnel. When such attention is required, an alarm condition exists.
In conventional plants, the tenn annunciator is used to refer to the spatially dedicated display portion of an alarm system.
Applicant: An organization, such as a nuclear plant vendor or utility, that is applying to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Comndssion for design certification or plant licensing.
Audio: Pertaining to acoustic, mechanical, or electrical frequencies corresponding to nonnally audible sound waves.
Auditory: Pertaining to the sense of hearing.
Automatic mode: A mode in which processing proceeds without human intervention (as contrasted with interactive and manual modes).
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G-2 Glossary 9
4 lO Bar chart: A graphic figure in which numeric quantities are represented by the linear extent of parallel lines (os bars). Bar graphs are useful for showing a comparative measure for separate entities or for a variable sampled at intervals. A graphic means of comparing numbers by rectangles with lengths proportional to the numbers represented.
Binary: (1) Pertammg to a characteristic or property involving a selection, choice, or condition in which there are two possibilities. (2) Pertaining to the number representation system with two values. )
Blackboard (also called darkboard): An alarm display in which the medium is dark (not illuminated) if all monitored plant parameters are in the normal range. Thus, an illuminated alarm-display device indicates a deviation from normal plant conditions. This is in contrast to many conventional alarm systems which employ display devices to indicate both nonnal and abnormal changes in plant condition.
i Blank: Containing no data; a non-printing graphic character used to separate data; a space for the entry of data.
Buffer: A file or device that temporarily stores data.
4 Button: A type of hardware control device or a defined control region on the display screen which, when selected, I causes some action.
Cancel: A capability that regenerates (or re-initializes) the current display without processing or retaining any
- changes made by the user.
[9 Category: A grouping of data values along a dimension defined for operational purposes.
b Cathode ray tube: An electronic vacuum tube, such as a television picture tube, that can be used to display ,
l textual information and/or graphics. Typically abbreviated "CRT."
4 Caution signal: A signal which alerts the operator to an impending condition requiring attention, but not
. necessarily immediate action (See warning signal).
I Character set: A set of unique representations called characters; e.g., the 26 letters of the English alphabet. and the 128 characters of the ASCII alphabet.
Character width: 'Ihe horizontal distance between a character's origin (a point on the base line used as a reference location) and the next character's origin.
! Character: A letter, digit, or other symbol that is used as part of the organization, control, or representation of data.
CIE distance: Difference between colors expressed as a distance in a three-dimensional color space which is based on the response of the human eye to light of different wavelengths.
Clear: A system function which removes the current selection but does not put it into the temporary buffer. A copy is retained, accessible immediately by the Undo command. To place one or more storage locations into a prescribed state, usually press zero or the space character. l A
U Glossary G-3 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i
1 Cleared alarm: An alarmed parameter that has retumed from an alarmed state to its normal range. Some alarm systems generate alarm messages when the parameter enters the normal range. The operator may be required to acknowledge the alarm in order to " clear" it.
4 Click: An input device " button-down" action (e.g., depressing and releasing the button on a mouse or trackball) for the actual enty (enabling, activation) at a desigrated position. This action is distinct from cursor positioning.
Also, the auditory feedback from keyboard entry.
Closed window: A window which is not visible and which requires some action by the user to gain perceptual and functional access. For example, a user may select and open an icon that represents a window or, in contrast, i might input a command to open a specific window. (See also active and inactive windows). I Coding: Use of a system of symbols, shapes, colors or other variable sensory stimuli to represent specific information. Coding may be used (a) for highlighting (i.e., to attract a user's attention to part of a display),(b) as a perceptual indicator of a data group, or (c) to symbolize a state or attribute of an object (e.g., to show a temperature level or for waming purposes).
Cognitive error: A human error that results from the characteristics of human information processing such as errors in diagnosis due to information overload.
Color: The aspect of objects or light sources which may be described in terms of hue, lightness (or brightness),
and saturation.
Column: A vertical anangement ofitems. ,
Command: ne act ofinstructing the computer or system to perform an action.
Command language: A type of dialogue in which a user composes entries, possibly with minimal prompting by the computer.
Component: An individeal piece of equipment such as a pump, valve, or vessel; usually part of a plant system.
Concatenation: (1) The process oflinking data together. (2) A set oflogically related items which are treated as a whole.
Context definition: Displaying an indication of previous user actions or computer processing that will affect the results of current actions, to help a user predict how the system will respond.
Continuous: Marked by uninterrupted extension in space, tune, or sequence.
Contrast: Diversity of adjacent pans in color and intensity.
Contrast ratio: ne measured luminance at one point divided by the measured luminance at another, equal to Lt/Lb, (Ls-Lb)/Lb, or (1+Ls)/Lb, where:
Lt = total luminance, or luminance of the image in the presence of background; Ls = luminance of the symbol without background (luminance emitted by CRT in the case of CRT displays);
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G-4 Glossary
i
)
i lb = luminance of background.
Contrast ratio, rather than contrast, is often specified by display manufacturers because it is numerically larger (by one) than contrast.
4 l Control. A mechanism used to regulata, and/or guide the operation of a component, equipment, subsystem, or system.
i i Control Entry: User input for sequence control, such as function keyactivation, menu selection, command entry,
- i. Controlhng transmission: %e process of ensunng that data which are sent are saved until they can be delivered or retumed to the sender.
- Conventional alarm system: A primarily analog-based alarm system employing little or no alarm display L processing logic and using conventional control (e.g., pushbutton) and display (e.g., annunciator tiles) technology, i (his is in contrast to advanced alarm systems).
Copy: A system function that puts a duplicate of the selection into the temporary editing huffer without j disrupting the original data.
Critical tasks: Tasks that must be accomplished in order for personnel to perform their functions. In the context i of probabilistic risk assessmmt, critical tasks are those that are determined to be significant contributors to plant
- risk. ;
a CRT: A cathode ray tube, i.e., an electronic vacuum tube, such as a television picture tube that can be used to j display textual information and/or graphics. ,
l
- Cursor: A display graphic that is used to indicate the position of the user's operation on the display (such as an j arrow or flashing bar).
l l Cut: A system function that removes the current selection from the screen and puts it into the temporary editing 1 buffer, replacing the buffer's previous contents. Cut may be used to either delete or to move a selection.
1
! Darkboard (also called blackboard): An alarm display in which the medium is dark (not illuminated) if all I monitored plant parameters are in the normal range. Hus, an illuminated alarm display device indicates a i deviation from normal plant conditions. This is in contrast to many conventional alarm systems which employ display devices to indicate both normal and abnormal changes in the plant's condition.
l
! Data: %e raw materials from wluch a user extracts information. (A user can be a human or another component 4 of the system, such as an expert system.) Data may include numbers, words, and/or pictures. l l
Data display: Output of data from a computer to its users. Generally, this phrase denotes visual output, but it ;
- may be qualified to indicate a different modality, such as an " auditory display".
! Data entry: User input of data for storage in, and/or processing by, the system.
1 Data item: A set of characters of fixed or variable length that forms a single unit of data. Sometimes a data item j s might contain only a single character. Data items may be entered by a user or may be displayed by the system.
4 Glossary G5 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 i
G 1
Data protection: Functional capabilities that guard against unauthorized access to and tampering with data, and data loss due to user errors or computer failure.
Data transmission: Computer-mediated communication among system users, and also with other systems.
Data validation: Functional capabilities that check data entry items for correct content or format, as defined by software logic.
Database: A structured set of data, manipulated using a data manage:nent system.
De-emphasis: De inverse of pre-emphasis, employed for the purposes of restoring original vowel-consonant amplitude relationships in pre-emphasis speech; primarily useful in maintaining the " natural" sound quality.
Decibel (dBA): Sound level in decibels, measured using A-weighting. He use of A-weighting causes the frequency response of the sound level meter to mimic that of the human ear, i.e., response is maximum at about 2kHz, less at very low or very high frequencies. A-weighted measurements correlate well with measures of speech interference and judgements ofloudness.
Default: A value or setting that is used if no alternative is specified. Assumed unless specifically overridden.
Defaults represent predetermined, frequently used, values for data or control entries intended to reduce entry actions required from the user.
Demarcation: The technique of circumscribing functional or selected groups of controls and displays with a contrasting line to emphasize their relatedness.
Density: (Screen Density) He amount of the display screen that contains information; often expressed as a percentage of the total area.
Diagram: A special form of a picture in which details are only shown if they are necessary to perform a task.
For example, an electrical wiring diagram for a facility would show wiring but not necessarily fumiture or plumbing.
Dia!cgue: A structured series ofinterchanges between a user and a computer. A dialogue can be initiated by a computer (e.g., question and answer) or by a user (e.g., command language).
Digitizing tablet: (Graphics Tablet) Device used to convert on image into digital code drawing or tracing with a pen-like or puck-like instrument. The instrument is moved across the tablet and a series of X-Y coordinates is generated.
Dimension: A scale or categorization along which data may vary, taking different values at different times.
Direct manipulation: The user manipulates symbols in the display by directly interacting with the symbol. The
, direct manipulation is generally performed by using a display structure, such as a pointer, and a cursor control device, such as a mouse.
Direct manipulation control: Defined by the close temporal and physical relations between the movement of the control device and the cursor, or other screen-based follower (e.g., an icon or a window). Direct manipulation
! NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G-6 Glossary
~~
i control devices include the mouse, the trackball, and pointer. In general, such devices permit the user to move it and to use the cursor to select a display structure (e.g., by clicking on a button on the device).
i Direction: (1) Explicit instruction. (2) Guidance or supervision of action or conduct. (3) De line or course on which something is moving, aimed, pointing, or facing.
Discrete: Consisting of distinct or unconnected elements.
- Display
- A specific integrated, organized set ofinformation. A display can be an integration of several display
! formats (such as a system mimic which includes barcharts, trend graphs, and data fields).
4 Display control: Procedures by which a user can specify what and/or how data are shown.
Display device: He hardware used to provide the display to users. Examples include video display units and 4 speakers for system messages.
i
- Display elements
- The individual components of a display, including labels, abbreviations, acronyms, icons, symbols, numbers, color, graph lines, coding, and highlighting.
Display format: Methods of data presentations, such as trend plots, bar charts, graphs, and tables.
- Display selection
- Refers to the specification of data outputs, either by a user or automatically,
{,b Display structure: Functional or information-presenting aspects of a display that are consistent in appearance
' ( ar. I use ceross applications, e.g., providing reference to the user's location in an information system and display j of control options available.
i i . Display tailoring: Designing displays to meet the specific task needs of a user, rather than providing a general display which can be used for many purposes.
Dot matrix: A rectangular array of dots or lights from which characters are built.
Drag: The act of moving a follower (such as a cursor) or selected icon through parts of a display (typically using a direct manipulation device such as a mouse).
Dynamic: Marked by continuous activity or change.
Dynamic display: Contains screen structures which change one or more feature (s), e.g., numerical value, color, i
shape, or spatial location, in real time or near real-time.
- Enter
- An explicit user action that affects computer processing of user entries. For example, after typing a series of numbers, a user might press an ENTER key that will add them to a database, subject to data validation.
Enter key: Key used to indicate completion of data entry for current field or record.
Entry: (1) The act of inputting information to the system. (2) Something which has been entered.
l Glossary G-7 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 1
4 l l s 1
Excerpt file: A file wiuch allows the user to move data from one location to another; it differs from a temporary editing buffer in that the excerpt file can be saved. Data can be appended to or interleaved into the existing contents of the excerpt file.
Existing alarm (also called steadied): An acknowledged alarm which has not yet cleared.
Extinguished alarm (also called reset alarm): An alaan that has retumed to an inactive state (e g.. the plant parameter has returned to the normal range and all associated alarm messages have been acknowledged by the operator).
Feedback: System or component response (e.g., visual or aural) which indicates the extent to which the user's desired effect was accomplished. Feedback can be either intrinsic or extrinsic. Intrinsic feedback is that which the individual senses directly from the operation of the control devices (e.g., clicks, resistance, control displace - t 2). Extrinsic feedback is that which is sensed from an external source that indicates the consequences of the coutrol action (e.g., indicator lights, display changes, aural tones).
Field: An area of the display screen reserved for the display of data or for user entry of a data item. In a database, a specified area used for a particular category of data, for example, equipment operational status.
Field label: A displayed word or phrase that identifies the data display or entry field.
File: A collection of data which is treated as a single unit, e.g., such as that stored in the computer.
Filtering: An alarm display processing technique which may eliminate alarm messages that are irrelevant, less important, or otherwise unnecessary. These alarm messages are not available to the operators. (This is in contrast to suppression which does not make the alarm messages immediately available but does allow the operator to retrieve them.)
First out alarm: An alarm message which indicates the initial change in parameter responsible for reactor and/or turbine trips.
Fixed form: Pertaining to a mode ofinput in which the user is presented with a set of blanks to be filled in.
Fixed format: An unchanging description of specification ofinformation content in a particular area.
Fixed function key: Key which has a function that cannot be changed by the user or system and that remains constant between applications.
Flowchart: A diagram that illustrates sequential relations among elements or events. Flowcharts are often shown as boxes connected by arrows.
Follower: The on-screen symbol (such as a cunor and arrow pointer) that responds to the movement of computer input devices (such as a cursor key, rnouse, trackball, and lightpen).
Form: A dialogue technique which presents category labels and requires the user to fill in the blanks. A formatted output to the user with blank spaces for inserting required or requested information.
NUREG-0700, key.1, Vol. 2 G-8 Glossary O
A Format: he arrangement of data.
Formatting: De process or act of arranging data. ),
l Frequency modulation: Sinusoidal variation of the fn:quency of a tone around a center frequency. ,
1 Frequency: Rate of signal oscillation in cycles per second (Hz or Hertz).
i _
Function:(1) A software supported capability provided to a user to aid in performing a task. (2) A::::1r. that I is required to achieve a desired goal. Safety functions are those functions that ensure higher-level objectives ard I 1 are often defined in tenns of a boundary or entity that is important to maintaining plant integrity and preventing
)
- the release of radioactive materials. A typical safety function is " reactivity control." A high-level objective, such j 4
as preventing the release of radioactive matenal to the environment, is one that designers strive to achieve through j the design of the plant and that operators strive to achieve through its proper operation. He function is often described without reference to specific plant systems and components or the level of human and machine intervention that is required to cany out this action. Functxms are often accomplished through some combination of lower-level functions, such as " reactor trip." He process of manipulating lower-level functions to satisfy a higher-level functum is defined here as a control function. In allocating function the control function is assigned to human and machine elements.
Function allocation: He distribution of functions among the human and automated constituents of a system.
1 Function analysis: De examination of system goals to determine what functions they require. Also, ,
examination of the required functions with respect to available workers, technology, and other resources, to I determine how the functions may be allocated and executed. In NUREG-0700, primarily the identification of j established functions and examination of how they are allocated and executed. -
Function areas: Specific screen or panet locations that are reserved for specific purposes.
Function key: A key whose activation will affect a control entry. Detection of the signal usually causes the system to perform some predefm' ed function for the user.
Gloss: De extent to which light incident on a surface at angle x is reflected from that surface at angle -x (minus x) relative to a line perpendicular to the surface. A mirror has maximum gloss.
Gloss istrument: A device that measures reflected light as a function ofillumination and angle of view. He angle for which gloss is measured is typically 60 degrees.
Graph: A display that represents the variation of a variable in comparison with that of one or more other variables.
Graphic element: A component part of a graphic display, such as a line, a circle, or a scale.
Graphic interaction: A dialogue in which the user selects displayed control elements by pointing or by other direct manipulation.
0
( Glossary G-9 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l
l l
l Graphical display: A display which provides a pictorial representation of an object or a set of data. Graphical displays include line, solid object, and perspective drawings; bar, pie, and line charts and graphs; scatterplots; displayed meters; flowcharts and schematic diagrams.
Graphics: Data specially formatted to show spatial, temporal, or other relations among data sets.
Graphics tablet: (Digitizing Tablet) Device used 3e convert an image into digital code by drawing or tracing with a pen-like or puck-like instrument. The instrument is moved across the tablet and a series of X-Y coordinates is generated.
Grid: A network of uniformly spaced horizontal and vertical lines for locating points by means of coordinates.
Group: A set ofitems.
Grouping:(1) Locatmg alarm messages that are related to a common function or system in one area of a display.
(2) The act or process of combining in groups.
, Hardcopy: A printed copy of computer output in a readable form; for example, printed process displays an alarm listing.
Help: Information provided to guide the user in operatmg the system or displayed at the user's request for on-line guidance.
Hierarchical branching: A method of structuring menu items that are hierarchically related which allows selection among altematives without requiring the opening and closing of a series of menus; the entire hierarchy is contained in one menu.
Hierarchy: The designated order or rank of items; a series of items which are classified by rank or order.
Highlight: A means of directing the user's attention to a feature of the display. Highlighting methods include image reversal (reverse video), brightness / boldness contrast, color, underlining, blinking, flashing arrows, and changes in font. Emphasizing displayed data or format features in some way, e.g., by using underlining, bold, orinverse video.
Histogram: A type of bar chart used to depict the frequency distribution for a continuous variable. The variable may be grouped into classes.
Human-centered design goals: Goals of human-factors engineering design that address the cognitive and physical support of personnel performance.
Human engineering discrepancy (HED): A departure from some benchmark of system design suitability for the roles and capabilities of the human operator. This may include a deviation from a standard or convention of human engineenng practice, an operator preference or need, or an instmment/ equipment characteristic that is implicitly or explicitly required for an operator's task but is not provided to the operator.
Human factors engineering (HFE): The application of knowledge about human capabilities and limitations to the design of a plant, system, and equipment. HFE ensures that such designs, human tasks, and work NUREG-0700, Rev.1. Vol. 2 G 10 Glossary
4 environment are compatible with the sensory, perceptual, cognitive, and physical attributes of the personnel who operate, maintain, and support it (See human factors).
Human factors: A body of scientific facts about human characteristics. De term covers all biomedical,
! psychological, and psychosocial considerations; it includes, but is not limited to, principles arxl applications in the areas of human factors engineering, personnel selection, training, job performance aids, and human performance evaluation (See human factors engineering).
- Human-system interface (HSI)
- The means through which personnel interact with the plant, including the
) alarms, displays, controls, and job-performance aids. Generically, this also includes maintenance, test, and inspection interfaces.
Icon: Pictorial, pictographic, or other nonverbal representation of objects or actions.
1 Identification: A code number or code name which uniquely identifies a record, block, tile, or other unit of
- information.
1 Identifier: A symbol whose purpose is to identify, indicate or name a body of data.
i
- Inactive window: Windows perceptually and functionally available to the user (the user may be able to see and obtain infmnation from them) but not immediately available in the sense that the user must activate an inactive ,
window before working in it. (See also active and closed windows). j i- j l Index: To prepare an ordered reference list. An ordered reference list of the contents of a file or document, l together with keys or reference notations to identify or locate those contents. j
)
1 Information: Organized data that users need to successfully perform their tasks. Information can include (a) a representation of facts, concepts, or instructions in a formalized manner suitable for communication, i interpretation, or processing by humans or automatic means; and (b) any representations, such as characters or analog quantities, to which meaning is, or might be, assigned.
! Initiating transmission: De process of actually sending a command, message, or data file. Transmission can j either be initiated by the computer, or by a system user.
Input: (1) Information entered into a system for processing. (2) ne process of entering information. (3)
Pertaining to the devices that enter information.
l i Input / output: (1) Pertaimng to either input or output, or both. (2) A general term for the equipment used to ,
communicate with a computer, commonly called I/O. (3) De data involved in such communication. (4) He l media carrying the data for input / output.
Insert mode: A data entry mode which allows the user to insert new information within existing information.
If the cursor is placed within existing infonnation, old characters are moved forward to allow insertion of the new characters.
t Glossary 0-11 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
Interactive graphics: A mode ofinput in which the user is graphically (e.g., by plot, histogram) presented data from which to choose. Once an input has beca so selected, the user may interact with the system to correct or refine the data.
Interactive mode: A processing mode in which the user is assumal to be available to the system for inputs or decision makmg. He user submits one input at a time to the system and each input is processed by the system as soon as possible (as contrasted with manual and automatic modes).
Interface: A shared boundary. De point at which a user and the system interact. An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might be a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs.
Interrupt: Stopping an ongoing transaction to redirect the course of the processing. Examples of interrupt options are BACKUP, REVIEW, CANCEL, RESTART.
Joystick: A stick-type control device that can provide continuous cursor control in any direction on a display screen.
Justification: De act of adjusting, arranging, or shifting digits to the left, right, or center to fit a prescribed pattern.
Keystroke: he act of striking a key.
Keystroke command: A single or limited number of keystrokes that define a command. The keystrokes are often initiated by simultaneously pressing a key that signals a keystroke command and the first letter of a one word command. Another version of the keystroke command is the function key.
Keyword: A word exemplifying the meamng or value of the data: (a) one of the significant, informative words in a title or document that describes the content of that document: (b) a symbol that identifies a parameter; or (c) ;
a part of a command operand that consists of a specific character string.
Label: Descriptor that is distinguishable from, and helps to, identify displayed screen structures or components.
Large-screen display: A large display which can be viewed from multiple workstations and locations in a control room. It typically contains important information which should be commonly available to control room crew members, Layered windows: Layered windows (in contrast to tiled wmdows) refer to the on-screen positioning of multiple windows so that windows can overlap and may obscure the contents of the covered windows ,
l l
Leftjustified: The left-hand digit or character (or its sign) occupies the left-hand position of the space allotted for that data.
i
! Legend: (1) The textual content of a continuously present, spatially dedicated alarm display. (2) An explanatory j list of symbols or highlighting used on a graph, chart, diagram, or map.
l
! I I NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G-12 Glossary
1
% Legibility: The quality of a display that allows groups of characters and symbols to be easily discriminated and l recognized.
l Lightpen: A pencil- or pen-like control device which interacts with the computer system through the display device screen either by emitting or sensing light.
j
- Local control station (LCS)
- An operator interface related to nuclear power plant (NPP) process control that is not im*d in the male control room. This includes multifunction panels, as well as single-function LCSs, such as controls (e.g., valves, switches, and breakers) and displays (e.g., meters) that are operated or consulted during 4
i normal, abnormal, or emergency operations.
l Location: A position or site occupied or available for occupancy. I 4
Macro command: A group of a series of commands redefined as a single command.
1 Main menu: A top level menu displayed upon entry into the system. I f Manual mode: A processing mode in which the user is assumed to provide all inputs (as contrasted with j intenctive and automatic modes). _.
Matte: A surface that scatters incident light nearly equally in all directions: a rurface that lacks gloss.
Mediam: The material, or configuration thereof, on which data are recorded, for example, paper tape, cards, j magnetic tape. ;
Menu A type of dialogue in which a user selects one item out of a list of displayed alternatives. Selection may i be made by actions such as pointing and clicking and by depressing an adjacent function key. I i
- Menu bar: A specialized function area that displays categories of alternatives of user responses.
- Menu selection
- A type of dialogue in which a user selects one item out of a list of displayed attematives, j whether the selection is by pointing, by entry of an associated option code, or by activating an adjacent function key.
Message: (1) Alarm information displayed in text. (2) Data that are transmitted from another user or from the
, system.
Message area: A specialized function area for communication from another user or from the system.
Mimic: A display format combining graphics and alphanumerics used to integrate system components into functionally oriented diagrams that reflect component relationships.
Mockup: A etatic representation of an HSI(See simulator and prototype).
~
Mode: A state of operation in which the system operates in specific, unique ways or has specific, unique
. characteristics.
1 Glossary G 13 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l 1
Mode editor: A text editing system in which the interpretation of the same user input varies depending whether the system is in entry mode or edit mode. Specifically, in a mode text editor the user must enter special commands to cause subsequent inputs to be entered either as text or as editing conunands.
Modeless editor: A text editing system in which the interpretation of the same user input does not vary; ordinary characters are entered as text, and commands are invoked using special keys.
Monitor: The physical device housing the electronics, display, and display controls for an interactive computer system (See also video display unit).
Mouse: A control device whose movements across a flat surface are converted into analogous movements of the cursor across the screen.
Multitasking: The parallel performance of two or more tasks.
N key rollover: A feature of a keyboard input system that stores keystrokes and generates the corresponding characters in the correct sequence despite more than one key being depressed at the same time (as in very rapid typing).
Natural language: A type of dialogue in which users compose control entries in a restricted subset of their natural language, e.g., English.
New alarm: An unacknowledged (unsilenced) alarm.
Non disruptive: An action that does not interfere with the ongoing activities of the system or user.
Nuisance alarm processing: A class of alarm display processing which includes techniques that essentially elimmate alarm messages which have no operational significance to current plant conditions. For example, mode dependent processing elimmates alarms that are irrelevant to the current mode of the plant, e.g., a low temperature or pressure signal which is an alarm condition in nonnal operation mode but is expected and normal during startup or cold shutdown.
Numeric: Pertaining to numerals or to representation by means of numerals.
Objects: Distinct information whose representation can be displayed and/or manipulated as a single entity.
Objects are normally represented by graphic icons and/or names.
Open window: Windows which are both perceptually and functionally available to the user. Two types of open windows exist: active and inactive. (See also window)
Open/ closed: When a window is opened it appears on the screen. Windows may be closed (removed from the screen) and reopened.
Operand: That which is operated upon. Information entered with a request to define the data in which the processor is to operate and control the execution of the processor.
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G 14 Glossary l
i j Operation: (1) A defined action, namely, the act of obtaining a result from one or more operands in accordance j ( with a rule that completely specifies the result for any pennissible combination of operands. (2)'Ihe set of such j acts specified by such a rule, or the rule by itself.
, Operator: Any individual in a facility who manipulates a control or directs another to manipulate a control.
Optical reader: A device that reads handwritten or machine printed symbols into a computing system.
Output: The data which are the product of an information handling operation or series of operations; the data emitted from a storage device; the data being transferred from primary storage (core, drum) to secondary storage (cards, tape); electrical pulses; reports produced by a printer or typewriter unit; a general term for output media such as cards and tape. Contrasts with Input.
Page: (1)'Ihe data appearing at one time on a single display screen. (2) A fixed-length block of data, especially 1 that which fits into a printed record or screen. (3) To summon a particular page or the next logical page. !
)
Paging: A method of viewing and moving through data in which a user conceives data as being grouped into 'l display-sized pages and moves through it by discrete steps. Also, to summon by calling out by name. !
Panel: 'Ihe front face of an assembly, normally used for mounting controls and displays.
i Parallax: 'Ibe apparent change in the relative position of objects at different distances from the observer as the I observer's position changes.-
Parameter:(1) A power-conversion process variable or quantity that can assume any of a given set of physically feasible values. Plant parameters are typically measures of the performance of systems and processes of the plant, e.g., the parameter Tw is a measure of the temperature of reactor coolant that has passed through the !
reactor core. (2) A variable that is measured.
Paste: A system function that puts the contents of the temporary editing buffer (a selection previously cut or copied) at the insertion point of the current interactive window. 'Ihe buffer contents are not altered by this i operation. i Peak clipping: A technique for controlhng amplitude relationships in speech by limiting the instantaneous peak-amplitudes to inprove its intelligibility, usually followed by amplification of the signal to increase the amplitude of the clipped peaks to their original level, with a proportional increase of the weaker speech sounds.
Performance-shaping factors (PSFs): Factors that influence human reliability through their effects on performance. PSFs include factors such as environmental conditions, HSI design, procedures, training, and supervision.
Personal safety: Relates to the prevention of individual accidents and injuries of the type regulated by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
l Pictotraphic: Pertaining to a picture-like representation of an object.
~
e Glossary G 15 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
Pie charts: A circle divided into sections (as pieces of a pie) to represent graphically the relative proportions of different parts of a whole. A circular chart cut by radii into segments illustrating magnitudes or frequencies.
Plant: The operating unit of a nuclear power station including the nuclear steam-supply system, the tuibine, electncal generator, and all associated systems and components. In the case of a muld-hnit plant, the term plant ,
refers to all systems and processes associa&d with the unit's ab!!ity to produce e!cctrical power, even though some 1 systems or portions of systems may be shared with the other units.
Plant safety: Also called " safe operation of the plant." A general term used herein to denote the technical safety objective as articulated by the Intemational Nuclear Safety Advisory Group of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) in the " Basic Safety Principles for Nuclear Power Plants" (IAEA,1988): "To prevent with high confidence accidents in nuclear plants; to ensure that, for all accidents taken into account in the design of the plant, even those of very low probability, radiological consequences, if any, would be minor; and to ensure that the likelihood of severe accidents with serious radiological consequences is extremely small." See Section 1.4 for additional discussion.
Pop-up Menu: A menu whose items are normally " hidden" from the user's view until they are xtivated or I brought into full view by a complete selection action. Pop-up menus remain visible until the user takes another action to hide the menu or make a selection.
Position: In a string, each location that may be occupied by a character or binary digit, and may be identified by a serial number.
Position designation: User selection and entry of a position on a display, or of a displayed item. (See also cursor).
Pre-emphasis: Systematic distortion of the speech spectrum to improve intelligibility of the sound by attenuating the low-frequency components of vowels (relatively urumportant for intelligibility) and proportionately increasing the amplitude of high-frequency vowel components and consonants (highly important for intelligible speech transmission).
Precision: The degree of discrimination with which a quantity is stated. For example, a three-digit numeral discriminates among 1000 possibilities.
Preparing messages: Includes specification of contents, format, and header information.
Print queue: An area of computer memory that temporarily stores a file to be printed so that the user can continue interacting with the system while the file prints.
Printer: A device that writes output data from a system on paper or other media.
Prioritization: A class of alarm-display processing that presents alarm messages to the operator according to an evaluation of importance, often using 2 to 4 categories of priority. The intent of this approach is to help the operators focus attention on the most important alarm conditions when there are multiple alarm conditions.
Processing: 'Ihe execution of a systematic sequence of operations.
NUREG-0700, Rev.1 Vol. 2 G-16 Glossary L
Programmable fun .an keys: User programmable keys whose function may vary between applications or l
between users within an application.
Prompting: The process or act of assisting by suggestion.
Prototype: A dynanuc representation of an HSI that is not linked to a process model or simulator (See simulator arxl mockup). A model of an interface which includes the functions and capabilities expected in the final system, i though not in a rmished form.
Pull-down menu: A menu whose items are nomially hidden from the users view and accessed by the user holding the selection button down over the desired menu-bar label.
Questionand answer: A type of dialogue in which a computer displays questions, one at a time, for a user to answer.
Queue: A waiting line or list formed by items in a system waiting for service; for example, tasks to be performed or messages to be transmitted in message switching system.
Record: A group of related data fields that are operated on as a single entity in a database.
Redundant alarm processing: A class of alarm-display processing which includes techniques that evaluate active alarm conditions to identify those that are ::va/ valid but are redundant with other active alarm conditions.
His processing filters, suppresses, or reduces the prionty of alarm messages that have been determined to be of
[' less importance because they provide information that is redundant with other existing alarm conditions and
! theoretically provide no new/ unique informabon to the operator. For example, in causal relationship processing, alarm messages associated with "causes" are displayed prominently, while alarm messages associated with
" consequences" are eliminated or lowered in priority.
Reflash: A method of alarm presentation that can be implemented any time an alarm condition is based on input from more than one plant parameter. Reflash causes an alarm display to re-enter the new alarm state when an associated plant parameter reaches its setpoint. De alarm display cannot retum to normal until all related parameters retum to their normal ranges.
l Rejection level: He minimum level of certainty (represented by a number) required by a speech recognition 1
system for a spoken command to be executed.
i Remote: Acting on or controlling indirectly from a distance.
Request: A user input specifying the operation (s) to be performed.
Response time: The time between the submission of an item of work to a computing system and the retum of results.
Retrace: A capability that returns a user to the last previous display in a dermed transaction sequence (also called " backup").
Retrieval: He act, method, or procedure for recovering stored data.
Glossary G-17 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
Review: A capability that retums a user to the first display in a defined transaction sequence, while retaining any entries made by the user.
Right justified: To adjust the printing positions of characters on a page so that the right margin of the page is regular. To shift the contents of a register so that the least significant digit is at some specified position of the register, Ringbac8a An alarm display feature that provides a distinct cue such as a slow flash or audible tone to indicate that an alarm condition has cleared, i.e., the monitored parameter (s) has returned to its normal range.
Row: A horizontal arrangement of characters or other expressions.
Safety evaluation: ne NRC process of reviewing an aspect of an NPP to ensure that it meets requirements and that it will perform as needed to reliably ensure plant safety.
Safety function: A process or activity that must occur to achieve a safety goal such as preventing the release of radioactive materialinto the environment. Safety functions are often defined in terms of a boundary or entity that is important to plant safety, such as . reactivity control." he safety function is often described without reference to specific plant systems and components or the level of human and machine intervention that is required to carry out the function such as provide core cooli .."
Safety goal: A high-level objective such as, Preventing the release of radioxtive material to the environment" which designers strive to achieve through the design of the plant, and which plant operators strive to achieve through its safe operation.
Safety issue: An item identified during plant design, operation, or review that has the potential to affect the safe operation of the plant.
i Safety related: A term applied to those NPP structures, systems, and components (SSCs) that prevent or mitigate the consequences of postulated accidents that could cause undue risk to the health and safety of the I public (see Appendix B to Part 50 of Title 10 of the U.S. Code ofFederalRegulations). Rese are the SSCs i on which the design-basis analyses of the safety analysis report are performed. They also must be part of a full l quality assurance program in accordance with Appendix B. I Scale: A graduated series or scheme of rank or order.
Scaling: The positioning of displayed data elements with respect to a defined measurement standard.
Scatterplot: A scaled graph which shows relations among individual data points in a two- dimensional array.
Screen: ne software-controlled visual interface of a monitor, e.g., the display surface of a CRT.
Screen dump: An action, usually performed with a keystroke sequence, that causes the exact contents of the current screen display to be captured for printing or storage in a file.
Screen structure: A generic display element, such as a menu bar or title.
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G-18 Glossary O
.-- - _ -. -- -.-- . . - - - - . - - - ~ - - - - . _
! l i
i Scroll: To move data being viewed in a line-by-line manner; to roll upward or downward.
f Scrolhng An orientation for display franung in which a user conceives of data as moving behind a fixed display frame. The opposite of panning.
Selecting: A user's action of identifying display elements to the computer to ready them for use in some way (e.g., to open a valve by an input device click on a graphic representation of a valve).
Sequence: An arrangement ofitems according to a specified set of rules.
Sequence control: Logic and means by which user's actions and computer responses are linked to become coherent transactions.
Setpoint: ne value of a monitored parameter winch defines the boundary between the parameter's normal range and an alarm condition. An alarm coexlition exists when the parameter exceeds the normal range that is defined by the upper and or lower limit setpoints. Graded alarms may have multiple setpoints outside the normal range that produce alarms that indicate increasing levels of severity of the abnormal condition, such as Low Level, or Low-low Level. )
Shared alarm: An alarm condition that is defined by the activation of one or more of a set of different process deviations. An example of a shared alarm is a " reactor coolant system trouble" message which may be displayed when any one of the reactor coolant pumps malfunctions. An individual alarm message associated with the particular malfunctioning reactor coolant pump may also be displayed in addition to the former message.
Should and may: he word "should" is used to denote a recommendation; the word "may" is used to denote permission, neither a requirement nor a recommendation.
Signal validation: A set of alarm processing techniques by which signals from redundant or functionally related sensors are compared and analyzed to determme whether a true alarm condition exists. The purpose of these techniques is to prevent false alarms being presented to the operator due to malfunctionin g plant instrumentation, such as a failed sensor.
Significance processing: A class of alarm display processing which includes techniques that evaluate active alarm conditions to identify those that are true/ valid but are ofless operational significance than other active alann conditions. His processing filters, suppresses, or reduces the priority of alarm messages that have been determined to be of less importance. For example, in an anticipated transient without scram event, alarms associated with minor disturbances on the secondary side of the plant are eliminated or lowered in priority.
Simulator: A facility that physically represents the HS1 configuration and that dynamically represents the operating characteristics and responses of the plant in real time (See prototype and mockup).
l l
Situation awareness: The relationship between the operator's understandmg of the plant's condition and its actual condition at any given time.
Spacing: ne distance between any two objects.
O
\ '
Glossary G 19 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
Spatially focused, variable location, serial display: A display where alarms are presented in no fixed location and according to some logic, such as time or priority. Usually, the same display device can be used to present many different alarms (in contrast with SDCV display where a given location presents only one alarm). A scrolling message list is an example of this type of display.
Spatially dedicated, continuously visible (SDCV) alarm display: An alarm display which is in a spatially dedicated position and is always visible whether in an alarmed or cleared state. Conventional alarm tiles are an example of an SDCV alarm display.
Specular reflectance: He light incident on a surface at angle x that is reflected at angle - x (minus x).
Speech display: Speech messages (either computer-generated or a recorded human voice) conveyed to the operating en:w through audio devices, such as speakers and headsets.
Speech recognition: Permi:s a user to provide spoken input which a computer intery rets as data or conunands.
State-of-the-art human factors principles: Those principles currently accepted by human factors practitioners.
" Current" is defined with reference to the time at which a program management or implementation plan is prepared. " Accepted" is defined as a practice, method, or guide that (1) is documented in the human factors literature within a standard or guidance document that has un&rgone a peer-review process or (2) can be justified through scientific research and/or industry practices.
Status information: Information pertaining to system status which is displayed to a user either automatically or by user's request.
Steadied: An alarm which has been acknowledged.
Storage: Any device on which data can be entered, held, and retrieved. He act of storing data on such a device.
String: A linear sequence of entities such as characters or physical elements.
Stroke width: he width of a line comprising a character.
Stylus: Pen-shaped instrument used to " draw" images or point to icons or menu selections.
Subtractive color process: The presentation of color images by selective absorption of projected light.
Suppression: A class of alarm display processing by which alarms determined by processing techniques to be less important, irrelevant, or otherwise unnecessary are not presented to the operators, but can be accessed by operators upon request. His approach is intended to help the operators focus attention on the most important alarm conditions when multiple alarm conditions exist.
Symbol: A representation of something by reason of relationship, association, or convention.
Syntax: The way in which words are put together to form phrases, clauses, or sentences.
NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G-20 Glossary
( ' System: An integrated collection of plant components and control elements that operate together and possibly in conjunction with other systems to perfonn a function.
System resporbe time: The elapsed time between the initiation of a command and the notification to the user that the command has been completed.
Table: A rows and colunws structure consisting of functional areas which contain data which may or may not require any input. Tables may be used to present a variety of types ofinformation. A collection of data in a form f
suitable for ready reference.
Task analysis: A method of dremhng the components of a task in terms of the demands placed upon the human operator, the information required by the operator, the extent to which the task sequires reliance on or coordination with other personnel, and the relation of the task to other tasks.
Task: A series of transactions that comprises part of a user's definedjob. A group of activities that have a common pu: pose, often occurring in temporal proximity, and that utilize the same displays and controls Terminal An input / output device used to enter and display data. Data are usually entered via a keyboard, and are usually displayed via a video screen (soft copy) or a printer (hard copy). A device, usually equipped with a keyboard and some kind of display, which can send and receive information over a communication channel.
Terminology: The technical or special terms of expressions used; nomenclature.
Text: The primary display for word processing, consists of alphanumeric character strings in linear arrays, making up words, sentences, and paragraphs. The main body of pnnted or written matter on a page or in a message.
Text entry: Initial entry and subsequent editing of textual data.
Tile: A type of spatially d=6*i continuously visible alarm-display consisting of an element of a conventional NPP alarm panel.
Tiled windows: Tiled wmdows (in contrast to layered windows) refers to the on-screen positioning of multiple j windows side-by-side so that no window overlays information on another.
Tiling: A means of manipulating windows by which multiple windows on the same display abut, but do not overlap. As the number of windows increases in the tiled window envirorunent, the size of each wmdow decreases.
Top-down design: A review approach starting at the " top" with high-level plant-mission goals that are broken down into functions that are allocated to human and system resources, and then into tasks required to accomplish function assignments. Tasks are arranged into meaningful jobs and the HSI is designed to best support job performance. The detailed design is the " bottom" of the top-down process.
Touch screen: A control device that allows the user to communicate with the computer by touching a screen.
\
Glossary G-21 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2
Touch mne: An area of a display that a user can activate to perform a predefined operation (e.g., displaying a pop-up window).
4 Trackball: A control device with which the user can control cursor movement in any direction by rotating a ball.
Transaction: An action by a user followed by a response from the computer. Transaction is used here to represent the smallest functional unit of user-system interaction.
Transilluminated display: A d: splay having light passed through, rather than reflected off, an element to be viewed, e.g., illumination used on traditional annunciator tile panels o indicators using edge or back lighting techniques on clear, translucent, fluorescent, or sandwich-type plastic mate:ials (in contrast to video display units).
Turnaround time: (1) The elapsed time between submission of a job to a computing center and the retum of results. (2) In communications, the actual time required to reverse the direction of transmission from send to receive when using a half-duplex circuit.
Undo: A capability that reverses the effect of the previous operation.
Update: Regeneration of changing data to show current status, by user request or automatically by the computer.
User response time: The speed with which a user can enter commands and control a system regardless of the computer's ability to quickly process the commands.
Validation: (1) 'Ihe process of determining whether the design of machine elements and the organizational design of human elements of a human-machine system is adequate to support effective integrated performance of established functions. (2) 'Ihe capability of a system to check information entry items for correct content of format as defined by software logic.
Value: Specified data for a particular parameter or variable.
Variable: A quantity that can assume any of the given set of values.
Variable function key: A dedicated key which invokes functions of the system; the specific function invoked varies depending, e.g., on the mode of operation selected by the user.
Verification: The process of determining whether instrumentation, controls, and other equipment meet the specific requirements of the tasks performed by operators.
VDU: A video display unit.
Video display unit: An electronic device for the display of visual information in the form of text and/or graphics. Typically abbreviated VDU.
Vigilance: The degree to which personnel are attentive to their current task.
l NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 G-22 Glossary
( Visual angle: A measure, in degrees,of the size of the retinal image subtended by a viewed object. It represents the apparent size of an object based on the relationship between an object's distance from the viewer and its size (perpendicular to the viewer's line of sight). An object of constant size will subtend a smaller visual angle as it is moved farther from the viewer. Visual angle is typically defined in terms of minutes of visual arc.
i Warning signal: A signal which alerts the operator to a condition requirin7 mmediate action (see Caution Signal).
Window: A geonetric area on a unnpuur screen widiin which the system displays information or receives input from the user.
Window overlay: A portion of a display that is temporarily used to show added features such as requested data, menus, or user guidance, which may obscure previously displayed data. 1 Word: A character string or a bit string considered as an entity.
Word wrap: Occurs when words displaced from one line are moved to the next line so as to maintain the continuity of the text.
Workload: The physical and cognitive demands placed on plant personnel.
Workstation: The physical console at which a user works.
O O
a Glossary G-23 NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol. 2 l
l
N;C soeu 335 U.s. NUCLE AR REGUL AToAY CoMMisslON t. REPORT NUMvE R Nc$t102 mm b .Num s BIBUO2RAPHIC DATA SHEET J gg,, ,n,,,uc,,nn, on an, ,,,,,,o, NUREG-0700 \
TITLE AND SUBitTLE Rev.1 Human-System Interface Design Review Guidelines Vol . 2 Reviewer's Checklist 3 DATE REPORT PUBLISHED posts veas Final Report l June 1996
- 1. PE R lOO coy t R E D unctus,e* oarm January 1995 - June 1996 V,
8P F R ANf 2 ATlON - N AM E ANO ADOR E SS or Nnc provoor osv,sen. on co or noe,an, u.s Nacou neoutorous comm,sm, one me,hne nooreu. or contrator poorose 9 SPON GANITATION - NAME ANo ADDRESS ur Nac. ryor ~somo u ermee no ronoraoor orover Nac o vmon, orrwo or nee,on. us Nucara nneutarory comm,wem.
Division of Systems Technology Office of Nucleat- Regulatory Research U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington, DC 20555-0001 0 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES i1 ABSTR ACT 1200 mue, or our NURE04700, Rev.1, pnmdes human factors engmeenng (HFE) guidance to the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission staff for its: (1) review of the human system interface (HSI) design submittals prepared by licensees or applicants for a license or design certification of commercial nuclear power plants, and (2) performance of HSI reviews that could be undertaken as part of an inspection or other type of regulatory review involving HSI design or incidents involving human performance The guidance consists of a review process and HFE enWM The docummt describes those aspects of the HS! design review process that are important to the identification and resolution ofhuman enginemng discrepancies that could adversely affect plant safety. Guidance is provided inat could be used by the staff to review an applicant's HSI design review process or to guide tle development of an HSI design rche plan, e.0, as part of an inspection activity.
The document also provides detailed HFE guidelines for the assessment of HSI design implementatims. NUREG-0700, Revision 1, consists of three stand-alone volumes. Volume I, Humah System Interface Design Review Guideline: Process and Guidelines, is the principal technical document and provides a detailed discussion of both the review procedures and HFE guidelines. Volume 2, Human System Interface Design Review Guideline: Reviewer's Checklist, provides the HFE guidelines in a checklist format. Volume 3, Human System Interface Design Review Guideline: Review Software and User's Guide, contains an interactive software a[ plication to support design revicWs.
12 K E Y WO R DS 'O E SC R P T OR S it e,r . ore, ,w em,. , ras, o,ir ,,me ra, .rca,.,, m sa, ,,,.., ,no ,-,me, i o AvAeLAsiui v f f A T EMENT control rooms, human factors engineering, man-machine systems, unlimited nuclear power plant design, reactor safety, decision making, a ucum r , ctAssa.cA noN l functional models, inspection, interfaces, reactor instrumentation, ,r,,,,,,,,,,,
reactor operators, standardization unclassified f Th,5 Mts,ortl unclassified l I 15 NUMBER OF PAGES 16 PRICE N.4c mnv o e. am
lt-
).
-- - - ~
JUNE 1996 q NUREG-0700, Rev.1, Vol.2 IIUMAN-SYSTEM INTERFACE DESIGN REVIEW GUIDELINE i 1
f __ _ _ . _ _ _ . - . . _ _~_
f i
__ _ __________ - ___ _ _ __- . _. . ..